Home

F2424 User`s Manual

1. IR Remote Output LED Digital Output Constrast sensor Indicators Red vale R Display Port R d CPU Status Ke Indicators GE 1 va o o m 17 E9 oe 2a 100 189 20 OV erla ES melt ES a RS232C COMM1 eieiei sl ER va 129 e Digital amp Special s jmo va lb em 0 Outputs Section 0 mm XBEE m e El AE m 2229 3 o T socket ml ESl E p LEE E 3 mp m uGER E GAER RS485 COMM2 le Ge ERT M gt 5 N RS485 COMM3 e 231 5 Board 1 Ee m 9 ED 5V Analog Ref 2 o 1029 D A D 1 to8 m 3 Be n 11 E D D A 1 to 4 4 e 12 28 Digital and Special OV Analog Gnd m 5 ES EES Ce Inputs Section 6 e 149 ED 7 9 usa a fe 1629 E Digital Input Input LED Terminals Indicators Green Figure 1 1 1 1 Overview The Fx2424 PLC is a new generation of F series PLC and designed to replace the F2424 model Fx2424 is electrically identical to the F2424 The main difference is that the Fx2424 supports all the floating point TBASIC commands available in I TRILOGI version 7 TL7 whereas the original F2424 only support the integer math available in
2. ccccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeeeseseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeenes 15 1 15 3 1 Command Response Frame Format Point to Point 15 2 15 3 2 Error RESPONSE FORMAL essiri usea nas E AEREE ANERE 15 2 15 4 MULTI POINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM cccesssseceeessseceeeseseeeenseseeeenseeeeneesseeenes 15 3 15 4 1 Command Response Frame Format Multi point eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 3 15 4 2 Calculation Of E 15 4 15 4 3 Communication Procedure cccccccseesceceeseeceeeceeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeaeeeseneseeeseeeeeeesseeaeesessesaeess 15 4 15 4 4 Schule tel EE 15 5 15 4 5 Command EMMONS onsereen EE EE T E E 15 5 15 4 6 SHOULD YOU USE POINT TO POINT OR MULTI POINT PROTOCOUH 15 5 159 R9485 Prime EE 15 6 15 5 1 RS485 Network Interface Hardware 15 6 15 5 2 Protection of RS485 Interface 15 6 15 5 3 Single Master RS485 Networking Fundamentals s ssseeseseseeesinesrnssrnssrresrnssrrssrresrns 15 7 15 5 4 Multi Master RS485 Networking Fundamentals 15 8 15 5 4 1 Multiple Access with Collision Detection 0 cccccccccecessseceeeesneeeeessneeeeessneeeeesseeeeess 15 8 15 5 4 2 Token Awarding Scheme ssessseessesssesssesssessseessnssrsesnsnsrtnsrnntnnttnnntnnntnnnnnnnntnnnnnnnnt 15 9 15 5 4 3 Rotating Master Gong 15 9 15 5 5 TROUBLE SHOOTING AN DRGAOpNETWOnk nnns 15 9 16 HOST LINK PROTOCOL FORMAT 16 1 16 1 Device ID Read ege EEN EE ee EES 16 1 162 DO VICS ID Wit age convict eege Eeer 16 1 16 3 R
3. 4 wire Bipolar driver 5 wire Unipolar or bipolar driver 6 wire Unipolar or bipolar driver Figure 10 1 m Tri eee 10 1 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control The most commonly available stepper motors today are either 4 wire 5 wire or 6 wires types and their windings are as shown in Figure 10 1 e 4 wire stepper motors require drivers that can reverse current flow from coil terminal 1 to 2 or from 2 to1 as well as from terminal 3 to 4 or from 4 to 3 These kinds of drivers are known as bipolar drivers e 5 wire stepper motors typically connect the common terminal 5 to the power e g 24V DC and 4 current sink drivers are connected to terminals 1 to 4 to sink the current to OV The sequence in which the four coils are activated controls the rotation of the stepper motor These kinds of drivers are known as unipolar drivers e 6 wire stepper motors are the most flexible and may be connected either to bipolar drivers leaving terminals 5 and 6 unconnected or to unipolar drivers connecting terminals 5 amp 6 together to terminal Since all the Fx2424 digital outputs are NPN current sink type only 5 or 6 wire type stepper motors can be used If you have a stepper motor with 6 wires most common but you do not have the wiring diagram you may be able to figure out which wire is which terminal by using a multi meter to measure the resistance between coils E g the
4. 14 7 3 OMRON Host Link Command Support Command Type Level of Support d IR Area READ mp Fulllsupport 0000to 1000 Cd e HR AR LR Area RH Dummy always returns O000 amp TC Status READ n DM AREA READ RD _ Fullsupport o PV READ Dummy always returns 0000 Dummy always OK r TR RESEARCH 14 1 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications D IR Area WRITE Full Support j HR AR LR Area WH WJ Dummy always Ok amp TC Status WRITE WL WG k DM Area WRITE Full Support from DM0001 DM4000 KRCIO Dummy for other areas for Channel or Bit QQIR Dummy for other areas always 0000 Some OMRON host link commands are described in Section 16 40 For other commands please refer to the Omron C20H C40H PLC Operation manual published by OMRON Corporation If your purpose is only to use the PLC s OMRON mode with SCADA or HMI then there is no need to learn the actual command response format 14 7 4 Application Example Interfacing to SCADA Software SCADA software or MMI systems also known as LCD Touch Panels normally use an object oriented programming method Graphical objects such as switches indicator lights or meters etc are picked from the library and then assigned to a certain I O or internal data address of the PLC When designing a SCADA system first you need to define the PLC type You can choose the MODBUS ASCII MODBUS RTU or OMRON C20H Once a graphical object has been created you
5. The CPU should use the STATUS 2 command to check whether the lt WRITE gt has been successfully executed before begin writing data to it STATUS 2 command returns a 1 if lt WRITE gt operation is successful and returns a 0 if the operation failed The CPU can only write or access to a single file at a time so any opened file must be closed by the PRINT 8 lt gt command before another file can be opened for writing 20 4 2 Open A File For Appending Data To The End Of The File Syntax PRINT 8 lt APPEND Zxxx yyy gt where Zxxx yyy is the file name If successfully executed the lt APPEND gt command will open the file and set the file pointer to the end of the file Thereafter any string data following a PRINT 8 command will be appended to the end of the file When the PLC has completed appending data it must close the file by executing the command PRINT 8 lt gt As per the lt WRITE gt command the CPU should also use the STATUS 2 command to check whether the lt APPEND gt command has been successfully executed before begin writing data to it Example PRINT 8 lt APPEND Z STRS F 3 txt gt S STATUS 2 Status 2 returns 1 if successful IF S lt gt 1 RETURN ENDIF FOR I 1 to 100 PRINT 8 STRS I 4 This is the Appended first line PRINT 8 STRS I 4 This is the Appended second line SETLCD 1 1 Append STRS I 4 NEXT PRINT 8 lt gt close t
6. DM 8 These are also the label names set in the 0 HTM file but they could be set to anything such as what is shown in the 2 HTM file 2 10 3 Customizing the HTML Files Now that you know about the components included in the HTML files you can try to customize the HTML files to fit your application or just for fun In order to customize the HTML files you will need to open them with a text editor such as Notepad The file 0 HTM will be used as the example in this section but 2 HTM may be referred to occasionally as well These files typically open with your default web browser so you will need to right click on 0 HTM select Open With and then choose Notepad exe or your preferred text editor Once you have opened 0 HTM in your text editor you will need to scroll down to the area in the file where it says Level 1 User Modifications Begins here You should then see the following in your text editor TR RESEARCH 2 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port E 0 HTM Notepad DER File Edit Format view Help Pta ta ta ta ta ta ba ta e a Va ba Wa ba Va Va Va Va ba Va ba Va ia WA Va a RRR V A VA VE ROR ROH HCH Level 1 user modifications Begins here ete te te te Ve Ve Ve Va Ve Ne Ve e te We Ve Va Va Ve Ve Ve Ve te We e Ve Ve Va Ve Ve Ve Fa te te te Ye e Va A function userPreferenced bgimagesrc 3 J LCD 22 52 ff starting x y location of LCD panel LCDSIZE 360 21 ff width height of each line of L
7. E g To write the value 123410 4D2 to DM 1000 send hostlink command wvD03E804D2 100019 3E8416 ma V TRIANGLE 16 14 Do RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 34Write Variable Multiple Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 Command Format iw Tv To hehehehehe hehe EES ES a N 16 bit Index to array 17 16 bit Integer 2 16 bit Integer 0001 to 03E8 1000 NT last 16 bit integer Response Format wjyjb gt jo 16 35Write Variable Singe Float Array FP 1 to FP 1000 Command Format 16 bit Index to array 8 hexadecimal digit 0001 to 03E8 100040 in 32 bit IEEE format Response Format E g To write the value 6 265599F9 4FBABABABA in IEEE to FP 1000 send hostlink command WVF03E8 4F BABABABA 16 36Write Variable Multiple Float Array FP 1 to FP 1000 Command Format 16 bit Index to array 1 IEEE float data 2 float 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 last IEEE float data o_o TRIANGLE 16 15 URA RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Response Format 16 37 Write Variable System Variables Variable 0 02 0 Variable i 3 04 timerPV 06 oD ctrPV Not a system variable in TBASIC Command Format Femme Tse type Index 16 bit Integer Data type 01 to0D denotes the type of system variabl
8. E mail Outlook Express a My Network Places E Calculator Figure 2 8 1 KW Wireless Network Connection _ Show all connections 2 Local Area Network Properties Next the Network Connections window should open which will display all of your network connections GNM connections nn ogg File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back lo Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Change Windows Firewall settings amp Disable this network device Wl Rename this connection E Change settings of this connection Wireless Network Connection Connected Shared Ka D I Broadcom 802 11b g WLAN 1394 Connection Connected SI E A 1394 Net Adapter Figure 2 8 2 Now you can either right click on the Local Area Connection and select Properties or highlight it and click on Change settings of this connection from the Network Tasks sidebar as shown above When you do this the following window will open TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TR 2 10 Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 3 Edit TCP IP Properties Now you want to highlight the Internet Protocol TCP IP item and click on Properties This will General Advanced open up a new window that allows you to change SE the network settings for the Ethernet port that you selected The Ethernet hardware you are B Realtek RTLE139 810x Family Fast configuring is shown unde
9. 1E24046 the PLC will send the response string as RVI0001E240 16 13 Read Variable Strings A to Z Command Format Te v s ara E kees ABC Response Format PRU vis tatata f tatatat o ASCII characters of the string variable length E g To read the value of the string variable M send host link command Rv m If variable M contains the string Hello World the PLC will send the response string as RV Hello World 16 14Read Variable Floating Point A to Z Command Format Pe v apraber Oo em ABC Response Format ER v 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 fie ee Header 8 Hexadecimal Digit in 32bit IEEE format TR aes 16 7 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format E g To read the value of the string variable M send host link command Rv m If variable M contains the string Hello World the PLC will send the response string as RVSHello World 16 15Read Variable Single Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 Command Format PR v D ijijiji gt SS NT 0001 to OFAO 4000 Address of DM Response Format R v D 16 167 16 Del 4 Hexadecimal Digit for 16 bit integer E g To read the value of DM 3600 send host link command RVDOE10 If variable DM 3600 contains the value 1234510 303946 PLC will send the response string as
10. 20 6 2 PLC FTP Upload Procedure In order to upload file to the FTP Server the PLC would use the PRINT 4 lt TCPConnect XXX XXX XXX XXX 21 gt command tag to connect to the FTP server port 21 to establish the command connection to the FTP Server The PLC uses its PRINT 4 to send and INPUT 4 to receive ASCII text strings from the FTP server via the command channel The PLC would then send the command PASV to inform the FTP server that it wants to transfer a file in passive mode At this point you can use the PRINT 4 command to send any valid FTP command to the server including changing directory CWD command make sure the directory exist deleting a file DELE command beware of what you are deleting etc When the PLC is ready to start a file transfer to the FTP server the server will in turn provide the PLC with the port number that it has opened for the PLC to connect to establish a data connection Upon receiving this port number the PLC will make a second TCP connection to the given port and then the actual file transfer will begin A new network service command tag named FTPUPLD handles the negotiation between the FTP Server and the PLC as well as handling of the data transfer from the PLC to the FTP server The following is the syntax PRINT 4 lt FTPUPLD Zxxx yyy destination file name gt Where Zxxx yyy is the file name of the extended file that the PLC has access to The destination
11. and press the Enter key assuming the PLC s ID is 01 and the PLC should send a response string 011R015B This shows that TLServer is now connected to the PLC via Zigbee radio Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication Je ES Custom Function 1 INIT SETBAUD 2 3 Select Function Edit Fn Name lt q lt gt gt Serial Communication Setup Port Name COM7 e Baud Rate 9600 v Data Bits 8 v Stop Bits 1 X Parity None v Time Out ms 500 Close Port E E Command String Press lt Enter gt to Send 01IR00 Response Strings amp Modem Messages COM7 opened at 9600bps 011R015B 4 L Change PLCID Close F1 Help 9 You can now use TRILOGI to perform online monitoring or programming of the PLC via TLServer in exactly the same way as if the PLC is connected to the PC serial port directly However in this case the connection is done wireless via the two XBEE modules The XBEE modules thus perform the same task as a pair of radio modems except that the actual connection is via a ZigBee mesh network instead of a point to point radio link 10 If you have more than one PLCs installed with the XBEE module you can change the destination address by repeating the ATDH and ATDL command as mentioned in step 4 and you would then be able to connect to a different PLC wirelessly While this is certainly not a practical way of using the XBEE module it is a good way to
12. e These two servers share the same Ethernet port and therefore the same IP address and gateway addresses described in the following sections e Fx PLC host both the FServer and Modbus TCP Server each providing multiple simultaneous connections to external clients This means that it is possible to connect multiple TRiLOGI ExcelLink and Modbus TCP clients to the PLC all at the same time Section 2 1 5 shows you how you can change the maximum number of connections for each server 2 1 1 IP Address One of the most important parameters that you must define here is the IP Address field By default every F series PLC is shipped with the static IP address 192 168 1 5 You will need to assign the PLC s with an IP address that is unique on your network and yet is accessible from your PC If you are on a company network then you must consult your company s system administrator to assign you a useable IP address However if your PC is connected to a small local area network then most likely you will have a LAN IP address of 192 168 XXX YYY For proper networking you should set the PLC s IP address to 192 168 XXX ZZZ i e The first three numbers should match each other The fourth number ZZZ should be an IP address that is not used by any other devices on your network Note that majority of small LANs are built using a network router that assigns dynamic IP addresses called DHCP server to the PC You should enter the ad
13. ATNI and the XBEE module will report the pre defined identifier as shown in our example 3 If you have more than one Fx2424 PLC with an XBEE module you can define them similarly with a different name suitable for your application In our case we have simply defined another XBEE module as PLC2 4 Next turn off power to the interface board and move the XBEE modules to the Fx2424 PLCs and then turn on power to the PLCs The PLCs XBEE modules should still be joined to the coordinator which is indicated by the blinking Assoc LED on the PLC 5 Now run the X CTU terminal program and connect to the Coordinator enter the node discovery command ATND and you will see the details of the XBEE nodes that are joined to this PAN This time you can see that the PLC s node identifiers PLC1 and PLC2 have been listed together with their 64 bit and 16 bit addresses 6 Now instead of using ATDH amp ATDL to enter the 64 bit node address we can simply use the ATDN command followed by the node identifier to set the destination address In our example we show a host link command 01IRO0 blue being sent from the X CTU terminal to PLC2 and the response string received from PLC2 red lola BR X CTU COM7 About PC Settings Range Test Terminal Modem Configuration Line Status Assert Close Assemble ETS DROEN OTA ATS Dech ComPort Packet 4 0K a ATND 74B1
14. Channel Data 00 to OF Response Format Ea E E 16 23Write Relays Command Format pwtRin fn ite fie o oe Channel Data Response Format RIL H g 16 24Write Timer contacts Command Format a oo oe Channel Data 00 to 07 ora TRIANGLE 16 11 URA RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Response Format 2 k R 16 25Write Counter contacts Command Format a oe a oe Channel Data 00 to 07 Response Format E 2 g 16 26Write Timer Present Value P V Command Format KT Timer1 00 New timer PV Timer64 3F Hex Response Format Please note that the timer number starts from 00 which represent timer 1 then 01 represents timer 2 and so on 16 27Write Timer Set Value S V Command Format Timer1 00 New timer SV Timer64 3F Hex Response Format Ca TRIANGLE 16 12 URA RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Note the 2nd character is a lower case m instead of the upper case M of WM command 16 28Write Counter Present Value P V Command Format Counter1 00 New PV Counter64 3F Hex Response Format 16 29Write Counter Set Value S V Command Format KT Counter1 00 New Counter SV Counter64 3F Hex Response Format Note the 2nd character is a lower case u instead of the upper case U
15. General Settings gt Welcome message leave only one line of welcome message so that the PLC has less work to do Then click OK to accept the change Ti Bees 20 7 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System FileZilla Server Options E General settings A MOIS TO Fil Welcome messi IP bindings On this page you can modify the welcome message that will be sent to each IP Filter connected client Passive mode sellin H you enter no custom message the default message will be used Secunty settings Rules for welcome messages Miscellaneous Please enter only 75 characters per line additional characters will be removed Admin Interface sett Empty lines at the top or bottom of the message will be removed Logging Custom welcome message GSS Settings Speed Limits Filetransfer compres SSL TLS settings Autoban K vl Format specifiers kv Displays version of FileZilla Server C Hide welcome message in log XY the character 6 Click Edit gt Users in order to setup a user name and password for your test The ExtendedFileSystem PC6 program uses a username PLC and password 1234 so fora quick test you may like to setup the same username and password 7 At the General page of the setup screen click Add button at the Users pane to add a username PLC Since no group has been defined simply leave the default as lt none gt in the secon
16. If the PLC s program is corrupted then you must re transfer your program to the PLC 1 10 3 Run Error Red LED When this indicator turns ON it shows that a run time error has occurred during execution of a TBASIC command The system will halt at the CusFn where the error took place If the programmer now executes the On Line Monitoring command in TRiLOGI the cause of the run time error and the CusFn where the error occurred will be reported on TRILOGI screen If you have installed an LCD display the PLC will take over the LCD screen and display the cause of the runtime error and the function where it occurred The TBASIC simulator captures many possible run time errors including out of range values but in the Fx2424 PLC only a few most important run time errors are reported The remaining errors are ignored The following are the few run time errors that will be reported in Fx2424 PLC Divide By Zero FOR NEXT loop with STEP 0 Call Stack Overflow Circular CALL suspected Illegal Opcode Please inform manufacturer System Variable Index out of range This is normally caused by using an unavailable subscript E g DM 0 INPUT 1 DM 5000 etc Check the subscript value especially if it contains a variable e g DM X if X 0 this will lead to a runtime error akon All run time errors should be identified and corrected before you proceed any further RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TRI TRIANGLE 1 1
17. S STATUS 2 IF S lt gt 0 SETLCD 1 1 Failed to Open File GOTO 100 ENDIF c 0 PRINT 8 AS SETLCD 1 1 A WHILE 1 AS INPUTS 8 S STATUS 2 IF S 255 EXIT ENDIF S 255 means EOF SETLCD 2 1 AS DELAY 50 So that reader can read from the screen C Ctl ENDWHILE SETLCD 1 1 Read STRS C lines 100 PRINT 8 lt gt close the opened file i RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TRI TRIANGLE 20 6 Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 5 Setting Up The FileZilla FTP Server One important capability of the new PLC with r77 firmware is the ability to upload file created by the PLC to an external server on a local area network or on the Internet via the FTP protocol If you have access to a FTP username and password on your company s server or if the SysAdmin is authorized to set up an account for you you can certainly use your own account for testing If not you can download the free Filezilla FTP Server and set it up for testing The ExtendedFileSystem PC6 has a FTP upload demo and it was configured to work with a FileZilla FTP server Using Filezilla has the advantage that you can see the login sequence performed by the PLC when it attempts to connect to the FTP Server so that it is easier to troubleshoot connection problem For professional grade troubleshooting one handy program to have is the Wireshark program which is a TCP IP packet sniffer that allows you to look at the actual
18. all Timert Output OUT Figure 4 2 Completed Timer Circuit 4 2 4 Example 2 Creating a Simple Counter Circuit in Ladder Logic You can place components in the circuit by clicking in the green area to the right of the red arrow as shown in Figure 4 3 below This will bring up the component tool bar in the gray area above the green circuit area K TRILOGI Version 6 13 Untitled File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Circuit 1 DEED eine quick Tags Figure 4 3 Creating Ladder Circuit Once the component toolbar is shown you can place your activating contact by selecting the 1 component from the toolbar EIS and then selecting the activating input from the I O Table The contact will then be automatically placed in the ladder logic circuit The same can be done for the counter coil by selecting the 7 component from the toolbar O and then selecting a counter that has been entered into the I O Table Then a counter contact needs to be added as an input to a ladder logic circuit This contact will activate once the counter counts down This could be used to turn on an output after a certain count is reached Placing a counter contact in a circuit is the same as placing any contact in a ladder circuit except that the corresponding counter should be selected from the Counters section of the I O table After creating a ladder circuit that contains one input and one counter output and another ladde
19. s ceseeee 2 28 2 7 Web Service Accessing PLC s data from MS Excel cccesecsseeeseeeeeeeeeesneesesneneeseeeeeas 2 29 2 8 Accessing The PLC from Internet c ccsccsseeeeeseceseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeseeseeeeeeeeeseaesaseenenseeeeeas 2 31 2 8 1 Small Local Area Network Using Consumer Grade Network Router n 2 31 2 8 2 Large Corporate Local Area Network essssssssssisssisssissrissrissrissrissrinssrinsrinsrnnstnnntnnnrnnntnn nt 2 32 2 9 Installing a Control Web Page Into the Fx PLC cccccsscssseeeeseeeesseeseseeeenseeesseesesneeeneeees 2 33 2 9 1 Installing the FileZilla program eccccececeeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeeseaeeseeeesaeessaeeeeeees 2 33 2 9 2 Configure FileZilla to Communicate with the Fx2424 oo eee eseeceeeeeseeeaeseneeeeeeneeees 2 33 2 9 3 Transferring and Retrieving Files from the PLC Web Server neseser 2 36 2 9 4 Troubleshooting FileZilla File Transfer Problems eseeseeseesseesseesseesriesrresresrreerresre 2 37 2 10 Accessing and Customizing the HTML Web Interface for Control and Monitoring 2 39 2 10 1 Accessing the HTML Files from a Standard Browser 2 39 2 10 2 Control and Monitoring Components in the Default HTML Files ccceseeeeereees 2 40 2 10 3 Customizing the HTML Files cccccecceeeseeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeceeeeeseaeeesaaaeseeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeess 2 41 2 10 4 Level 2 User Modifications 0 ccccccceccceeeeceeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseneeesea
20. wildcard FCS 00 in place of the actual FCS E g To read input channel 02 from a PLC with ID 01 you can enter the command string as O01RI0200 For TLServer version 2 1 and above there is an FCS button that lets you compute the actual FCS for the string in the command string text field You can then use the actual FCS with the command string to completely test your command E g If you type in the string 01RI02 in the command string but do not press Enter and then click on the FCS button the FCS for this string will be computed and shown as FCS 58 as shown in the following figure 10 x Port Name com DI Baud Rate 38400 DI Data Bits E D Stop Bits fi DI Parity None D Time Out ms 500 Open Port Close Port Hang Up Modem AutoAnewer Phone No Command String Press Enter to Send o1RI02 Response Strings amp Modem Messages ES Serial Communication Setup amp Test Change PLCID Close You now can enter the complete command string as 01R1I0258 and it will be accepted by TLServer Note If the PLC has executed a SETPROTOCOL n 5 to configure its serial port into pure native mode then wildcard FCS will not be accepted and you must use the actual FCS with your command The FCS button makes it much easier than computation by hand If you have changed some data using the write command then activate On Line Monitoring and examine the changes mad
21. 0 cccccsccsseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeneeeeeeeee sees enseeeeseaesasaeenseeeeeneessneeeseenenes 10 1 10 2 Stepper Motor Driver cccccecccececeeeceseeenseeeeesecescaeseseeeenseeeescaesaseeeenseaeeeeeeseaesaseeeenseeeseeeaas 10 1 10 2 1 Stepper Motor Wiring Types ccccccceeeeeeseeceeeeeecaeeeeaaeceeeeeceaeeesaaeeseaaeseeeeeseeeeseeeeenees 10 1 10 2 2 Damping Circuits Inductive Bypass cccceeesceeeeeeeceneeeeeseeceeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeaes 10 2 10 3 Stepper Motor Controller ccceeccescesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeescaeseseeeenseeeeeaesesaesaseeeeeeeeeseaeseseaesaseeeeseeenss 10 3 10 3 1 Interfacing to 5V Stepper Motor Driver INputs ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeas 10 4 10 4 Programming Stepper Control Channel cccccsccssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeceeseseeeeeeneeseeeseseeesneeeeeseees 10 5 10 4 1 IMFOCUCTION ET 10 5 10 4 2 Full Step Driver Mode AAA 10 5 10 4 3 Half Step Driver Mode 10 5 10 4 4 Setting the Acceleration Properties cccccceeccesseeeeeseceeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeessaeeeeaaeeeenees 10 5 10 4 5 Using the STEPMOVE Commande 10 6 10 4 5 1 Example PLC as a Motor Controller 0 ccccceccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeetas 10 6 10 4 5 2 Example PLC as a Full Step Motor Driver 10 7 10 4 5 3 Example PLC as a Half Step Motor Driver 10 7 10 4 6 Using the STEPMOVEABS Commande 10 7 10 4 6 1 Example PLC as a Motor Controller 0 0 cccceccceceeceeeeeeee
22. 0013A200 403E0279 PLC2 Show Hex Clear Screen 255A 0013A200 400A443C 4 0K ATDNPLC2 OK O1IROO eeh COM 9600 8 N 1 FLOW NONE Rx 121 bytes 7 You can see that using the Node Identifiers greatly simplify the connection procedure Note that for nodes PLC1 and PLC2 their destination address by default all points to address 0 which is TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TRI 19 6 Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication the default network address of the coordinator Therefore although we didn t specify the destination address for the Router nodes PLC1 and PLC2 they would automatically send all their responses back to the coordinator 8 If two Routers XBEE modules need to communicate with each other instead of with the Coordinator then it is necessary to set the destination node ID of each XBEE module to that of the other module so that the two nodes can talk to each other directly to exchange data However two nodes connected this way still would not exclude other nodes from sending data to either of them l e Any node including the coordinator can still send data to either PLC1 or PLC2 as long as it sets its destination address to either node But any response string returned from these two PLCs will not go back to the third sender since their destination address is not pointing to the sender You should remember this in order not to be surprised if the slave AT appears
23. Note that when the PLC has been power reset with DIP Switch 4 set to ON all 3 serial port will boot up with default baud rate and communication format of 38 400 8 n 1 This differs from the T100M PLC 1 9 Real Time Clock Battery All Fx2424 PLCs have a built in battery backed Real Time clock RTC On the Fx2424 CPU board there is a battery holder that takes a single CR1632 lithium primary battery Due to certain international aviation safety restrictions on shipping of products that contain lithium cells by airfreight or air courier your PLC may or may not be supplied with the battery If the battery is not included you can purchase the battery from a local electronics component supplier such as www futureelectronics com for US or Canadian users and simply press it into the battery holder The PLC s RTC consumes about 1A during power down A Ranata CR1632 lithium battery has a charge capacity of 125 mAh This means that theoretically the battery should be able to supply the RTC for 125 1000 hours or about 5200 days gt 10 years Since this Lithium battery has a shelf life of 10 years providing for a safety factor of 2 would mean that the single Ranata CR1632 should be able to power the PLC s RTC for at least 5 years and could be for as long as 10 years if the PLC is never powered down Tri eee 1 12 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 10 CPU Status Indicators There are three LED indicators on Fx CPU b
24. as illustrated in the following diagram 24V Opto isolated nf TRIAC SSR KT l F Series PLC gt ZS i d E l Outputs 2 WY A0 ai l 8 a Se i Figure 18 3 In the above circuit if the PLC turns on its output 8 it will provide continuous trigger voltage to the TRIAC gates and therefore the lamp can be switched on at 100 brightness When the PLC turns off its output 8 the lamp will be turned OFF completely To achieve light dimming control the PLC must determine the precise moment that the AC voltage crosses the zero voltage point and the PLC will then schedule a time delay and then send a short firing pulse via its digital output to the TRIAC to turn it on for the rest of the half cycle Since the TRIAC will turn itself OFF in the next zero crossing the PLC must do this repeatedly at every zero crossing in order to maintain the fractional power being applied to the lamp The Fx2424 is capable of controlling up to 12 SSR for light dimmer control using its digital outputs 5 to 16 Section 18 4 explains how to use a new i TRiLOGI function to readily program these light dimmers Important Note There are two types of SSR on the market one type is called Zero Crossing SSR which only switches ON when the AC voltage crosses the zero volt line Zero crossing type SSR CANNOT be used by the PLC for light dimmer control Instead you must purchase the Non Zero Crossing type of SSR for this p
25. controllers After the last stop bit has been sent the master controller must relinquish the RS485 bus by disabling its RS485 transmitter and enabling its receiver At this point the master will wait for a response from the slave controller that is being addressed Since the command contains the ID of the target controller only the controller with the correct ID would respond to the command by sending back a response string For the network to function properly it is obvious that no two nodes can have the same ID You can use the Setup Serial Port command in TLServer to set the ID for each Fx2424 You can also use the IW Host Link command to set the device ID Also all nodes must be configured to the same baud rate and communication format Care should be taken to ensure that the power supplies for all the controllers are properly isolated from the main so that no large ground potential differences exist between any controllers on the network 15 5 4 Multi Master RS485 Networking Fundamentals Since the Fx2424 is capable of sending out network commands the obvious question is whether multiple masters are allowed on the RS485 network It is possible to have multiple masters on a single RS485 network provided the issues of collision and arbitration are taken care of There are several means to achieve these objectives 15 5 4 1 Multiple Access with Collision Detection There is nothing to stop any PLC from sending out host link commands
26. http 192 168 1 5 9080 HOSTLINK RI00 Browse Web 2 Choose the part of the Web page that contains the data you want Note that pre formatted sections are treated as tables The entire page Only the tables C One or more specific tables on the page Enter table name s or number s separated by commas 3 Choose how much formatting from the Web page you want your data to keep Ze None C Rich text formatting only C Full HTML formatting Save Query Advanced C Cancel Figure 2 6 2 To see how the response data changes in response to the actual PLC s input please turn on some of PLC s digital inputs 1 to 8 then right click on the cell where the web query was defined and select te Refresh Data command You should see a new RIXX string appear at the selected cell where XX is the hexadecimal representation of the 8 input bits 1 8 E g if only inputs 2 and 8 are turned ON then the binary pattern is 1000 0010 which in hexadecimal form is 82 and the response string would therefore be RI82 You can then write an excel formula to extract the data 82 and use it for your other computation purpose By using a different Host Link command the Excel spreadsheet can read and write to the PLC s internal data very easily Notes 1 If you have enabled Use Username Password for the FServer you will be prompted by your Excel program to enter the Username and password b
27. this will open a telnet connection to the FTP server on our test PC with IP address 192 168 1 168 and listening at port 21 Please replace the IP address with the actual IP address of your PC The following screen shot captures the test sequence Note that the same command response sequence with the server is also shown on the FileZilla Server Interface program front panel USER PLC FileZilla Server 127 0 0 1 PASS 1234 File Server Edit cx Telnet 192 168 1 168 Make z p30 FileZilla Server version 0 9 48 beta 19 12 13 20 not logged in 192 168 1 168 gt Connected sending USER PLC o 331 Password required for plc PASS 1234 e 31 01 AM not logged in 192 168 1 168 gt 230 Logged on x e 01 AM not logged in 192 168 gt M not logged in 192 168 1 168 gt 220 FileZilla Server not logged in 192 168 1 168 gt gged in 192 168 1 168 logged in 192 168 1 16 011 10 31 09 AN t logged in 192 168 1 168 gt PA 3 2011 10 31 09 ple 192 168 1 168 gt 230 Logged on ID Account IP Transfer 000009 plc 192 168 1 168 52 bytes reen 2 Once you get the 230 Logged On message you know that the FTP setup is done correctly Note that the welcome message from the FTP Server shows only one line 220 FileZilla Server Version x xx which is what we have set it up to be You can now disconnect from the FTP server by typing Quit at the command prompt 3 There is one more things you need to do bef
28. 16 Support Function 06 16 WRITEMB2 Support Function 15 16 Support Function 16 DHCP IP address Will request for IP address from DHCP Not supported server if IP 0 0 0 0 The Fx2424 PLC features an Ethernet port that can be connected directly to a network router switch or hub for access to the LAN or to the Internet The Ethernet port supports the FServer for remote programming or monitoring and a Modbus TCP server for access by third party devices with up to 6 simultaneous connections The user s program can also easily connect to another PLC or Modbus TCP slave devices via the Internet email real time data to any email address es or connect to the Internet Time Server to get the most accurate real time information The Ethernet port also supports Web Services allowing enterprise software such as a database program or MS Excel to query for information from multiple PLCs instantaneously The basic Fx2424 unit comprises 8 analog inputs 12 bit O 5VDC 4 analog outputs 12 bit 0 5V DC 24 digital Inputs and 24 digital outputs 12 of the digital outputs 5 to 16 can each sink up to 8A peak and 4A continuous 24VDC current from the load and can be used to drive up to 3 small stepper motors directly saving you the expense of buying separate stepper motor drivers In addition 6 of the digital inputs can be used for decoding and measuring pulses received from up to 3 digital encoders allowing you to measu
29. 2 The specifications and programming methods for the analog I Os are detailed in Chapter 5 of this manual Tri eee 1 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 2 2 Digital I O Ports Detachable screw terminals are provided for quick connection to all digital inputs outputs and power supply wires Each block of screw terminals can easily be detached from the controller body enabling easy replacement of the controller board when necessary Since the terminal block for the digital I Os is inserted vertically to the board surface you would need to remove the terminal block before you can start wiring Insert a small flat head screwdriver under the terminal block and apply even pressure to raise the terminal block until it becomes loosened from the connecting pin strip as shown below wire Insulated crimp ferrules Flat head screw driver gt Figure 1 3 Removing Screw Terminal block CC Although wires may be connected directly to the screw terminal insulated crimp ferrules should be used to provide a good end termination to multi stranded wires Use of ferrules reduces the possibility of stray wire strands short circuiting adjacent terminals and their use is therefore highly recommended 1 2 3 Output Ground Terminals Notice that the output screw terminal block has an additional GND or COM terminal that is not found on the Input terminal block This is a common ground terminal for all the 8 outpu
30. 20 Extended File System Chapter 20 Extended File System i m TRIANGLE UR RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 EXTENDED FILE SYSTEM Before you begin please download a sample I TRiLOGI program that will be referred to throughout this manual from our website http www tri plc com trilogi ExtendedFileSystem zip 20 1 Introduction A F series PLC with r77 or later firmware now supports up to 1 740K bytes of file space that can be used for storing up to 435 web page control files More importantly a F series PLC with a new r77 firmware can open local data files in this file space and write append data to it The PLC can therefore log a large amount of data into one or more data files which can be retrieved for analysis anytime There are two ways to retrieve the stored data files from the PLC 1 Download the file from the PLC s built in web server The file created by the PLC can be downloaded from the PLC s built in web server using any web browser This allows the user to access the data file at any time of the day 2 Automatic FTP upload from the PLC to an external web server You can program the F series PLC to make a FTP client connection to any web server on the local network or on the Internet Cloud and upload the data file it has created to the web server using any filename Imagine what the Fx2424 can do with this new uploading capability The ability to log data locally and automati
31. 6 This is accomplished using the following command SETSYSTEM 22 1 Enable zero crossing interrupt 18 4 2 Programming Individual Dimmer Channel You can program up to 12 of the Fx2424 PLC s outputs 5 to 16 to control SSR for dimmer control purposes using the SETDIMMER command available only on i TRiILOGI version 6 23 onwards The syntax is as follows TR RESEARCH 18 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 18 Light Dimmer Control SETDIMMER ch value ch Light dimmer channel 1 to 12 This is mapped to the Fx2424 PLCs outputs as follows F series Output c 00 NIJ gt on aion amp CO 10 14 11 15 12 16 value Integer multiplier of an internal timer resolution approximately 53 microsecond to schedule the next firing time from the last zero crossing For 50Hz AC signal range 1 to 188 For 60Hz AC signal range 1 to 156 The lamp will be fully ON 100 brightness when value 1 and fully OFF 0 brightness when value is near the maximum stated above DO NOT set any of the dimmer channel with value greater than the maximum allowed for the corresponding AC frequency as it will lead to poor interrupt timing of the CPU and can affect all the dimmer channel if you see the light flickering repeatedly then some of the dimmer channel could have been set with an out of range value Note Since the CPU needs a minimum amount of time delay to fire
32. Counter on Sd en 49 to 64 40052 1 to 40052 16 817 to 832 Oon ee es 49 to 64 40068 1 to 40068 16 1073 to 1088 65 to 80 40069 1 to 40069 16 1089 to 1104 81 to 96 40070 1 to 40070 16 1105 to 1120 97 to 112 40071 1 to 40071 16 1121 to 1136 113 to 128 40072 1 to 40072 16 1137 to 1152 129 to 144 40073 1 to 40073 16 1153 to 1168 145 to 160 40074 1 to 40074 16 1169 to 1184 161 to 176 40075 1 to 40075 16 1185 to 1200 177 to 192 40076 1 to 40076 16 1201 to 1216 Relay 193 to 208 40077 1 to 40077 16 1217 to 1232 209 to 224 40078 1 to 40078 16 1233 to 1248 EE EE eS 497 to 512 40097 1 to 40097 16 1521 to 1536 U d MODBUS is a registered trademark of Groupe Schneider OMRON is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation r Toi ss 14 9 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications Modicon convention Binary address Timer 1 to 64 40129 to 40192 to 191 Present Values Counter 1 to 64 40257 to 40320 to 319 Present Values TIME 1 TIME 2 TIME 3 DATE DATE DATE DATE 4 Data Memory DM 1 DM 2 DM 4000 Floating point Array FPH 45001 amp 45002 5000 amp 5001 FP 2 45003 amp 45004 5002 amp 5003 FP 501 46001 amp 46002 6000 amp 6001 FP 1000 46999 amp 47000 6998 amp 6999 14 7 1 1 BIT ADDRESS MAPPING All the Fx2424 I O bits are mapped identically to both the MODBUS Ox and 1x space The bit register offset is shown in the last column of Table 14 1 Altho
33. Example E 4 6 4 5 Programming Sequencers in Custom Function ssssssssnsuunssunrnunnnnunnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnna 4 7 5 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 1 5 1 Analog Power upps eege eae eaae aa eaaa aaa aaa aaa aia aa a iaaa aaa aaa aaa aaa aa 5 1 5 2 Analog INpuls ernnsaeennnannennndnnnnnnnann nnana RNR N NRN REER 5 1 52 1 AUD HV 10 oriei eaaa aia aaa EREE AE A EEA aA iaia 5 2 522 AIDS 10 Borriana aa arataa AE ENEE EAEE AAE AEEA aA Ea 5 2 5 2 3 Interfacing to two wire 4 20MA eensors 5 3 5 2 4 Using Potentiometer to Set Parameterg 5 4 5 2 5 Reading Analog Input Data 5 4 DAO MOVING AYAJO TEE 5 5 5 2 7 Scaling of Analog Data 5 5 5 3 Temperature Measurement Using Analog INpUts cssecceseeeeeseeesseeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeneneees 5 6 5 3 1 Thermistor Temperature Gensors cece eeeeaeeeeeeeeceeeeseaeseseaeseeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeneeee 5 6 5 3 2 Using LM34 Semiconductor Gensor tetr nsttnettnnetnnstrnntrnsstnstnnsrnssrnnsrnnnnnn 5 7 53 3 Using Thermocouple s RRE 5 7 5 3 4 Using PT100 Temperature Sensor ccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeceeeeceaeessaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeneeee 5 7 5 4 ak fe Ka E 5 8 5 4 1 Programming The Analog Output cece eeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseeeeetaeeeeneeee 5 8 5 5 Calibration of ADC and DAC amp Moving Average Definition csseceseesseeeseeeeeeees 5 9 551 ADG eerste EE edit sas eed ens teed eege 5 9 552 ADC Zero OlfSel cecer sauce saci sates cecagt tend EE E ede E eadades ceva
34. Gee After you have defined the list of trusted SaeParameterstoPLO Close IP addresses and checked the Use Trusted IP radio button click on the vi Reboot PLC after Save Save Parameters to FServer to save RARRAARARARARARAARK Done your data to the PLC s non volatile memory Figure 2 4 1 fe c TRIANGLE Toi RESEARCH 2 25 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port When MODBUS TCP Use Trusted IP is enabled it means that only TCP IP packets that come from a client whose IP address matches one of the Trusted IP would be allowed connection to the MODBUS TCP server 2 5 3 Making a Modbus TCP Client Connection to Other Modbus TCP Server By using the Network Services commands described in Section 2 4 it is unbelievably easy for the Fx2424 to be used as a MODBUS TCP client to access any industrial control or HVAC device and sensors that support a MODBUS TCP server Best of all you can do it without learning any specifics of TCP IP programming To open a client socket and connect to a Modbus TCP Server that is listening on port 502 default Modbus TCP port you only need to send the command tags lt MBTCPCONNECT xxx xxx xxx xxx 502 gt to the CPU via virtual COMM port 4 E g PRINT 4 lt MBTCPCONNECT 192 168 1 105 502 gt If connection is successful the system will return the string lt CONNECTED gt on virtual comm port 4 which you can check with the INPUT 4 command
35. Hence the location of a logic element within the ladder diagram is important because of this sequential nature of the program execution When scanning the ladder program the CPU uses some internal memory variables to represent the logic states of the inputs obtained during the last I O refresh cycle Likewise any changes to the logic state of the outputs are temporarily stored in the output memory variable not the actual output pin and will only be updated to the physical output during the next I O refresh You can see that the CPU will only notice any change to the input logic state when it has completed the current scan and starts to refresh its input variables The input logic state must also persist for at least one scan time to be recognized by the CPU In some situations this may not be desirable because any response to the event will take at least one scan time or more An interrupt input on the other hand may occur randomly and the CPU will have to suspend whatever it is doing as soon as it can and start servicing the interrupt Hence the CPU responds much faster to an interrupt input In addition interrupts are edge triggered meaning that the interrupt condition occurs when the input either changes from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON Consequently the input logic state need not persist for longer than the logic scan time for it to be recognized by the CPU The Fx2424 PLC supports up to 10 interrupt inputs Any one or all o
36. IP address to be Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 192 168 1 xxx Preferred DNS server The xxx can be any number between 1 and 255 except for 5 your PC can t have same IP address as your PLC Altemate DNS server The Subnet mask should be set to 255 255 255 0 no matter what and the other settings should be left blank because you won t be connecting this Ethernet port to the Internet Figure 2 8 4 TR RESEARCH 2 11 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 5 Sample Configuration is meng ee ere TCP IP Properties Hx Here is an example of a configuration that will work if your PLC has an IP address of Senem 192 168 1 xxx where xxx is anything from 1 You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports 255 except 2 this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for EE Once you have set the IP address and Subnet mask you can click on OK and then click on OK again to close the Local Area Connection Properties window shown in Figure 2 8 5 Obtain an IP address automatically N IP address 192 168 1 BEE 255 255 255 0 Note When using direct Ethernet connection S you should leave the Default gateway field empty This can prevent the PC from trying to access the Internet through its Ethernet port which can cause the PC to lose
37. In the previous section 2 9 Installing a Control Web Page Into the Fx PLC you were shown how to transfer html files to the Fx web server These files can be accessed from any standard web browser that supports AJAX technology Internet Explorer Firefox Safari locally as long as your Fx PLC is connected to the LAN local area network or from anywhere in the world as long as your Fx PLC is connected to the Internet Even the iPhone and other smartphones that support AJAX can be used to access these web pages which means your application can be controlled and monitored from anywhere while on the go The Fx HMI zip file you downloaded in Section 2 9 for Fx PLC contain a control web page 0 HTM and a JavaScript file M JS that interfaces to the PLC These web pages run on HTML and JavaScript code which is why they are only accessible from standard browsers that support AJAX technology However the HTML files are designed to be easily modified by anyone even if you don t have any programming experience The purpose is to be able to easily customize the web page layout for your specific application by defining some label names and a background image without having to worry about the programming required to interface to the PLC which is already taken care of The basic HTML file O HTM is the file where simple modification can be made and the JavaScript file is M JS The M JS file should generally be left alone unless you are very
38. ON the designated sequencer will go from inactive to step 1 Subsequent changes of the sequencer s execution condition from OFF to ON will advance increment the sequencer by one step This operation is actually identical to the UPctr instruction The upper limit of the step counter is determined by the Set Value SV defined in the Counter table When the SV is reached the next advancement of sequencer will cause it to overflow to step 0 At this time the sequencer s contact will turn ON until the next increment of the sequencer This contact can be used to indicate that a program has completed one cycle and is ready for a new cycle Accessing individual steps of the sequencer is extremely simple when programming with TRiLOGI Simply create a contact NC or NO in ladder edit mode When the I O window pops up for you to pick a label scroll to the Special Bits table as follow KE 1 0 Labels al Special Bits vib Label Name Seqn x Normally ON jet Gran 0 01s Clock 0 02s Clock 0 05s Clock 0 1s Clock 0 2s Clock 0 5s Clock 1 0s Clack 1 min Clock RTC Error The Special Bits table is located after the Counters table and before the Inputs table Click on the SeqN x item to insert a sequencer bit You will be prompted to select a sequencer from a pop up menu Choose the desired sequencer 1 to 8 and another dialog box will open up for you to enter the specific step number for this sequencer Each step of the sequencer ca
39. Server Directory cccsssceeessseeeees 20 15 20 8 1 Overview of The FTP Protoco 20 15 20 8 2 PLC FTP Upload Procedure cccccccceeeeeeseeeeeneeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeeeaeseeneeee 20 16 20 8 3 Monitoring The FTP Upload Progress ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeneee 20 16 20 9 Setting Up A FTP Server Behind a Windows Firewall ccssccsseeeseecesseeeeseeeeeseeeeea 20 18 21 USING PLC AS A MODBUS TCP GATEWAY 21 1 21 1 ge D ilo n Paena cece tec ewes E E E 21 1 21 2 Application Ideas for Modbus TCP Gateway s sssunssunsuunnnunnnunnnunnnnunnuunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnn 21 1 21 3 Configuring The PLC As Modbus TCP Gateway s sssnssunnsunnnunnnunnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnn 21 1 21 4 Fine Tuning The Modbus TCP Gateway Function s sccsseeeeeseeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseseeneneees 21 2 21 5 Modbus TCP Gateway Sample Program sssssssnsuunsuunnuunnuunnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 21 3 M SF TRIANGLE j URA RESEARCH Page xi INTERNATIONAL Ten LA Chapter 1 Installation Guide Chapter1 Installation Guide For Fx2424 PLC TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FX2424 PLC WLLL 12 to 24V DC Power Supply j 1N4007 LCD Display Module aah for PLC 1000uF 50V E Cap Optional
40. TRiLOGI version 6 TL6 Fx2424 is designed to be 100 backward compatible to F2424 hence it can also be programmed by TL6 as well as TL7 This means in most cases the F2424 users can simply transfer their PC6 file to the Fx2424 unmodified For existing users of F2424 upgrading to Fx2424 the following summarizes the main difference between the two PLC models Ti v TRIANGLE T RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide Fx2424 F2424 Program memory 23 5K words 16K words Programming software TL7 and TL6 TL6 Only Floating point math 32 bit Single precision IEEE754 Floating point variables A to Z FP 1 to FP 1000 Modbus support for Mobdus memory mapping for FP 1 to floating point vars FP 1000 Hostlink commands for New commands added floating point vars RVF and RV A to RV Z e Default IP 192 168 1 15 9080 e No change in IP address DIP Switch 3 ON e Bypass username password and e Bypass username password trusted IP and trusted IP Support multiple DM New modified RVD command Only via OMRON command Read command DM volatility DM 1 to DM 4000 can be non volatile On y DM 300 to DM 4000 can be non volatile SETSYSTEM 6 pn n function SETSYSTEM 6 n READMODBUS Support Function 01 02 03 04 Support Function 03 04 READMB2 Support Function 01 02 03 04 Support Function 03 04 WRITEMODBUS Support Function 05 06
41. This will bring up the Network Connections window where you can configure the necessary network settings for the local adapter Follow steps 2 5 in the Windows XP Ethernet Configuration section above to complete the setup as it is the same process TRI RESEARCH 2 14 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 3 On line Monitoring Programming via FServer If you have used the I TRiILOGI software to connect to TLServer previously the procedure is identical To test TRILOGI communication with the F series PLC click on Controller gt On Line Monitoring or simply press lt CTRL M gt keys amp i TRILOGI Version 7 0 C Program Files TRILOGI TL 7 usr samples Wemo PC7 Sou E If File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Circuit Select Controller Cl VO Table Connect to Server Run H On Line Monitoring CLM Ya RLY un z Duration a Program Transfer to PLC Ctrl T ti TIM Transfer CO5 file to PLC Open Matching Source File Seql un Til Get PLC s Hardware Info k ANS Set PLC s Real Time Clock Reboot PLC Power ON reset EEPROM FRAM Manager Segl A S Outl H Ethernet ADC Configuration ol our Auto Calibrate Analog Outs o OUT Seql 2 Out NEE OUT Login To TLSever x Servers IP Address port 492 168 1 5 9080 BEE 1 PLC Only ID Hex C localhost 127 0 0 1 9080 Use Http Proxy Server Username Samples Password V Memorize Username amp Pass
42. Van Average a XV Ful i a b Figure 11 1 The average voltage seen by the load is determined by the duty cycle of the PWM waveform The duty cycle is defined as follow a D le 9 uty Cycle ENT x 100 Period a b Frequency 1 period Hz Average voltage duty cycle multiplied by the full load voltage Vru Since the voltage applied to the load is either Fully ON or Fully OFF it is highly efficient because the switching transistors are working in their saturated and cut off region and dissipate very little power when it is fully turned ON 11 2 Fx2424 PLC PWM Outputs Technical Specifications No of Channels Duty Cycle range 0 00 to 100 00 Worst case resolution Available Frequencies Hz 50Hz to 50 KHz Frequency Errors lt 0 01 100Hz lt 0 5 10KHz lt 2 50KHz Relevant TBASIC commands SETPWM m TRI RESEARCH 11 1 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs Unlike in the T100M PLCs which only support 8 fixed frequencies settings the PWM channels in the Fx2424 PLC can generate pulses with frequency ranging from 1Hz all the way to 50KHz At the lower frequency range the output frequency can be extremely accurate less than 0 01 error Even at 10KHz the output frequency error is less than 0 5 This makes it possible to use the PWM channels to generate square wave pulses of a certain frequency For example in Section 17 4 3 we show you how
43. XBEE demo zip the program has been tested and fine tuned to match the XBEE behavior and is easy for you to incorporate into your own software 19 3 4 Practical Applications of XBEE Modules In Transparent Mode 1 One possible application is to setup a Fx2424 PLC installed with an XBEE Coordinator as a master PLC A number of F series PLCs installed with XBEE router or end device modules can be spread across the control environment to perform local control independently but at the same time they also act as ZigBee slave controllers All ZigBee slave controllers would set their destination node address to the Coordinator attached to the master PLC If a ZigBee PAN is properly setup and operational then the master PLC can access any slave controller to read write data simply by setting the Destination node to the slave controller s node identifier and then send host link commands to the slave controller However due to the time taken to get in and out of the command mode to set the destination node address such a system is only suitable if the master PLC does not need to access the slave PLC frequently or if there are only a small number of slave controllers it needs to access It would not be suitable for implementing remote I Os where the master controller needs constant status updates of remote I Os 2 A modification of a system described above is to program each of the slave PLCs to monitor its local I O Then it can then send an ASCII string to
44. another F series PLC on the Internet since every F series PLC has a MODBUS TCP server too Once the connection with the Modbus TCP server is established the CPU will return the response string lt CONNECTED gt to the users program which can Tri eee 2 26 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 2 Ethernet Port read it using the INPUT 4 function The STATUS 3 function can also be used to determine if the connection is successful and alive When the program gets the confirmed connection it can then use any one of the four TBASIC commands READMODBUS WRITEMODBUS READMB2 WRITEMB2 to read or write data to the remote devices via the virtual comm port 4 as if a Modbus slave device has been locally connected to a COMM4 port of this PLC You do not need to distinguish between Modbus ASCII and RTU in this case simply use comm port 4 in your all your commands Multiple Modbus master commands can be sent as long as the connection is live You can test the connection status by checking the result of the STATUS 8 function at any time Once all the command exchanges have been completed you should send a lt gt tag to close the client connection to the remote server so that other NS commands can be executed in other parts of the program Example Please refer to the fnMBTCP fnRdMBTCP and fnWrtMBTCP custom functions in the demo program TestEthernet PC6 O D TRIANGLE 2 27 LRR RESEARCH L INTERNATION
45. are handshaking signals whose presence may be required by some modems to work properly so these pins are connected as shown in the diagram 14 3COMM2 COMM Two wire RS485 Port These two half duplex RS485 ports are meant for serial bus type networking or for connecting to optional peripherals such as a serial LCD message display unit e g MDS100 BW external analog modules e g l 7018 touch panel HMI or for inter communication between PLCs Up to 255 RS232 RS485 peripheral devices may be linked together in an RS485 network on both COMM2 and COMMS The RS485 ports are available on 2 way screw terminals between the RS232 COMM1 port and the analog I O DB15 connector please refer to Chapter 1 Installation Guide For successful communication using either of the RS485 ports you need to correctly connect the and terminals to the RS485 equipment using a twisted pair cable If you are using the PC as the network host you will need an RS232C to RS485 converter such as the Auto485 The following describes some possible uses of the RS485 ports 14 3 1 PROGRAMMING AND MONITORING A Fx2424 can be programmed via its RS485 port on a one to one or multi drop manner Since most PCs only have RS232 port s or USB ports for which USB to RS232 converters are readily available you need to purchase an RS232 to RS485 converter in order to program the PLC via its COMM2 and COMMS port The most commonly available types of RS485 co
46. back to the host computer and this completes the communication session If the controller accepts the command the response frame will start with the same header as the command followed by the information that has been requested by the command and the terminator As you can probably see proper handshaking using the Ctrl E character between the host and the PLC is important to communicate successfully using the Point to point protocol Although the Multi point format discussed in the next section seems more complex the communication exchange using multi point protocol is actually simpler than point to point since it involves only a single exchange of command response string We therefore recommend using the multi point format if you are writing your own communication program Note TBASIC has a built in command NETCMD that lets a Fx2424 access another slave PLC using the multipoint Host link protocol format very easily If an unknown command is received or if the command is illegal such as access to an unavailable output or relay channel the following error response will be received 15 3 2 Error Response Format The host computer program should always check the returned response for possibilities of errors in the command and take necessary actions j TRI RESEARCH 15 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol The F Series PLC Host Computer Send Ctrl E 05H and wait
47. both counted and measured simultaneously on the same input 8 2 2 Measuring Transducer with VCO Outputs Some transducers incorporate a Voltage Controlled Oscillator VCO type of output that represents the measured quantities in terms of varying frequency of the output waveform Such transducers may be used conveniently by the Fx2424 using the pulse measurement capability However the frequency of such signals should be below the maximum input pulse rate 8 2 3 Measuring Transducer with PWM Outputs Some transducers may output the readings of their measurands the quantity that is being measured in the form of pulse width modulated outputs This means that the transducer would send rectangular pulses with varying duty cycles that are proportional to the measured quantities You can then easily use the PULSEWIDTH and PULSEPERIOD functions to compute the duty cycle of the incoming PWM pulses and readily convert it to the actual units of the measurands The Fx2424 PLC should be able to measure with reasonable accuracy the pulse width of incoming pulses not exceeding 10KHz Although the PLC should be able to measure incoming pulse frequency of up to 20KHz the 100pF noise filtering capacitors used at the digital inputs 1 16 would distort the signal at high frequency such that the measured pulse width would be of somewhat poor accuracy fe K TRIANGLE E IRA RESEARCH 8 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 8 Frequency Speed Measurement 8 3
48. change the coordinates for the starting location of the data memory items DMLocxX DMLocY 24 24 24 24 204 204 204 204 185 205 225 245 185 205 225 245 The values in the square brackets for DMLocxX are the x coordinates for each data memory item The label and field for DM 1 is the first value and the next value is for DM 2 etc Note that the default x coordinates are all the same so they are in line vertically but they each have different y coordinates The values in the square brackets for DMLocyY are the y coordinates for each data memory item The label and field for DM 1 is the first value and the next value is for DM 2 etc Changing the Size of Display Data Labels and Buttons It is possible to change the default size of the interactive objects which are the Data Memory labels and fields the Internal Relay Bit buttons and the LCD Display Only the values need to be edited in the corresponding lines of code in the HTML file just like how the x y coordinates can be edited Again some trial and error will be required to find the desired size F Tri eee 2 43 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Resizing the LCD Display LCDSIZE 360 21 width height of each line of LCD The specified size is reflected equally in all four of the display lines so each line cannot have a different size Resizing the Internal Relay Bit Buttons IOwidth 80 Fixed width for I O button Set
49. crossover cable is required If you are not sure if your PC s Ethernet port is able to perform auto switching most modern PC has auto switching built in then it is best to use a crossover cable A crossover Ethernet cable will work in both situations but a straight through Ethernet cable will only work if one or both of the Ethernet ports can perform auto switching How to Set Up Your PC Before you can communicate with the PLC you will need to configure the Ethernet port on your PC to match the settings that you configured in the PLC For more information on configuring the PLC Ethernet settings see section 2 1 Configuring The Ethernet Port Once you have configured your PLC s Ethernet settings you will need to set your PCs Ethernet port to have a static IP address that is on the same subnet as the IP address you had set for your PLC How you do this is a bit different depending on your operating system so the following sections will show step by step instructions for configuring your PCs Ethernet settings on Windows XP and then on Windows Vista Windows XP Ethernet Configuration 1 Open Network Connections The first thing you will need to do is open the Network Connections window from the Start menu by selecting Show all connections from the Connect To menu as shown here i ma V TRIANGLE 9 9 p RESEARCH LIJ INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port es HyperTerminal Internet Mozilla Firefox
50. cycle You normally should not change these parameters from their default values r ma V TRIANGLE 17 5 D RESEARCH LAS INTERNATIONAL Chapter 18 Light Dimmer Control Chapter 18 Light Dimmer Control r TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 18 Light Dimmer Control 18 LIGHT DIMMER CONTROL 18 1 Introduction You may have used one of those commercial light dimmers to control the brightness of incandescent light bulbs Modern light dimmers are mostly based on controlling the firing angle of a type of semiconductor switch known as TRIAC which stands for AC transistor A TRIAC is a semiconductor switch that conducts current when a trigger voltage is applied to its Gate terminal However what makes the TRIAC different from a typical transistor is that once the TRIAC starts conducting current it cannot be switched off even if the voltage to the gate is removed Le The TRIAC switch is latched once it is turned ON That also means that you only need to apply a very short trigger pulse to the Gate to turn it ON In control term this is often known as firing of the TRIAC Since the TRIAC is latched ON and cannot be turned OFF regardless of what voltage or no voltage is applied to the Gate it will be quite useless for switching DC current as the switch cannot be turned OFF However when a TRIAC is used to switch AC current since at every half cycle the
51. down these two numbers as they are needed for our tests TE TRIANGLE ike RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL BR X CTU COM7 About FC Settings Range Test Terminal Modem Configuration arim Line Status Assert thee Cleat Sh DEJA OTR ATS Break Con Port G 4 0K a 3004 0013A200 400A6364 Assemble Packet 74B1 0013A200 403E0279 COM 9600 DN FLO W NONE Rx 98 bytes 19 3 3 The 64 bit serial number is unique for each XBEE device produced by the manufacturer so your XBEE module will definitely have a different serial number from ours the upper 32 bit typically would be the same for devices from the same manufacturer For Digi ZigBee products it is 0013A200 but the lower 32 bit will be different for each device In transparent mode we can force the coordinator to make a transparent connection to a specific router or end device by specifying the serial number in two commands ATDH and ATDL destination address High and destination address Low Each command will specify the 32 bit half of the 64 bit serial number 4 Next use the X CTU terminal to enter the following commands ATDH0013A200 ATDLXXXXXXXX where XXXXXXXX is the lower 32 bit address of the router device that you want to connect to In our example we entered ATDL403E0279 which is the serial number of the router that we want the coordinator to connect to You can confirm that the desti
52. entire network goes down with it too This is because no other node is able to assert proper signals on the two wires that are also common to the shorted device Hence when trouble shooting a faulty RS485 network it may be necessary to isolate all the PLCs from the network Thereafter reconnect one PLC at a time to the network starting from the node nearest to the host computer Use the TRILOGI program to check communication with each PLC until the faulty unit has been identified Tri eee 15 10 INTERNATIONAL j Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Chapter 16 Host Link Protocol Format j v TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 HOST LINK PROTOCOL FORMAT This chapter describes the detailed formats of the command and response frames for all Fx PLC host link commands Only the formats for the point to point communication protocol are presented but all these commands are available to the multi point protocol as well To use a command for multi point system simply add the device ID nn before the command header and the FCS at the end of the data See Chapter 3 for detailed descriptions of multi point communication command format 16 1 Device ID Read Command Format EL es Response Format I TR te te o KT Device ID 00 to FF The device ID is to be used for the multi point communication protocol so that the host computer can select
53. internet Use the following DNS server addresses connection Default gateway Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Advanced Figure 2 8 5 Now your Ethernet port has been configured and you can try to connect to your PLC from I TRiILOGI using your PLCs IP address and port number Note a Connecting the PC s Ethernet port directly to the PLC only establishes a private network connection between the two devices That is to say the PLC connected this way is ONLY accessible to this PC Even if the PC is connected to a LAN e g via Wi Fi connection the PLC connected to this PC via direct Ethernet connection will not be accessible by any other devices on the same LAN and the PLC will not be able to open network connection to any other devices beyond the PC that it is connect to this way Sometimes the PC that is connected directly to the PLC via Direct Ethernet Connection may lose its Internet connection via Wi Fi This is because the O S thinks that the direct Ethernet connection to the PLC is a real network connection and attempt to route TCP IP packets through it That will result in a connection failure If this occurs and you need to access the Internet then please temporarily remove the Ethernet cable from the PLC and the PC should then be able to access the Internet again Windows 7 Ethernet Configuration 1 Open the Network Window The first thing you will need to do is open the Network window f
54. into Modbus TCP response packet and return to the client Note 1 If the Modbus RTU slave being addressed does not respond to the RTU command then the gateway PLC will wait till time out default is about 150ms and then resend the Modbus RTU command and wait for a response again By default the gateway PLC will repeat this procedure twice and if it still doesn t receive a response after repeated attempts it will send back a TARGET DEVICE FAILED TO RESPOND error packet back to the Modbus TCP client i e It will set the 7 bit of the function code to 1 and send back an exception code OB hex 2 The CPU firmware is designed to handle only one Modbus gateway translation for each Modbus TCP connection per ladder logic scan This is to ensure that the CPU is not completely bogged down by its Modbus gateway job and will have time to run its own program If the Modbus TCP clients attempt to overload the PLC with more requests than it can handle the PLC will frequently return SLAVE DEVICE BUSY error response packets back to the client i e It will set the 7 bit of the function code to 1 and send back an exception code 06 21 4 Fine Tuning The Modbus TCP Gateway Function It is important to know that every time the PLC runs a Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU translation its own program scan time increases due to the need for the CPU to wait for a response from the slave Modbus RTU devices The delay becomes much more p
55. njn nje cefeclc ya Device ID Header DM Address Dec DM count Hex a FCS Response Format ta a R o ss te 16 16 16 Femme emer Fe Device ID Header Status 17 Data Hex 00 OK 16 Fre Ten Last data FCS E g To read DM 1 12 to 130 19 words send 01RD0112001357 The PLC will send return a response O01RDOOxxxxyyyy222z 16 48 4 WRITE Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 Command Format f af al w o n n n n 16 167 16 16 er Device ID Header DM Start Addr Dec 17 data 16 be Last data FCS Response Format Device ID Header Status FCS E g To Write to DM 1200 to 1201 using this command send 01WD1200xxxxyyyyff where xxxx and yyyy are the values to be written to DM 1200 amp DM 1201 Ten Resear 16 22 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 49Testing of Host Link Commands You can try out all the Host Link commands using TLServer s Serial Communication Setup However TLServer is designed to accept only multi point protocol commands except the IR command which is necessary to obtain the device ID from the PLC You therefore have to enter all your host link commands in multi point format Since the multi point protocol requires a FCS frame check sequence character to be appended to the end of the command string you may be able to get around it by using the
56. of the WU command 16 30Write Variable Integers A to Z Command Format ABC Z 8 Hexadecimal Digit for 32 bit integer Response Format E g To assign variable K to number 56789 0DD5 send hostlink command WVIKOOOOODD5 o_O TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH 16 13 LJ K INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 31 Write Variable Strings A to Z Command Format w y s abnabet ot panat Mea A B C Z ASCII characters of the string variable length Response Format pwtvy it st oO E g To assign the string Super PLC to the string variable P send hostlink command wvsP Super PLC 16 32Write Variable Floating point A to Z Command Format wv prama Te Tepe Te pepe pel 5 A B C Z 8 Hexadecimal Digit in 32bit IEEE format Response Format E g To write to A the value 6 265599E9 send command WV A4FBABABABA where AFBABABABA is the IEEE 32 bit representation of the floating point number 6 265599E9 See TL7 Programmer s Reference on how float number are represented using 32 bit integer in IEEE single precision format in TRiLOGI 16 33 Write Variable Singe Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 Command Format w v 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 NT 16 bit Index to array 16 bit Integer Data 0001 to OFAO 400010 Response Format pwivjto o
57. of the response string and hence requires more effort to program It is also the least desirable if the network traffic is moderately high as many collisions will occur and there is danger of some undetected error being allowed to pass through j d D TRIANGLE 15 8 Ind RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol 15 5 4 2 Token Awarding Scheme A token is a software means of telling a PLC that it has been given the right to temporarily act as the master A Fx PLC or a host PC can serve as the token master An internal relay bit or a variable of the PLC can be defined as the token The token master will begin by giving the token i e by setting the token relay bit to 1 or the token variable to some fixed value to the first PLC on the list The PLC that has the token can then send host link commands to other PLCs When it has finished the job it can then send a command to the token master to relinquish its token If it is based on a fixed timing scheme the master can assume that the PLC will complete its job after a fixed time say 0 1 seconds and turn off its corresponding token relay bit The token master then passes the token to the next PLC on the list and so on until the last PLC has relinquished its token and the token is passed back to the first PLC on the list again This way at any one time there will only be one active network master the one with the token and hence there is no dang
58. one year from the date of registered purchase Any unit which is found to be defective will at the discretion of TRi be repaired or replaced TRi will not be responsible for the repair or replacement of any unit damaged by user modification negligence abuse improper installation or mishandling TRi is not responsible to the Buyer for any loss or claim of special or consequential damages arising from the use of the product The product must NOT be used in applications where failure of the product could lead to physical harm or loss of human life Buyer is responsible to conduct their own tests to meet the safety regulation of their respective industry Products distributed but not manufactured by TRi carry the full original manufacturers warranty Such products include but are not limited to power supplies sensors I O modules and battery backed RAM 5 TRireserves the right to alter any feature or specification at any time Notes to Buyer If you disagree with any of the above terms or conditions you should promptly return the unit to the manufacturer or distributor within 30 days from date of purchase for a full refund o_o TRIANGLE ij Lied RESEARCH Page ii INTERNATIONAL 1 USER MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Page INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FX2424 PLC 1 1 1 1 OV ON VOW e estates cece bat a e aea T aer a eaaa a eaaa Ea dete aa aa eaaa aa aeaa EN Ea teens aaia 1 1 1 2 Physical Mounting amp Wiring sssss
59. pulses from home and turn on relay 103 10 4 6 3 Example PLC as a Half Step Motor Driver STEPMOVEABS 21 300 101 Stepper 1 to move fwd 300 pulses from home and turn on relay 101 STEPMOVEABS 22 10 102 Stepper 2 to move back 10 pulses from home and turn on relay 102 STEPMOVEABS 23 50 103 Stepper 3 to move fwd 50 pulses from home and turn on relay 103 10 4 7 Demo Program for Stepper Motor Control A demo program for programming the Stepper Motor Controller and Driver Stepper Motor F2424 PC6 can be found in the FPLCsamples zip file which can be downloaded from http www tri plc com trilogi FPLCsamples zip O D TRIANGLE 0 8 IRR RESEARCH r Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs o_O TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs 11 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED OUTPUTS 11 1 Introduction Pulse Width Modulation PWM is a highly efficient and convenient way of controlling output voltage to devices with large time constants such as controlling the speed of a DC motor the power to a heating element or the position of a proportional valve The PWM works by first turning on the output to full voltage for a short while and then shutting it off for another short while and then turning it on again and so on in consistent and accurate time intervals This can be illustrated with the following diagram Load Voltage
60. require the PLC s RTC to be very accurate you should keep the PLC under a constant operating temperature If your Fx2424 is connected to a LAN then you also have the option of having the RTC periodically set itself using the very accurate RTC data that can be obtained from a time server on the Internet See Section 12 6 12 9 Troubleshooting the RTC If the RTC Error light comes on and the battery is properly installed then the RTC could be corrupted or damaged This could happen if there was any damage to the components on the board such as I O drivers communications drivers or any of the IC s or PCB circuitry Also if a voltage spike came into the PLC through its I O power supply or communications ports that could cause some corruption even if there was no component damage If the RTC is only corrupted then you should only have to reset the RTC to resolve the problem This can be done most easily by using the TRILOGI method of setting the RTC that was described in section 12 4 After setting the RTC the PLC should be powered off and then powered on again The RTC Error light should be off at this point but if it isn t then there is a possibility of damage to the PLC At this point you should contact Triangle Research tech support or if you have purchased the unit from a local distributor then you should contact the distributor for assistance O D TRIANGLE 12 4 LRR RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 13 LCD Di
61. sending the character and disables it immediately after the stop bit has been sent out i i Ti aes 14 7 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications 14 7Using The PLC As a Modbus Omron Slave SCADA HMI Applications The Fx2424 support a subset of the OMRON C20H and MODBUS Both ASCII and RTU modes are supported compatible communication protocols so that it can be easily linked to third party control software hardware products such as SCADA software LCD touch panels etc The PLC automatically recognizes the type of command format and will generate a proper response These are accomplished without any user intervention and without any need to configure the PLC at all Both MODBUS and Omron protocols use the same device ID address 00 to FF as used by the native Hostlink Command protocol described in Chapter 15 Since the addresses of I O and internal variables in the Fx2424 are organized very differently from the OMRON or Modicon PLCs we need to map these addresses to the corresponding memory areas in the Modbus address space so that they can be easily accessed by their corresponding protocols All I Os timers counters internal relays and data memory DM 1 to DM 4000 are mapped to the Modbus Holding Registers space The Inputs Outputs Relays Timers and Counters bits are mapped to the MODBUS Bit address space as shown in Table 14 1 Note that input and output bits are always mapped according to Tabl
62. seseesseesseesseeeresereeerreeene 2 6 2 2 Connecting Ethernet to the PLC ccccceeecsseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeesneeeeeaeeesaesesneeenseeesseesaseaeeneeeees 2 7 2 2 1 Connecting the PLC to a Local Area Network sees eeeeee scenes seaeeeseaeeseeeseeeeee 2 7 2 2 2 Setting up Ethernet Communication Directly Between a PC and a F series PLC 2 9 2 3 On line Monitoring Programming Via FSCrvel cccssccseeeeseeseeeseseeeeeeeeeeseeeseneeeenseeeeeeees 2 15 2 4 Using F series PLC Network Services Commands cscssesseesseerseeesseenstersneeeneeeenes 2 16 24 1 Get OUP ele 2 17 2 4 2 DNS command Resolving Domain Name into IP Address eesseesseeeeeeseeese ereere 2 17 243 Send EMA EE 2 18 2 4 4 Open Connection to Remote FServer or TLServer to UseNETCMD 2 20 24 5 Remote File SGrviCe sssrinin anai aa aea Aaaa d aAa a kaiaa aa 2 21 2 4 6 Other Network Services Tags 2 21 2 5 MODBUS TCP Server and Client Connection s sssssssnneunneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenna 2 22 2 5 1 Connecting To The PLC s MODBUS TCP Geer 2 22 2 5 1 1 Bit Address Mapping EE 2 22 2 5 1 2 Word Address Mapping ccccccccceceneceeneeceeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaaeeseaaeeceeeeseaeeeesaaeeeenees 2 24 2 5 2 MODBUS TCP Access Gecuiy ns 2 24 2 5 3 Making a Modbus TCP Client Connection to Other Modbus TCP Server ssssssssnssseean 2 26 2 6 Getting data from Internet Connecting to The Internet Time Server
63. sinking up to 8A peak and 4A continuous current and hence it is able to support many IR emitters simultaneously 3 Since any of the 4 PWM outputs can be used it is also possible to use more than one PWM output to control multiple devices selectively even though they may all share the same IR codes For example you have 4 bedrooms and all of them are installed with same Panasonic brand of air conditioner If you connect 4 IR emitters to the same PWM output then all 4 air conditioners will be activated at the same time when the PWM channels output the IR control signals But if these 4 emitters are each connected to a different PWM output then you can easily select which air conditioner to turn ON or OFF 17 5 SETSYSTEM 17 xxx Command Summary The SETSYSTEM 17 xxx command is used by the Fx2424 PLC exclusively not available on M series PLCs for controlling its IR remote control capability The following summarizes the various parameters xxx for this purpose Xxx Functions 0 Disable IR Remote Sensor 1 Enable IR Remote Sensor 11 14 Playback current IR data through PWM channel 1 to 4 1001 1128 Load the stored IR data set 1 to 128 into Current IR Buffer 2001 2128 Store the data in the Current IR Buffer to flash memory data set location 1 to 128 101 to 150 PWM carrier frequency in KHz Default is 188 which means 38KHz 233 to 250 PWM duty cycles Default is 233 which means 33 duty
64. the FileZilla client as mentioned in Chapter 2 9 of the PLC User s Manual But a better way to test is to use the Telnet program on your PC if you are running Windows Vista or Windows 7 you may need to enable the Telnet program since it is disabled by default do a quick Google search on how to enable the Telnet client software on your PC Also you may want to find out the IP address of your PC that is running the FileZilla Server If you have TLServer running on your PC your IP address is reported on the TLServer s front panel You can also get the IP address from the Windows Network Connection Status as shown below Our test PC has an IP address 192 168 1 168 which will be used in the following tests as well as used in the PLC program to connect to the FTP Server INTERNATIONAL TR RESEARCH 20 9 Chapter 20 Extended File System Ve PLC WebServer i Wireless Network Connection 4 Status PS General Support Internet TRILOGI Server Connection status IP Addresst 192 168 1 168 9080 eects Padmed by DHCP IP Address 192 168 1 168 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Configure Users i Setup Emails Windows did not detect problems with this connection If you cannot connect click Copyright oi Triangle Research Intl Inc Repair 2001 2011 All Rights Reserved Helo Version 3 16 E 1 First open a command prompt window and then type telnet 192 168 1 168 21
65. the SETDAC statement once and the D A output will be set to a voltage proportional to the given set value E g SETDAC 1 1000 The D A 1 will output 1000 4096 5V 1 221V RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL T V TRIANGLE 5 8 Chapter5 Analog I Os 5 5 Calibration of ADC and DAC amp Moving Average Definition The ADC and DAC are factory calibrated such that a voltage of 2 500V should return a value of 2048 when read by the ADC n function Likewise an output voltage of 2 500V should be present at the DAC pin when you SETDAC to 2048 However if there is a need to re calibrate the ADC and DAC you can follow the procedure outlined below To perform calibration of an ADC channel you need to supply a precise DC reference voltage to the ADC channel and then check the analog readings obtained via the ADC n function and compare it to the expected value If there is an error you can apply a correction factor to it To perform the ADC or DAC calibration you would need to use the F Series Ethernet Configuration software mentioned in Chapter 2 1 Click on the Advanced button on the Basic Configuration screen and open the F series Ethernet Advanced Configuration screen The bottom half of the screen contains ADC and DAC calibration constants that you can enter and transfer to the PLC as shown below ADC Calib Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 ChS Ch6 Ch7 Ch8 Zero Offset g 0 0 lo a i 2 IIo DAC Calib z e 0 000x 10 0 0 0 0 0 l
66. the master PLC if there are changes that require it to inform the master PLC to take action You can design the ASCII string format in whatever way i O G TRIANGLE 19 7 DA RESEARCH LI INTERNATIONAL Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication suitable to your application as long as it contains enough information to inform the master who is calling for attention and what the master needs to do In such a system the master PLC must regularly read incoming ASCII strings using the INPUT 2 function and check to see if it is of the correct user designed format you can use a certainly starting characters e g AT xxxx where AT means Attention to node and xxxx is the node identifier of the slave that requires attention and if so interprets the content of the string to decide what it needs to do with the slave controller Based on the information in the received string the master can selectively set its Node Destination to the slave node identifier so that it can issue host link commands to access the designated slave PLC s data Such a system would be quite efficient for collecting data from slave I O since the slave I O can simply embed the information inside the ASCII string and the master PLC will receive the data almost immediately For example a slave controller could be monitoring outdoor temperature and it will only send the new temperature information to the master PLC if the temperature varies more than o
67. the settings A D 1 to 8 10KQ Potentiometer 7 Figure 5 4 5 2 5 Reading Analog Input Data The 8 analog input signals are read by the TBASIC command ADC 1 to ADC 8 The ADC n function will return a number between 0 and 4095 12 bit resolution which corresponds to the measured voltage at any of the analog inputs n The resolution of a 12 bit ADC is 1 4096 this means that for the 0 5V ADC range the resolution is 5 4096V 1 22mV That means that if you apply a 2 500V to the PLC s analog input 3 ADC 8 should return a value of 2 500 5 000 x 4096 2048 Note that the CPU only accesses the analog input n when the TBASIC function ADC n is called Hence in order to monitor the analog input you have to execute the ADC function periodically The frequency that the ADC function is called is known as the sampling rate and it depends on how fast the analog data changes If the analog data changes slowly such as room temperature then there may be no need to sample the analog at high frequency A very simple example of sampling the analog input 1 to 4 every second and converting the data into voltage readings of 0 to 5000 which represents 0 to 5 000V is shown as follow Tei Custom Function 1 ReadADC FE TRILOGI Version 6 14 DA ReadADC PC6 File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Minimize Circuit 1 DAAA Meine quick Tags Clk 1 0s ReadADC _ A tts DM 11 to DM 14 contains readings fr
68. therefore be displayed immediately using the SETLCD command Please refer to the STR command in the TL7 Programmer s Reference guide for details If you wish to control the number of digit being displayed then you could use the MID command to extract the number of significant digits and the exponents from the string returned by STR x n function O D TRIANGLE 3 2 IRR RESEARCH i Chapter 14 Serial Communications Chapter 14 Serial Communications Ca TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications 14 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 14 1 Introduction There are 3 serial ports on the Fx2424 including 2 RS485 ports and 1 RS232 port All three of these serial ports have full Modbus ASCII RTU and Host Link Protocol drivers so that all three serial ports can be used independently All three serial ports on this PLC can also be programmed to accept or send ASCII or binary data using the TBASIC built in commands such as INPUT n INCOMM n PRINT m OUTCOMM n d The first serial port COMM1 is an RS232C port which is compatible with most PC s RS232C ports The second serial port COMM2 is a two wire RS485 port that allows multiple PLCs to be connected to a single host computer or a master PLC for networking or to implement a distributed control system The third serial port COMMS is identical to the second one COMM2 Note Each of the 3 serial ports has its own pair of comm LED ind
69. to 0 for Auto width IOheight 0 Use Auto height If you set the lOwidth or I Oheight to 0 then the program will adjust the I O button size based on the width of height of the entire label name But if you specify a fixed value such as 80 as shown above then the specified size is reflected equally in all eight of the buttons so each one cannot have a different size Resizing the Data Memory Labels and Fields DMWidth 175 DMHeight 20 The specified size is reflected equally in all four of the label and field items so each item cannot have a different size Changing the Color of Display Data Labels and Buttons It is possible to change the default color of the interactive objects which are the Data Memory labels and fields the Internal Relay Bit buttons and the LCD Display Each of these objects has different configurable color properties which will be explained further Color can be set one of two ways 1 Using the specific name in single quotes Eg Yellow 2 Using a unique code called an RGB value that equates to a color also in single quotes Eg FFFFOO for the color Yellow Here is a link to a website that converts colors to color codes http idstiles com colorchart html Changing the LCD Display Color The LCD display has a background color and a text color which can be individually configured as per the following code LCDbgColor f fffAA LCD background color in RGB value Can als
70. well as the TBASIC Reference manual for details on using the READMODUS WRITEMODBUS READMB2 and WRITEMB2 commands F RE 16 24 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format TR RESEARCH 16 25 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 17 IR Remote Control Chapter 17 IR Remote Control Ca TRIANGLE Lied RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 17 IR Remote Control 17 IR REMOTE CONTROL 17 1 Introduction The Fx2424 PLC features a built in Infra Red remote control sensor with 38KHz modulation band pass filter part TSOP32138 located as shown in the following picture I i I i i i f C ay i fi l 1 i eem IR Remote Sensor SEH Figure 17 1 The IR remote sensor enables the PLC to do the following 1 Receive and decode IR remote control signals sent by hand held IR remote controls that are encoded with Sony Corporation s SIRC protocol which really is just any hand held remote control that comes with your SONY TV or VCR The decoded signal can be used to trigger any actions under your program control and it is unbelievably easy to program 2 Learn i e records up to 128 IR remote codes can be a mixture of different brands of devices it receives into non volatile flash memory and playback the recorded IR remote codes under your program control to turn ON OFF or to adjust AV devices air conditioning settings etc To playback the recorded IR remote codes you need to purchase a l
71. 00 DM 1 to DM 4000 and string A to Z EMINT 1 to EMINT 16 and EMLINT 1 to EMLINT 16 are in the category of volatile data memory meaning when you turn off power to the PLC the memory content will be lost and they will be reset to zero when the PLC is powered up again However the memory array DM 1 to DM 4000 as well as FP 1 to FP 1000 can be made non volatile by turning on DIP switch 1 This is because internally DM 1 to DM 4000 as well as FP 1 to FP 1000 are actually implemented in FRAM rather than regular RAM however they are not part of the 6K words available for use mentioned in Section 1 7 2 You can therefore use these DMs as safe memory locations whose content will be preserved in the case of a power failure Of course you can also use the SAVE_EEP and LOAD_EEP to achieve the same result as using DM 1 to DM 4000 It may be just a little more natural to use DM in your program instead of sprinkling LOAD_EEP and SAVE_EEP commands throughout your program code In the original F2424 only memory array DM 301 to DM 4000 can be made non volatile o_O TRIANGLE Ind RESEARCH 1 10 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 7 4 Extended Data File Storage Fx2424 supports extended data file storage for storing web pages and some are directly accessible from within the PLC program For more information please refer to Chapter 20 of this manual O TRIANGLE Se Di RESEARCH 1
72. 08h 01 to 08h Response Format PR LA 16 t6 16 Deiwel ST Starting channel er Ending channel 16 bit Data Hex 16 bit Data Hex E g To read 4 channels of Analog inputs starting from Ch 2 Send RA0204 The response string will contain 4 sets of data for channel 2 3 4 and 5 TRI RESEARCH 16 17 INTERNATIONAL r Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 42Read EEPROM Integer Data Command Format EEPROM starting Word Count Address Hex 01 to 20h Response Format PR xX 1 16 16 te 16 Delen NT 17 EEPROM Integer ae Last EEPROM 16 bit Data Hex 16 bit Data Hex Maximum allowable word count per command is 32 01 to 20 Hex If count is gt 32 only the first 32 words will be returned E g To read the 10 words of EEPROM data starting from address 100 send host link command RXI00640Ax The response string will contain 10 sets of 16 bit data 4 ASCII hex digit per set 16 43 Read EEPROM String Data Command Format EEPROM String starting Address Hex Response Format R xls ae a aj a a a oO E g To read the string data stored at EEPROM address 10 send host link command RX 000A The response string will contain string data stored in the EEPROM maximum 40 characters 16 44Write Analog Output Upon receiving this command the PLC updates the value of its DAC data at the analog output channel i e
73. 1 Multiple Communication Protocols The Fx2424 supports many different communication protocols to allow maximum application flexibility In addition to its own native set of communication protocols the Fx2424 also understands and speaks the following protocols a MODBUS ASCII mode compatible communication protocol b MODBUS RTU mode compatible communication protocol c OMRON Host Link Commands for the C20H PLC family Note all trademarks belong to their respective owners The native host link command protocol will be described in detail in this and the next chapter The MODBUS and OMRON compatible protocols have already been discussed in Section 14 7 15 2Native Mode Communication Protocols When the Fx2424 receives a native host link command via COMM1 COMM2 or COMMS it will automatically send a response string corresponding to the command This operation is totally transparent to the user and does not need to be handled by the user s program All Fx2424 support both the point to point one to one and multi point one to many communication protocols Each protocol has a different command structure as described below 15 3 Point To Point Communication Format In a point to point communication system the host computer s RS232C serial port is connected to the PLC s COMM1 At any one time only one controller may be connected to the host computer The host link commands do not need to specify any controller ID code and ar
74. 10 0001 to 0019 25 Dec Response Format ER v 16 16 16 16 16 16 t6 16 kenen aT Header 17 Data 8 Hexadecimal Digit in 32bit IEEE format 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 162 o Last data E g To read the value of FP 101 to FP 110 send host link command RVF0065000A 16 19Read Variable System Variables This command allows you to read all the Fx PLC s 16 bit system variables such as the inputs outputs relays counters timers timers P V counters P V CLK and DATE Although inputs outputs etc are also accessible via the RI RO RR commands the RVS command can access them as 16 bit words instead of as 8 bit bytes in those commands For the 32 bit system variable HSCPV use the RVH command described in the next section to access it It may be more conventional for some SCADA software driver to use a single header command RVS to access all the I O varying only the type number to access different I O types r agn V TRIANGLE 16 9 D RESEARCH LI Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format The RVS command also can be used to access the internal variables used to store ADC DAC and PWM values obtained during the latest execution of the ADC setDAC or setPWM statement These are however not system variables in the TBASIC sense E g it is illegal to use ADC 2 to a
75. 10KQ 1 1 0 DON SE Ro 10KQ 1 Analog OV Converting 20mA current loop to 0 5V Converting 0 10V signal to 0 5V Figure 5 2 Note that if the sensor has its own power supply then you must connect the sensor ground to analog AVss terminal to provide a common ground All the analog inputs to the Fx2424 PLC are internally current limited to guard against transient over voltage damage However care should be taken to prevent applying excessive over voltage to the analog inputs for a prolonged period of time which can lead to permanent damage of the ADC input 5 2 2 A D 5 to 8 The DC input impedance of Analog inputs 5 to 8 are all 20 00K ohms 0 1 This is not a problem when connected to a 0 5V low impedance analog source However if you need to connect to 0 10V inputs or 4 20mA analog source to A D 5 to 8 you have to take into consideration the low A D input impedance in your design The following figures show how to connect 4 20mA current source signals and 0 10V signals to the A D inputs 5 to 8 Tri eee 5 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os A D 5 8 A D 5 8 0 20mA or 4 20mA Current loop 2509 1 Internal 20 00K 3 160 1 Converting 20mA current loop to 0 5V Converting 0 10V signal to 0 5V Figure 5 3 You can see that interfacing to 0 10V analog signal is extremely simple since all you need is to add a 20 0K ohm series resistor and it will be divided into 0 5V when it ente
76. 11 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 8 DIP SWITCHES DIP Switch OFF Low SW1 1 All outputs relays timers and DM 1 to DM 4000 data are non volatile and counter values are non retentive will not be reset Swe SW1 3 e Disable the use of username password and Trusted IP for FServer and Modbus TCP Server e PLC IP address defaults to 192 168 1 15 9080 SW1 4 Normal Run mode Suspends execution of the ladder logic program But host communication remains active 1 8 1 Usefulness of SW1 4 We have taken every effort to ensure that the host communication is always available even when the user program ends up in a dead loop This allows the user to re transfer a new program to the PLC and overwrite the bad program However you may still encounter a situation whereby after transferring a new program to the PLC you keep encountering communication errors and you are unable to erase the bad program This is especially common if you have been experimenting with the communication commands such aS SETBAUD SETPROTOCOL PRINT or OUTCOMM These commands may modify the communication baud rate format or protocol or set the PLC to send data out of a COMM port that conflicts with i TRiILOGI In such cases you can turn ON DIP Switch SW1 4 and perform a power on reset for the PLC The PLC will not execute the bad program that causes communication problems and you can then transfer a new program into the PLC to clear up the problem
77. 2 5 MODBUS TCP Server and Client Connection The Fx2424 supports both the FServer and the industry standard MODBUS TCP server simultaneously This means that all F series PLCs are ready to interface directly with many third party industrial control devices that support the MODBUS TCP protocol These include the SCADA software HMI hardware OPC Server HVAC controllers and many other industrial control devices In addition the Fx2424 can be used both as a MODBUS TCP SERVER as well as a MODBUS TCP CLIENT simultaneously This means that the Fx2424 can readily read data from any device that has a MODBUS TCP server such as flow meters AC DC drives HVAC elements RTUs network sensors etc It is also possible to perform peer to peer networking with other MODBUS TCP controllers e g another F series PLC over a LAN or over the Internet 2 5 1 Connecting To The PLC s MODBUS TCP Server By default the F series CPU supports up to 3 simultaneous MODBUS TCP connections You can change the number of simultaneous MODBUS TCP connections from 2 to 5 using the F series Ethernet Basic Configuration program as described in Section 2 1 The PLC will listen on the default well known MODBUS TCP port 502 for one or all of the connections However it is also possible to define a secondary port number as described in Section 2 1 7 Note that if you define a secondary port number then only one of the MODBUS TCP connection will listen on port 502 and the re
78. 3 1 1 1 1 F Series PLC Figure 7 2 Interfacing 5V type Rotary Encoder fe o TRIANGLE E IRA RESEARCH 7 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 8 Frequency Speed Measurement Chapter 8 Frequency Speed Measurement cD TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH uN INTERNATIONAL Chapter 8 Frequency Speed Measurement 8 FREQUENCY SPEED MEASUREMENT The Fx2424 provides a very straightforward means to measure the pulse width of the ON cycle the frequency or the period of a rectangular wave pulse train arriving at its Pulse Measurement PM inputs 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 Which are mapped to digital inputs 1 to 6 see Chapter 6 8 1 Programming of PM Input 1 To use the PM input to measure pulse width or frequency execute the PMON statement ONCE to configure the relevant input to become a pulse measurement input You usually put the PMON statement in the init custom function and execute it with a 1st Scan pulse 2 Thereafter the pulse width in us or the pulse frequency in Hz can be easily obtained from the PULSEWIDTH n or PULSEFREQUENCY n functions You can also obtain the pulse period inverse of frequency using the PULSEPERIOD function E g A PULSEWIDTH 1 B PULSEPERIOD 1 C PULSEFREQUNCY 1 3 All PM inputs by default return the measured pulse width and pulse period in unit of microsecond However for those who desire better resolution you can define PM 1 to 4 to return the measured pulse width and pulse peri
79. 3 Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Ca TRIANGLE Ind RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 ETHERNET PORT Ethernet R345 port Every Fx2424 PLC has a single built in 10 100 Base T E EAN Ethernet port that uses the standard RJ45 connector on its F CPU board You can easily connect the Fx2424 PLC to your network router switch or hub using the straight CAT 5 cable When a connection is made the yellow Connection LED on the RJ45 connector will light up indicating that the PLC has been connected to the network router Connection Activity LED LED Figure 2 1 1 Once connected to the network the TRILOGI programming software and TRi ExcelLink works instantaneously with the PLC allowing remote programming and process monitoring over the LAN or the Internet In addition the Ethernet facility at this port can host web pages and Java applets so that users of the equipment can control monitor their equipment using their web browser from anywhere Before connecting the PLC s Ethernet port you should configure it using the configuration tool that is now built into the 6 3x or higher version of i TRILOGI programming software Previously a standalone Ethernet Configuration program was required to setup the basic and advanced Ethernet ADC and RTC Real Time Clock options This standalone version is still available and more information on this program including where to download it is avai
80. 3 63 83 C3 E3 13 53 73 93 D3 F 19200 04 44 64 84 C4 E4 54 74 94 D4 F 05 45 65 85 C5 E5 15 55 75 95 DS F 06 46 86 ce Ee 16 56 76 96 DE F o7 47 67 87 C7 Ev 17 57 77 97 O7 cs E8 18 58 78 98 D8 F Eo 59 79 99 D9 F EA sa 7A 9A DALE 14 100k_ 08 48 68 88 115K2 09 49 69 89 CO E g To set the baud rate of COMMS to 19200 7 data bit 1 stop bit and even parity execute d statement SETBAUD 3 amp HC4 Important Since the three COMM ports are independent they can be set to different formats and baud rates from each other Please note that if you change the baud rate or communication format to something that is different from that set in the TLServer then both the TLServer and TRILOGI will no longer be able to communicate with the PLC via this COMM port You will have to either configure the TLServer s serial port setting using its Serial Communication Setup routine to match the PLC or you can cycle the power to the PLC to reset the COMM port to the default format 38 400 8 n 1 2 TRIANGLE 14 4 Lied RESEARCH LJN INTERNATIONAL r Chapter 14 Serial Communications If you had used 1st Scan contact to activate the SETBAUD command than you will need to cycle the power to the PLC with DIP switch 4 set to ON to halt the execution of the SETBAU
81. 424 carrier board via two 40 pin IDC headers and a one 10 pin IDC header IMPORTANT At no time must the CPU board be unplugged from the carrier board when the PLC is powered ON Doing so can cause serious damage to either or both PCBs and is not covered by warranty We discourage unplugging the CPU board from the carrier board except for repair or upgrade purpose as doing so may expose the CPU header pins to high voltages or electrostatic discharge that can damage sensitive components on the CPU board The assembled Fx2424 PLC can be easily installed in many kinds of plastic or metal enclosures You need to use 5 PCB standoffs or screws and nuts to support the controller and fasten it to a console box Alternatively you can mount it on the optional DIN KIT 2 and clip it onto the standard DIN rail The following subsections show some hardware details of the I Os that are available on the Fx2424 PLC model Separate chapters in this manual will be devoted to discussing the programming methods for this hardware 1 2 1 Analog I O Ports The 8 channels of analog inputs and 4 separate channel of analog outputs are available via a DB15 connector along the left edge of the Fx2424 PLC The Fx2424 PLC also supplies a 5V analog reference voltage output and the analog ground on the female DB15 connector as shown below AD1 AD8 Seececoceces N 5V Ref DA1 S DA4 OV gnd NC No Connection for pin 12 Analog ground AN ze Figure 1
82. 485 driver which means up to 128 PLCs can be connected together Unfortunately this IC is much more expensive than 75HVD3082 and hence it is not provided as standard component on the PLC You can purchase the IC from any major electronic catalog company such as www digikey com 2 When using non fault tolerant RS485 drivers such as SN75176 or SN75HVD3082 we strongly recommend the following protection circuit to be added between every PLC s RS485 and the twisted pair multi drop network cable RS485 Network 109 1 2W 0 1A Fuses Ground the Shield Figure 15 3 Note As can be seen from the circuit the two 9V Zener diodes clamp the signal voltage on the PLC s RS485 interface to between 9V and 0 7V If the high voltage persists the 0 1A fuse will blow effectively disconnecting the PLC from the offending voltage on the network Even if you choose to replace the RS485 driver by an LT1785AIN8 IC instead of using the zener fuse pair wiring you should still use shielded twisted pair cables as the multi drop network backbone and connect the shield to the OV DC ground power terminal of every PLC The grounded shield then provides a common ground reference for all the different PLCs power supplies Even though the RS485 network may still work without a common ground reference because the signal wire pair will somehow pull all the RS485 devices to some reference point Failure to provide a common ground is a potent
83. 4A 24V DC Peak Current per phase 8A 24V DC Driver Breakdown Voltage 55V Velocity Profile Trapezoidal Defined by STEPSPEED accelerate from 1 8 max pps to max pps decelerate from max pps to 1 8 max pps Maximum number of steps 2 2 2 1 x 10 TBASIC commands STEPSPEED STEPMOVEABS STEPCOUNTABS STEPMOVE STEPSTOP STEPCOUNT It is essential to understand the difference between a stepper motor Controller and a stepper motor Driver A stepper motor Driver comprises the power electronics circuitry that provides the voltage current and phase rotation to the stepper motor coils Unlike the FMD PLCs the Fx2424 have both the stepper motor driver and controller hardware Now a stepper motor can be driven directly from the PLC or the PLC can simply supply the control signals to an external stepper motor driver 10 2 Stepper Motor Driver The Fx2424 can drive up to 3 stepper motors directly using digital outputs 5 to 16 Each stepper motor requires 4 digital outputs so a total of 12 digital outputs are required to drive 3 stepper motors All these outputs are capable of driving stepper motors of up to 4A per phase Note that any outputs that have been defined for use with a particular stepper channel would no longer be available as regular digital outputs in the ladder or TBASIC program Please refer to Chapter 6 for a definition of the list of special digital I Os 10 2 1 Stepper Motor Wiring Types
84. AC voltage must change polarity that means the TRIAC will be switch OFF automatically during zero crossing Once the TRIAC is switched off it can only be switched ON again by applying a triggering voltage pulse also known as firing pulse to the Gate again and this process must be repeated every half cycle This is illustrated in the following two figures TAG Triac ie Firing 9 90 deg Zero Zero Crossing Crossing Ter Triac Triac Triac Triac Firing OFF Firing OFF 45 deg 90 deg Figure 18 1 a Figure 18 1 b In Figure 18 1 a the TRIAC is triggered at the phase angle 45 degree whereas in Figure 18 1 b the TRIAC is fired at phase angle 90 degree The TRIAC conducts the AC current immediately upon receiving the firing pulse and will only turn itself OFF at the next zero crossing In the next half cycle the TRIAC needs to be fired again in order to conduct and this process repeats itself indefinitely You can easily see that the TRIAC in Figure 18 1 a is turned ON earlier compared to the TRIAC in Figure 18 1 b This means that when a load such as an incandescent lamp is connected to the TRIAC it will be turned ON a greater proportion of time using the firing angle shown in Figure 18 1 a and therefore will appear brighter compared to the that in Figure 18 1 b By controlling the firing angle applied to the TRIAC you can achieve the objective of controlling the brightness of the lamp The lamp will be brightest
85. AL F Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 6 Getting data from Internet Connecting to The Internet Time Server The Fx2424 features a special NS command tag lt TCPCONNECT xxx xxx xxx xxx portno gt that allows you to connect to any server to download data However since the PLC does not have a lot of memory for storing incoming text data it is not suitable for downloading information from a commercial website that sends many kilobytes of data in a single download It can however be very useful to connect to some servers that send small amounts of information For example there are many Internet Time Servers on the Internet that allow users to synchronize their computer clocks via the Internet The service responds to time requests from any Internet client in several formats including the DAYTIME TIME and NTP protocols The simplest are those that send responses in ASCII data and you can extract the date and time information from the response ASCII string once you know the format You can search on the Internet for a suitable timeserver and use the TELNET program on your PC to access them to examine their display format Most timeservers listen either on port 13 or port 123 so you need to specify the port number together with their IP address when sending the lt TCPCONNECT gt command Format lt TCPCONNECT IP address portno of time server gt Response none Successfully connected to the Modbus TCP server of the specified IP ad
86. C custom functions Some programming examples are detailed in Chapter 3 Digital I Os and Internal Relays 1 5 3 Inductive Load When switching inductive loads such as a solenoid or a motor always ensure that a bypass diode is connected to absorb inductive kicks which will occur whenever the output driver is turned OFF Although all the PLC digital outputs already incorporate either internal diodes or intrinsic Zener bypass diodes to protect the driver some may only activate when the inductive kick voltage rises above 100V DC This can result in a large dose of noise being introduced into the system and may have undesirable effects We recommend using a fast recovery diode such as UF4001 to UF4007 connected as shown in the following diagram to absorb the inductive noise o 24V a Inductive bypass diode DC only Diode s reverse break down voltage should be at least 2 x load voltage PLC NPN Digital Output Figure 1 7 Protective Solid State Output Against Inductive Kick 1 6 LCD Display Port The built in 14 pin LCD DISPLAY PORT on the Fx2424 is compatible with the Hitachi HD44780 display controller which is a de facto industry standard This allows low cost easily available LCD modules Tr TRIANGLE 1 7 ire RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide from third party manufacturers to be connected directly to the PLC to implement a very economical man machine interface You simply conn
87. CD LcDbgcolor ffffaa LCD background color in RGB value Can also be set as white for white ba LcpTextcolor black LCD text color A4 bgimagesrc http tri plc com nano hmipics panelblack2 jpg ZZ link to your background image PG IOnamecolor black Iowidth 80 f f Fixed width for I o button set to 0 for auto width Ioheight 0 f Use Auto height Ioname Relayl29 Relay130 Relay131 Relay132 Relay133 Relay134 Relay135 Relay136 Relayl37 Relay138 Relay139 Relay140 Relayl41 Relayl42 Rela IOLocx 24 114 204 294 24 114 204 294 24 114 204 294 24 114 204 294 IOLocy 142 142 142 142 164 164 164 164 267 267 267 267 290 290 290 290 ONcolor yellow f f yellow can_also be written in RGB value as ffffo0 OFFcolor grey f f grey can also be written in RGB value as 7f7f7f f Font and color for DM labels are defined by lt style gt body at the bi of this page DMlabel om 1 DM pm 3 oM 4 om 5 omte DME7 omte LC DMlabelBgcolor efffff DMwidth 175 DMHeight 20 DML OC 24 24 24 24 204 204 204 204 DMLocy 185 205 225 245 185 205 225 245 Setting the Background Image The first line of code you can edit is bgimagesre J JPG In this example the background image is stored in the Fserver itself as J JPG However the web browser can display any background image from any JPG fi
88. D command When the PLC is reset this way its COMM1 will power up at the default format of 38 400 8 n 1 only so you will need to configure TLServer s serial port to 38 400bps to communicate with it 14 5Support of Multiple Communication Protocols The Fx2424 is a real communication wizard It has been designed to understand and speak many different types of communication protocols some of which are extremely widely used de facto industry standards as follows NATIVE HOST LINK COMMAND MODBUS ASCII Trademark of Modbus org MODBUS RTU Trademark of Modbus org OMRON C20H protocols Trademark of Omron Corp of Japan The command and response formats of the NATIVE protocols are described in detail in Chapter 15 and 16 The other protocols and their address mapping to the Fx2424 are described in Section 14 7 The three independent COMM ports 1 2 amp 3 support all of the above protocols Each COMM port can communicate using the same or different protocols independent of the other The most wonderful feature of Fx2424 is that the support of all the above mentioned protocols can be fully automatic and totally transparent to the users There is no DIPswitch to set and no special configuration software to run to configure the port for a specific communication protocol The following describes how the automatic protocol recognition scheme works 1 When the PLC is powered ON all three COMM ports are set to the AUTO mode wh
89. E DATE DATE DATE 4 Data Memory DM 1 DM 2 DM 4000 Floating point Array FP 1 45001 amp 45002 5000 amp 5001 FP 2 45003 amp 45004 5002 amp 5003 Note available only on Fx model FP 501 46001 amp 46002 6000 amp 6001 FP 1000 46999 amp 47000 6998 amp 6999 2 5 1 2 Word Address Mapping As shown in Table 2 5 1 to access the PLC s DM 1 you use MODBUS address space 4 1001 Modicon use 1000 for binary addressing and so on To access the Real Time Clock Hour data TIME 1 use 4 0513 The I O channels can also be read or written as 16 bit words by using the addresses from 4 0001 to 4 0320 Some MODBUS drivers such as National Instruments Lookout software even allow you to manipulate individual bits within a 16 bit word So it is also possible to map individual I O bits to the 4x address space E g Input bit 1 can be mapped to 4 0001 1 and output bit 2 is mapped to 4 0257 2 etc This is how it is shown in Table 2 5 1 However if you do not need to manipulate the individual bit then you simply use the address 4 0001 to access the system variable INPUT 1 and address 4 0257 to access the system variable OUTPUT 1 Note that INPUT 1 and OUTPUT 1 are TBASIC system variables and they each contain 16 bits that reflect the on off status of the actual physical input and output bits 1 to 16 2 5 2 MODBUS TCP Access Security If a Fx2424 is to be accessible only on the local area network t
90. E of e D efau is shown in the Logontype Baal example The Port can be left blank and the Servertype can be left as the default User samples as shown Password i Account The Logon type should be set to Normal Simens and the User and Password should be set to the same as for the login to the F New Site New Folder server New Bookmark Rename ria Leed z Nothing else needs to be configured in this area Next go to the Transfer 7 settings tab Connect OK Cancel Figure 2 10 1 guru n e R Under the Transfer settings tab you Select Entry need to set the Transfer mode to ioe General Advanced Active and check the box to Limit F series Transfer mode number of simultaneous connections Defauk Active Passive The maximum number of connections V Limit number of simultaneous connections should be 1 Maximum number of connections 1 This is everything that needs to be configured so you can now click on connect New Site New Eolder New Bookmark Rename Delete Copy Connect OK l Cancel Figure 2 10 2 o TRIANGLE 8 Toi RESEARCH 2 34 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port F series samples 192 168 1 5 FileZilla a RoR ox If Fi eZi lla h as made a File Edit View Transfer Server Bookmarks Help H successful connection the Salts EE status should be Host Username assword Port uickconnect e o rm S g e JC Connec
91. Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Adobe PDF ER De Bsa 4a A BB Zl Sor A 10 DI e Filter gt We 2 a Subtotals Validation H J Text to Columns PivotTable and PivotChart Report Get External Data Ki Run Saved Query tS New Web Query 4 New Database Query Import Text File Figure 2 6 1 fe o gt TRIANGLE E Toi RESEARCH 229 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Next please enter the text as shown in the following diagram and then click OK This will command the Excel spreadsheet to send the web query string RIOO to the Fx PLC that is connected to the network with IP address 192 168 1 5 and port 9080 The query string RIOO is for reading the status of 8 bit input channel 0 which covers the logic states of input bit 1 to 8 If the FServer is accessible by the PC from the network router it will send the response data which will be displayed on the selected spreadsheet cell where the New Web Query was defined earlier The response data shown on the cell could be RIOO The response data includes the command header RI as defined in the HostLink Command protocol described in Chapter 15 The data 00 indicates that none of the inputs 1 to 8 are currently turned ON New Web Query eax 1 Enter the address for the Web page that contains the data you want If browsing switch back to Excel once you have located the Web page in your browser
92. Eed Seege 5 10 565 3 DAC Calibicn scercs eevee ei ele tied donee as a ee i ated eet eid eee 5 10 56 4 Te RR EE 5 11 555 AMD MOVING AVG EE 5 11 o_o TRIANGLE Fe RESEARCH Page v LI INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 6 SPECIAL DIGITAL I OS 6 1 7 HIGH SPEED COUNTERS 7 1 7 1 Introductton cece cececneeeeeeeeee eee annann AANA ANNA ANANA KANTANA RNA ARATE 7 1 7 2 Enhanced Quadrature DeCOdiNNG cs cccescesseeeeseeeeeseeeesneesesneeeeeeeeseaesasaeenseeeeseeseseenenseaeees 7 2 7 3 Interfacing to 5V type Quadrature Encoder s ecccscceseseeseeeenseeeeeeeesesneeenseeeseseeeseesnseenenes 7 2 8 FREQUENCY SPEED MEASUREMENT 8 1 8 1 Programming Of PM INput ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeseeenneeseeenneeseeenneeseeenneeseeeesneeseeesnnseeesnaes 8 1 8 2 lU Le E 8 2 8 2 1 Measuring RPM Of A Motor 8 2 8 2 2 Measuring Transducer with VCO Outputs ssessseesseessreesrrestnnsentssnrssrnssrnnsrnnsrnssrnssrnnsnnnnnn 8 2 8 2 3 Measuring Transducer with PWM Outputs ssssesseeeseeeseeesiresrnesenrssnnssrnesrnnstnssrnssrnssrnssrnnnnnn 8 2 8 3 Frequency Measurement on High Speed Counter INPut ccsscceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeeees 8 3 9 INTERRUPTS 9 1 9 1 Jutta Te CH 9 1 9 2 Periodic Timer Interrupt PTI ivcisovcdiisnesteccandvsussovewedcoorsduncdtveussarvovewedsoonvdancddveuvduuonvuveswocte 9 2 9 3 Power Failure Interrupt HK eege adden 9 2 10 STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL 10 1 10 1 Technical Specifications
93. F 50V OV Figure 1 4 If the AC main is affected by nearby machines drawing large amounts of current such as large three phase motors you should use a surge suppressor to prevent any unwanted noise voltage from being coupled into the Fx2424 power supply The required current rating for the power supply depends mainly on the total output current taking into consideration the peak current demand and the duty cycle of the operation 1 4 Digital Input Circuits All inputs have green colored LED indicators Every 8 inputs are grouped together into a single strip of detachable screw terminal All inputs are NPN type meaning that to turn ON an input you should connect it to the low voltage rail OV terminal of the power supply as shown in the following diagram The input numbers are marked on their screw terminals as well as on the PCB alongside the strip pin All digital inputs are directly programmable in Ladder Logic as well as in TBASIC custom functions Some programming examples are detailed in Chapter 3 Digital I Os and Internal Relays CA TRIANGLE 1 5 Lied RESEARCH LI INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 24V F2424 Limit Switch Gaston Normally Open a NPN sensor OV OV Input logic 1 when Limit Switch is closed Input logic 1 when object is sensed Input Voltage for Logic 0 Open Circuit or 10V to 24VDC Input Voltage for Logic 1 OV to 2 5V DC Figure 1 5 Inter
94. Failure Failed to complete email transmission STATUS 3 This function returns 1 on success and 0 on failure Note that this function only returns the email status after the closing tag lt gt has been sent If the function is polled before the last closing tag is sent the status is indeterminate V TRIANGLE 9 18 RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Description You can use this command to send out an email for you at any time The FServer uses the defined SMTP server and Gateway IP addresses See Section 2 1 to perform this task If it encounters any errors it will send back an error string which begins with the ERR followed by the reason for the error Although the sender s email address does not have to be a valid email address it is good to at least use a valid domain name as the sender address Otherwise the SMTP server may refuse to send the email because it may deduce that an email with an invalid domain name is likely to be a Spam mail Example Please refer to the fnEmail function in the TestEthernet PC6 file sg Tri Bae 2 19 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 4 4 Open Connection to Remote FServer or TLServer to Use NETCMD Format lt CONNECT IP address port of TLServer or XServer gt username string password string Response lt CONNECTED gt Successfully connected to remote FServer TLServer or XServer at the IP address ERR 05
95. Frequency Measurement on High Speed Counter Inputs For applications that require frequency measurement and pulse counting of the same signal you only need to feed the pulse input into any pair of the inputs 1 amp 2 or inputs 3 amp 4 or inputs 5 amp 6 and define it as a High Speed Counter see Chapter 7 This is because an input pin that has been defined as an HSC will automatically be enabled for pulse measurement In other words if you need to use the HSC and the Pulse Measurement on the same channel then you don t need to execute both the HSCDEF and PMON you only need to execute the HSCDEF The HSCDEF function will automatically start the Pulse Measurement hardware so it is not necessary to use the PMON function However if you use only the PMON function it would not enable the HSC function However if you execute the HSCDEF function and then execute the PMON function the HSC will be disabled even though it was previously enabled F Tri eee 8 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 9 Interrupts Chapter 9 Interrupts c 2 TRIANGLE R RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 9 Interrupts 9 INTERRUPTS 9 1 Input Interrupts During normal PLC ladder program execution the CPU scans the entire ladder program starting from the first element progressively solving the logic equation at each circuit until it reaches the last element After which it will update the physical Inputs and Outputs I O at the end of the scan
96. Home Server Connector Windows Live Call Windows Live Messenger MI Wiindawe Meceeanner Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions Add a Port Use these settings to open a port through Windows Firewall To find the port number and protocol consult the documentation for the program or service you want to use Name FTP Server Port Port number 21 IcP OupP What are the risks of opening a port Ti TRIANGLE T RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 19 Chapter 21 Using PLC As a Modbus TCP Gateway Chapter 21 PLC As A Modbus TCP Gateway i CA TRIANGLE UR RESEARCH LI INTERNATIONAL Chapter 21 Using PLC As A Modbus TCP Gateway 21 USING PLC AS A MODBUS TCP GATEWAY 21 1 Introduction A Fx PLC or a Nano 10 FMD PLC with gt r77 firmware can be configured to act as the MODBUS TCP GATEWAY for other Modbus serial devices while continue to function as a Super PLC A Modbus TCP gateway essentially translates a Modbus TCP command packet it receives from its Ethernet port into a Modbus RTU serial command and sends it out of its serial port RS232 or RS485 If the Modbus RTU slave sends back a serial response the gateway will in turn translate the RTU response data back to Modbus TCP response packet and return to the client via the Ethernet port As such the Modbus TCP gateway enables
97. ILOGI Version 6 13 Untitled File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Circuit 1 QAQA Gene quick Tags Figure 4 1 Creating Timer Circuit Once the component toolbar is shown you can place your activating contact by selecting the 1 component from the toolbar AF and then selecting the activating contact from the I O Table The contact will then be automatically placed in the ladder logic circuit The same can be done for the timer coil by selecting the 7 component from the toolbar a and then selecting a timer that has been entered into the I O Table Then a timer contact needs to be added as an input to a ladder logic circuit This contact will activate once the timer counts down This could be used to turn on an output a certain amount of time after the timer coil is activated Placing a timer contact in a circuit is the same as placing any contact in a ladder circuit except that the corresponding timer should be selected from the Timers section of the I O table After creating a ladder circuit that contains one input and one timer output and another ladder circuit that contains one timer contact and one output the ladder logic circuit should like something like Figure 4 2 below OH o TRIANGLE Toi RESEARCH 4 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers KE TRILOGI Version 6 14 Untitled File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Circuit 2 EJO lt wd ml Cal Jr EI Input Time TIM
98. Internal Relays Non Latching Edit the label names Place the relay contact s into the ladder logic circuit Place the relay coil at the end of the ladder logic circuit a N 3 2 3 For Internal Relays Latching Edit the label names Place the activating input relay contact into the ladder logic circuit Place the latching relay in parallel with the activating contact Place the relay coil at the end of the ladder logic circuit AON 3 2 4 Programming Examples ES 1 0 Labels 3 2 4 1 Example 1 Editing Label Names Fa inputs ai Label Name The Digital I O can be named by selecting I O Table from the Edit menu ES Input and choosing the particular digital UO that you want to name In Figure 3 1 physical input 1 is being named Input1 Em LG EW MO 11 row Figure 3 1 I O Table r am V TRIANGLE SCH Ind RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 3 I O and Internal Relays Programming 3 2 4 2 Example 2 Creating a Simple Ladder Logic Circuit You can place components in the circuit by clicking in the green area to the right of the red arrow as shown in Figure 3 2 below This will bring up the component tool bar in the gray area above the green circuit area FE TRILOGI Version 6 13 Untitled DER File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help circuit 1 MAAA cetine cuick Tags Figure 3 2 Creating Ladder Circuit Once the component toolbar is shown you can place your input relay co
99. Ip 10mA R V 5 0 01 e g for V 24V R 24 5 0 01 1 9K Select R 2K2 Rating 19 2200 0 16W Use 0 5W resistor PLC s Power Supply GND Figure 10 4 However if the stepper motor driver input is only 5V CMOS level and non opto isolated then you need to convert the 12 24V outputs to 5V This can be achieved using a low cost transistor such as a 2N4403 A better way is to use an opto isolator with a logic level output as shown in Figure 10 4 This provides a galvanic isolation between the PLC and the stepper motor driver 5V OV Stepper s supply OO Logic output 12 24V DC Optoisolator H11L2 Power Supply rene _for PLC _ Quality Technology To 5V CMOS stepper driver input 2K2 resistor 5mA max 2 2K Figure 10 5 Conversion of F Series outputs to 5V logic level fe e TRIANGLE IRA RESEARCH 10 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control 10 4 Programming Stepper Control Channel 10 4 1 Introduction Any of the 3 stepper motor channels can be configured as either a Controller direction pulse or a Driver and as a Driver can drive in FULL STEP mode or HALF STEP mode The stepper channels are controlled by the PLC program using the STEPMOVE and STEPMOVEABS commands These commands have the same parameters as they did when they were used on M Series PLCs For example STEPMOVE ch count r STEPMOVEABS ch posi
100. K bytes each The file system does not use any kind of file allocation table hence it must follow a strict naming scheme because the file name directly relates to where it is stored in the file space The followings describe how the files are named and where they are stored 1 2 ang IR The first 35 files are named O yyy 1 yyy X yyy Y yyy The yyy part of the file name is the extension and only the following MIME extension are accepted by the PLC HTM JPG GIF CSS JS BIN TXT JAR ZIP XLS Any other extension names will be replaced by The MIME extension are respected by the web browser when you download a file from the built in web server so you should always only store files with one of the above extension The file O yyy occupies the first 4K byte slot 1 yyy occupies the second slot the Y yyy occupies the 35 slot V TRIANGLE 90 3 RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System 4 The next 400 files can only use the file name Zxxx yyy where the xxx part of the filename is a 3 digit decimal number which can be any number from 000 to 399 The yyy part is an extension and the same as what s described in 2 above 5 Z000 yyy occupies the 36 slot Z001 yyy occupies the 37 slot and the file Z399 yyy occupies the last 4K slot 6 Any file may occupy more than 1 slot so you can specify O yyy to o
101. MM 4 and OUTCOMM 4 commands Note that any non zero ASCII data can be sent using the PRINT 4 command The following subsections describe the various Network Service commands available to the Fx2424 2 4 1 Get our IP Address Format lt IP gt Response Xxx Xxxx xxx xxx nnnn IP address port of FServer Example PRINT 4 lt IP gt SETLCD 1 1 Our IP INPUT 4 Note This IP address is returned instantly so there is no need to wait for INPUT 4 2 4 2 DNS command Resolving Domain Name into IP Address In order to use this command successfully you must first correctly define the DNS Server IP address mentioned in Section 2 1 4 Format lt DNS domain name gt Response XXX XXX XXX XXX IP address string returned by DNS server ERR 07 DNS Unresolved Either DNS server not properly defined or the domain name does not exist Response xxx xxx xxx xxx IP address string returned by domain name server Tat RESEARCH 2 17 INTERNATIONAL r 2 i Chapter 2 Ethernet Port STATUS 3 This function returns 1 on success and 0 on failure Example PRINT 4 lt DNS tri plc com gt FOR I 1 to 10000 AS INPUT 4 IF LEN A lt gt 0 SETLCD 1 1 IP AS RETURN ENDIF Notes a b 4 3 asss IR There is no need for the closing tag lt gt to end this command If your DNS server has been correctly defined the above program should ret
102. MP ENDIF Figure 12 3 Using Real Time Clock Example 12 8 RTC Calibration The Fx2424 PLC uses a battery back real time clock that derived its clock from a 32 768KHz crystal which should provide reasonably good accuracy for normal use However if you like the RTC to be of greater accuracy you can calibrate it using the F series Ethernet Advanced Configuration screen in the PLC configuration software mentioned in Chapter 2 The data field to be used is the RTC Calib textbox as shown below RTC Calib 0 In the above field you will need to enter the number of seconds that you want the PLC to add or subtract over a period of 72 hours Therefore first you must check the PLC s RTC reading against a super Ti aes 12 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 12 Real Time Clock accurate clock source e g a clock that regularly updates itself with atomic clock data in the airwaves and find out how many seconds the clock would have gained or lost over 72 hours For example if the RTC is too slow and it loses 5 seconds over 72 hours you would want the RTC to add 5 seconds over 72 hours and you therefore should enter the value of 5 in the RTC Calib field If the RTC is too fast and gains 8 seconds over the 72 hours then you should enter a value of 8 in this field to compensate for the inaccuracy Note that the RTC does not compensate for temperature variation hence its accuracy is temperature dependent If you
103. ONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System FileZilla Server Options General settings A IEN TEE TC Welcome mess _ IP bindings IP Filter Security settings FileZilla Server Use custom port range 41000 41001 1 65535 IPv4 specific Miscellaneous Admin Interface seti Logging GSS Settings External Server IP Address for passive mode transfers Default Use the following IP Use custom PASV settings if you are operating the server from behind a NAT router or a firewall In that case the IP address of the server is not accessible from Speed Limits Filetransfer compres SSL TLS settings Autoban outside of the router so you should fill in the correct address here Use the port range to limit the number of ports that will need to be forwarded through the router You can also enter hostnames v O Retrieve external IP address from Information for users with dynamic IPs If your external IP changes it might take up to 5 minutes after the next failed transfer until FileZilla Server recognizes the changed IP In most cases the IP is updated within 30s after a failed transfer Don t use external IP for local connections Next open up Windows Firewall and add to the Exception list the port 21 command port and ports 41000 to 41001 or whatever range limit you have set to in the FileZilla Setup screen This should allow the FTP Server to
104. Once the connection is successfully established you can begin to use the built in TBASIC commands READMODBUS WRITEMODBUS READMB2 and WRITEMB2 operating on virtual comm port 4 to send MODBUS commands and receive processed responses from a remote MODBUS TCP Server This greatly simplifies your programming task since it is very similar to communicating with a Modbus RTU slave that is connected to the serial port 1 2 or 3 Although in this case the Modbus TCP device could be located in the other hemisphere and connected via the Internet The full syntax for the lt MBTCPCONNECTS tag is described below Format lt MBTCPCONNECT IP address 502 of another Modbus TCP Server gt Response lt CONNECTED gt Successfully connected to the Modbus TCP server of the specified IP address ERR 05 Prev Conn ON Another NS command has been executed and left the client socket opened but did not execute the PRINT 4 lt gt to close the client socket ERR 04 Not Connected Failed to connect to the targeted Modbus TCP Server STATUS 3 This TBASIC function returns 1 if the Modbus TCP connection is live and returns 0 if the connection has ended You can test the connection status to determine if the connection is still alive Description This service allows your PLC to log in to any device that supports a Modbus TCP server and is connected to the same LAN or to the Internet Of course you may also use it to connect to
105. PLC is locally connected to COMM4 port of this PLC as shown in the following example A NETCMD 4 01RI00 Multiple NETCMD commands can be executed as long as the connection is alive You can test the connection status by checking the result of the STATUS 3 function Once all the command exchanges have been completed you should send a lt gt tag to close the client connection to the remote server so that other NS commands can be executed in other parts of the program Example Please refer to the fnConnect and fnNetCmd custom functions in the demo program TestEthernet PC6 Tri eee 2 20 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 4 5 Remote File Services Format lt REMOTEFS IP Address of remote TLServer 2 1 amp above gt File Service tag for TLServer lt REMOTEFS gt Response The response strings sent by the remote TLServer in response to the File Service tag sent by this PLC Or ERR 04 Not Connected Failed to connect to remote TLServer Example Please refer to the fnRFS1 and fnRFS2 custom functions in the demo program TestEthernet PC6 Description This commands allows the Fx2424 to connect to a remote TLServer to perform any of the Files amp Email Services that a TLServer normally provides to PLCs that are connected to it This includes creating text files on a remote TLServer and writing or appending data to it anyti
106. Prev Conn ON Another NS command has been executed and left the client socket opened but did not execute the PRINT 4 lt gt to close the client socket ERR 04 Not Connected Failed to connect to remote Fserver or TLServer STATUS 3 This TBASIC function returns 1 if the connection is active and returns 0 if the connection has ended You can test the connection status to determine if the connection is still alive Description This service allows your PLC to log in to another TRi Super PLC such as another Fx FMD or Nano 10 PLC connected via TLServer through the Internet You execute this command by first sending the string lt CONNECT XXX XXX XXX XXX 9080 gt using the PRINT 4 command where XXX XXX XXX XXX is the IP address of the remote FServer or TLServer followed by sending the username and password needed to log in to the remote server Each line should be terminated with a CR carriage return character The PRINT 4 command automatically appends the CR character Once a connection with the remote server is established the CPU will return the response string lt CONNECTED gt to the user program which can read it using the INPUT 4 function The STATUS 3 function can also be used to test if the connection is successful and alive When the program gets the confirmation of connection it can then use the TBASIC NETCMD 4 x command to read or write data to the remote PLCs as if the remote
107. R MANUAL 16 49 Testing of Host Link CommandsS 0 cccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeseaesaseeeeeeeeeeseaeseneeeeneeeeneas 16 23 16 50 Visual Basic Sample Program cccesccssseeeseeeeeeeeeseeesenneeeeeeeeeseaeseseeeneeeeseneeesnaesaeeeeeees 16 24 16 51 Inter DLC Networking Using NETCMD Command 2 c1 cseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 24 16 52 Inter PLC Networking Using MODBUS Protocols s ccssccsseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeenseeeeenees 16 24 17 IR REMOTE CONTROL 17 1 Tel Juttrogd VC g Rese pr dee EEN 17 1 17 2 Applications of IR Remote Control ccccccsscceseeeeseeeeeeseeesneeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeenseeeeeseeesneseseenenes 17 1 17 3 Decoding Sony IR Remote Control Signal ccsscceseceseseesseeseseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeesenees 17 2 17 3 1 Relocating The IR Remote Sensor u eseesssesseeseeseseenetsettnttnnntntnnnnntnnnttnnnennnnntet 17 3 17 4 Learning and Playing back IR Remote Control Signals csssccseeeessecssseeenseeeeeeeeees 17 3 17 4 1 Recording IR Remote Control Data Get 17 3 17 4 2 Loading IR Remote Control Data Get 17 4 17 4 3 Playback of IR Remote Control Signal ccc ccecscceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeenaeeneaes 17 4 17 5 SETSYSTEM 17 xxx Command Summary cccccecsseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseenseeesnsneeeees 17 5 18 LIGHT DIMMER CONTROL 18 1 18 1 INTO Te E 18 1 18 2 Control of 120V 240V AC TRIAC cccsececeeeeesseeenseeeeeeeeescaes
108. R1 440 ohms R1 power rating I R 1 1 W gt Use a 3W resistor The LED emitter circuit is to be controlled by one of the PLC s PWM outputs To playback the IR remote data set in the Current IR Buffer through PWM channel n you simply execute the following command SETSYSTEM 17 n 10 i e Ifyou run SETSYSTEM 17 11 the PLC will re construct the IR signal using the data in the Current IR Buffer and send it out via IR emitter connected to its PWM channel 1 D O 5 Likewise if the IR emitter is connected to PWM 4 D O 8 then you need to run the command SETSYSTEM 17 14 to turn ON the IR emitter The PLC actually uses the PWM output s to turn the IR LED ON and OFF to produce the 38KHz carrier frequency at 33 duty cycle Ti aes 17 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 17 IR Remote Control Important Notes 1 The IR remote control sensing interrupt will be disabled automatically when you playback the IR control signal This is to prevent the reflected IR signals from corrupting the data in the Current IR Buffer Hence if you need the PLC to re learn a new IR remote signal after you have done a playback you will need to execute SETSYSTEM 17 1 again to enable the interrupt service routine 2 Itis possible to connect multiple IR emitters to the same PWM outputs especially if these emitters are going to different rooms The PMW outputs on the Fx2424 are capable of
109. RVD3039 16 16Read Variable Multiple Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 Note This new command is available only to Fx PLC Command Format ER v 16 16 16 16 ie jiejie ie eT a ST Starting DM address Number of DM 0001 to OFAO 4000 0001 to 0032 50 Dec Response Format PR Vv 16 167 16 jie ST _ eT Header 17 Data Hex 4 Hexadecimal Digit for 16 bit integer 16 Last data E g To read the value of DM 3600 to DM 3609 send host link command RVDOE10000A 2 TRIANGLE 16 8 mmm URA RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL m Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 17 Read Variable Single Floating Point Array FP 1 to FP 1000 Note This new command is available only to Fx PLC Command Format PR v EF 16 16 16 16 LO keen eeng 0001 to OFAO 400010 index to FP variable Response Format PR v F 16 16 16 16 3 8 Hexadecimal Digit in 32bit IEEE format E g To read the value of FP 20 send host link command RvF0014 If variable FP 20 contains the value 1 2345E 2 0 012345 PLC will send the response string as RVF3C4A42AF 16 18Read Variable Multiple Floating Point Data FP 1 to FP 1000 Note This new command is available only to Fx PLC Command Format atv e De he he Tepe Te Te Te TS NT NT Starting FP index Number of FP 0001 to 03E8 1000
110. Re On ae 8 bit Channel Hex Response Format PR o ie ie oe 8 bit data Hex m 2 TRIANGLE 16 2 mmm URA RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Please refer to the Input Output vs Channel Number table described in the section 16 3 Read Digital Input Channels for details 16 5 Read Internal Relay Channels Command Format PRT Ri oafo o KT 8 bit Channel Hex Response Format PR R te te 2 nnd 8 bit data Hex 16 5 1 Definition of Internal Relay Channel Numbers All Fx PLCs support 512 internal relays the channel definition of the first 256 internal relays is the same as the inputs and the outputs The remaining relays and their assigned channels are shown in the following table bit7 Relay numbers bm CH2016 CH21 16 CH2246 CH23 16 CH24 46 CH25 16 CH26 6 CH27 16 CH28 16 CH29 46 CH2A 6 CH2B is ee E WE es ie ee es CH3A 6 CH3D 6 CHE CH3F 6 16 6 Read Timer Contacts Command Format PRET Pope tol KT 8 bit Channel Hex Response Format R T ie 16 tal KT CG TRIANGLE 2 URA RESEARCH 16 3 LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 8 bit data in Hex 16 6 1 Definition of Timer Contact Channel Numbers A timer contact is a single bit of memory and 8 timer contacts are grouped into one 8 bit channel similar to that of the inputs out
111. Set PWM 2 output to 95 duty cycle at 50 Hz Ti aes 11 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs Likewise to send a 10 positive PWM control pulse to the Servo you will need to run the following statement SETPWM 2 9000 50 Set PWM 2 output to 90 duty cycle at 50 Hz 11 4 2 Using Fx2424 PWM Output To Control RC Servo Opto Isolated You can also use the PLC s PWM output to drive an optocoupler such as 4N35 and the output from the optocoupler is use to provide control pulse to the RC Servo as shown in Figure 11 5 4N35 24V DC 4 8V to 6V Ge Optoisolator DCPower For PLC For Servo OUTPUTS ee uer Figure 11 5 Opto lsolated Interace to RC Servo In the opto isolated interface shown above the power supply to the PLC and that to the RC Servo are completely isolated no common ground required Also since the interface inverts the output signal from the PLC no software inversion is necessary i e When the PLC NPN output is OFF the control input to the RC Servo will be OFF and when the PLC NPN output is ON the control input to the RC Servo 6V Hence to send a 5 positive PWM control pulse to the Servo you can run the following statement SETPWM 2 500 50 Set PWM 2 output to 5 duty cycle at 50 Hz Likewise to send a 10 positive PWM control pulse to the Servo you can run the following statement SETPWM 2 1000 50 Set PWM 2 output to 10 duty cycle at 50 Hz Of cour
112. TCP IP packets sent between your PC and the PLC However it is important to setup the Filezilla server program properly to minimize connection trouble 20 5 1 Download and Setup FTP Server 1 First download the FileZilla server installer from the following website http filezilla project org download php type server 2 Run the FileZilla Server Interface program which is meant for managing the FTP Server settings Connect to Server V FileZilla Server 127 0 0 1 File Server Edit Server Address Port 5A amp OB ie 3 127 0 0 1 14147 FileZilla Server version 0 9 40 beta i ns Copyright 2001 2011 by Tim Kosse tim kosse Gfilezilla project org Connecting to server Administration password Connected waiting for authentication Ir Logged on C Always connect to this server Account IP Transfer Ca gt 0 bytes received 3 If the FileZilla Server is running on the same PC that you are running the FileZilla Server Interface program then you can use the localhost IP address which is 127 0 0 1 the Port can be anything since this is a client port that the Interface program is using to interact with the FTP Server don t be confused with the FTP Server listening port which is by default 21 4 lf this is the first time you run the program after setting up Filezilla FTP Server there will be no Administration password so you can leave it blank Click OK to connect 5 Click Edit gt Settings and then
113. Ti d TRIANGLE R RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Fx2424 With floating point support Ladder BASIC Super PLC USER S Revision 0 MANUAL USER MANUAL Copyright Notice amp Disclaimer All rights reserved With the exception of legitimate TRi PLC users who may print or make copies of this manual for reference purposes no parts of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of TRi Triangle Research International Inc TRi makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof In addition information contained herein are subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless TRi assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions or any damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Inc MODBUS is a trademark of Mobdus org All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Revision Sheet Release No Date ____ Revision Description _ O Z O Z i O 2 15 2014 First Release C ss M Tri eee Page INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL Conditions of Sale and Product Warranty Triangle Research International Inc TRi and the Buyer agree to the following terms and conditions of Sale and Purchase 1 The Fx2424 and Fx1616R Programmable Controllers are guaranteed against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of
114. Uoloadmg eenn tnntnennnnennennnnnnenneennsnn nnna 20 3 20 2 File Structure and File Naming of The Extended File System cccccssecsseeeeseeeeeees 20 3 20 3 Transferring Files To The PLC s Web Server s cccssecssseeeseeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeseeeeeeneesnaeeeseeneneees 20 4 20 4 Accessing The Extended Data Files Using TBASIC ccccccssseeesseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeesees 20 4 20 4 1 Open A File For Writing New Data 20 4 20 4 2 Open A File For Appending Data To The End Of Thee 20 5 20 4 3 Delete A Filerna anean cnsteaa eed ened a iaaea aa aa aai 20 5 20 4 4 Open A File For Reading ist csctcccsacecebtuaveeneekssecutaieaacteneesvccsustativen aaa aaa 20 5 T o_O TRIANGLE Lied RESEARCH Page x INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 20 5 Setting Up The FileZilla FTP Server ccccssccssseceeeeesseeseseeeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeseseeeeeseeesneesaseenenees 20 7 20 5 1 Download and Setup FTP Geer 20 7 20 5 2 Testing Connection To The FTP Server Using Telnet 20 9 20 6 Uploading File From PLC to FileZilla FTP Server Directory ccsecssseesseeeeseenees 20 12 20 6 1 Overview of The FTP Protoco unanit an EN nda NAE aiaa 20 12 20 6 2 PLC FTP Upload elei 20 12 20 6 3 Monitoring The FTP Upload Progress cceeccceceeeeeeneeseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeeenees 20 13 20 7 Setting Up A FTP Server Behind a Windows Firewall c ssccsseceseccesseseseeeeeeeeeneae 20 13 20 8 Uploading File From PLC to FileZilla FTP
115. an amplify the thermocouple output to 0 5V which can then be connected to the PLC s analog input 5 3 4 Using PT100 Temperature Sensor PT100 is a positive temperature coefficient thermistor that is made from platinum It has the advantage of being very stable and highly accurate It is usually connected to a signal conditioner in a balanced bridge configuration and the signal conditioner will convert temperature changes to 0 5V output for the PLC CO TRIANGLE 7 Lied RESEARCH o INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os 5 4 Analog Outputs The Fx2424 PLC features 4 channels of 0 5V DC 12 bit analog outputs Digital to Analog Converters or D A Unlike in the M series PLC these 4 D A outputs each have their own dedicated pins and therefore do not take up any Analog input pins The pin assignment of these analog outputs is described in Section 1 2 1 Note that the D A 1 to 4 are all high impedance outputs that would not be able to source more than 1mA of current You would need to connect them to external buffer amplifiers if you want to use them to deliver load current to drive external loads DAC Output AVcc 1023 1024 1022 1024 2 1024 1 1024 SetDAC value 0 4 8 12 4088 4092 Figure 5 8 5 4 1 Programming The Analog Output You can use the TBASIC command SETDAC n x to set D A n to a 12 bit value x x 0 to 4095 You only need to execute
116. an refer to this web site http Awww sbprojects com knowledge ir sirc htm To enable the IR Remote decoding in the PLC you need to run the following command once SETSYSTEM 17 1 enable IR remot This command enables the PLC s IR remote interrupt routine and it will sample the incoming IR signal This interrupt routine will be disabled when the PLC is turned OFF or a SETSYSTEM 17 0 command is run or when an IR playback function is invoked see section 17 4 The IR signal received can be decoded and read by the PLC program using the TBASIC command STATUS 17 E g X STATUS 17 read IR code into variable X THAT S IT When you press a different key on the Sony IR remote control the STATUS 17 function will return a different number E g If you press the 1 key on the TV remote control STATUS 17 returns the hexadecimal number amp H80 the 2 key returns amp H81 and if you press the 0 key on the TV remote STATUS 17 returns amp H89 Do note that a Sony VCR remote would return a different set of data because a VCR has a different device code from the TV You can then simply use the IF THEN statement to perform different tasks based on the key being pressed Note 1 If no key is pressed STATUS 17 returns 1 2 Ifa key is pressed down and not released then the first read of the STATUS 17 returns the code correctly but a repeat read of the STATUS 17 functio
117. and LCD420 backlight If you are using voltages other than 24V DC to power the Fx2424 then compute the resistor value using the following formula R V 4 l E g For LCD420 at 12V DC R 12 4 0 13 62 ohms Power dissipation I x R 0 13 x 62 gt 1W The resistor value is only approximate You may increase or decrease the resistance value to alter the brightness of the backlight If you wish to adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight you could wire the backlight to one of the PLC s PWM output The resistor value selected should provide the current required for full brightness when the PWM duty cycle 100 By varying the duty cycle of the PWM output you can adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight E g you can create the effect of fade in fade out or flashing LCD backlight to get the operator s attention 1 6 2 Programming The LCD Display Some programming examples for the LCD display are presented in Chapter 13 rn Tat RESEARCH 1 7 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 7 Program and Data Memory 1 7 1 Program Memory The Fx2424 has by default 23 5K words 16 bit of program memory stored in the CPU Flash memory area vs a default of only 16K on F2424 some later version of F2424 do support up to 23 5K but requires setting DIP switch 2 Each ladder logic element contacts or coils takes up 1 word of memory A TBASIC statement or function takes up half a word to four or five words depen
118. annels The 2 A D converters run simultaneously and thus save conversion time even when all 8 analog channels are used All analog input channels operate in the range of 0 5V full scale The pin assignment for these analog outputs is described in Section 1 2 1 Electrical Characteristics No of A D channel 8 Resolution 12 bit Input Impedance Ch 1 to 4 gt gt 10 M ohms Ch 5 to 8 20 00K Ohms Moving Average 1 to 9 points user definable Conversion Time lt 2 us for one channel lt 6 us for all 8 channels 2 A D converters run simultaneously ADC n value 4095 4094 4093 ot NY Co Input Voltage 5 00 Figure 5 1 Transfer Function for 12 bit ADC E TRI RESEARCH 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os Electrically the A D 1 to 4 are designed differently from A D 5 to 8 This would affect how these 8 analog inputs interface to different analog signal sources as described in the following subsections 5 2 1 A D 1 to 4 The first four ADCs are high impedance inputs gt gt 10 Mega Ohms which of course can be connected directly to any 0 5V analog source It is also very easy to interface to other analog voltage or current sources by using external resistors as voltage dividers or current to voltage converters as shown in the following diagram 0 20mA or E A D 1 4 4 20mA Vi 0 10V Current loop 0 0 5 0V or R
119. any non Ethernet equipped both TRi or 3rd party serial Modbus slave device to be directly accessible by a Modbus TCP client via the Ethernet or the Internet In addition the user PLC program does not need to handle the gateway function at all as the CPU performs the translation functions automatically and transparently to the PLC s program Best of all while acting as a gateway the Nano 10 FMD or F series PLC program can simultaneously act as a Modbus masier PLC and read write to any registers inside any of the attached Modbus RTU slave The CPU firmware automatically schedules the order of the command response packets whether it is originated from the client or from the PLC itself so that the Modbus TCP command from the client will be responded to in the correct order and in a timely manner 21 2 Application Ideas for Modbus TCP Gateway The Modbus TCP gateway function can be very useful for many large area control systems such as a building automation system A master FMD or F series PLC is linked to many Modbus RTU slave controllers via RS485 bus distributed across an entire building The master PLC can perform sophisticated control functions since it has read write access to ALL the Modbus RTU slaves it connects to At the same time a Modbus TCP client software such as a Building Management System BMS can access any registers in the master PLC or ANY of the slave Modbus RTU controller directly via the master PLC acting as a gateway for the
120. asily For your convenience we have provided a sample TBASIC program that you can download from the following web page http www tri plc com appnotes F series ThermistorSensorFPLC zip This example uses the R T Resistance Temperature graph of the Precon Type Ill thermistor to implement the temperature look up We have provided an Excel file that computes the ADC reading vs ambient temperature for this thermistor type The TBASIC program uses these ADC readings to determine the temperature The sample program is structured such that the lookup table values are stored in the FRAM and you can readily adapt it to other types of thermistors with a different R T graph The program only implements lookup for a temperature range of 10 F to 100 F but you can also easily change the temperature range of interest Tri eee 5 6 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os 5 3 2 Using LM34 Semiconductor Sensor Vs Vs 5V to 30V CHOOSE Ry Vs 50 pA LM34 Vour Vout 3 000 mV AT 300 F 750 mV AT 75 F 500 mV AT 50 F R LM34 Vom 10 0 mV F Ve SH Full Range Fahrenheit Temperature Sensor Figure 5 7 The LM34 is a wonderful low cost semiconductor temperature sensor with a range of 50 F to 300 F It is extremely easy to use for measuring temperature above 0 F You simply connect one pin to the positive voltage 5 to 30V and the other pin to OV and the signal pin will output a voltage th
121. assumes a different ID If a master PLC is used then P Tri wees 15 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol the master PLC should also have a different ID from all the slaves Otherwise contention may occur i e two controllers simultaneously sending data on the receiver bus resulting in garbage data being received by the host On the other hand if none of the controller IDs match that specified in the command frame then the host computer will receive no response at all The PLC automatically recognizes the type of command protocols point to point or multi point sent by the host computer and it will respond accordingly If a multi point command is accepted by the controller the response frame will start with a character followed by its device ID and the same header as the command This will be followed by the data requested by the command a response frame FCS and the terminator 15 4 4 Framing Errors When the controller receives a multi point host link command frame it computes the FCS of the command and compares it with the FCS field received in the command frame If the two do not match then a framing error has occurred The controller will send the following Framing Error Response to the host Device ID Header FCS Terminator 15 4 5 Command Errors If an unknown command is received or if the command is illegal such as an attempt to access an unavailable channel the following e
122. aster signal generator PLC 15 5 5 TROUBLE SHOOTING AN RS485 NETWORK 1 Single faulty device If a single device on the RS485 network becomes inaccessible problems can be isolated to this particular device Check for loose or broken wiring or wrong DIP switch settings Also double check the device ID using the host link command IR sent via the RS232C port of the PLC If all attempts fail either replace the entire PLC or the SN75176 chip that handles the RS485 interfacing and try again 2 Multiple faulty devices If all the PLCs are inaccessible by the host computer it may possibly be due to a faulty RS232C to RS485 converter at the PC If this is the case disconnect the RS485 converter from the network and check it using a single PLC Replace the converter if it is confirmed to be faulty Next check the wire from the converter to the beginning of the network A broken wire here can lead to the failure of the entire network Since an RS485 network links many PLCs together electrically and in a daisy chain fashion problems occurring along the RS485 network sometimes affect the operation of the entire network For example a TR RESEARCH 15 9 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol broken wire at the terminal of one node may mean that all the PLCs connected after this node become inaccessible by the master If the RS485 interface of one of the PLCs has short circuited because of component failure then the
123. at is directly proportional to the ambient temperature in F The output voltage is 10mV per degree F So at room temperature of 72 degrees F the device will output a voltage of 72 x 0 01 0 72V If you connect this to the PLC s analog input you can obtain the temperature in degree F or degree C using the formula F ADC 1 500 4096 in degree F OR C F 82 5 9 in degree C Although another part number LM35 can output temperature in 10mV per degree C the output falls into even lower ADC range for ambient temperature measurement since the same 72 degree F is only 22 degree C which means LM35 only outputs 22 x 0 01 0 22V Hence for better accuracy and resolution we recommend using LM34 instead of LM35 and if need be then convert it to degree C using TBASIC Another advantage for using LM34 instead of LM35 is that you can measure down to 0 F 17 degree C without using a negative voltage source as shown in the circuit on the right in Figure 5 7 5 3 3 Using Thermocouple Thermocouples are very rugged devices that are widely used in the industry because of their stability accuracy and wide functional temperature range They are commonly used in measuring temperature in ovens that may go up to several hundred degrees C However thermocouple output signals are in the range of tens of microvolts to mille volts which is too small to be measured by the Fx2424 s analog input directly You will need a signal conditioner that c
124. at lets you resolve the IP address from a given domain name one host exe tool that we found to work was downloaded from http pigtail net LRP dig For example executing the command line host mail sbcglobal net will resolve its IP address Of course you can only use this smtp server provided your ISP is SBC almost no SMTP server will relay emails from a client that is not its one of its own subscribers If you do not plan to use the FServer to send out emails yet then you can leave the default SMTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 You can change the settings anytime later when you need it 2 1 4 DNS Server IP Address DNS Domain Name Server allows the FServer to contact a remote server by means of domain name instead of IP Address The DNS takes in the given domain name such as yahoo com and returns the IP TRIANGLE d Tat RESEARCH 2 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port address of the target server You will need to fill in the DNS IP Address if you intend to ask the Fserver to resolve a domain name into an IP address or you intend to contact a client directly by using domain name instead of using IP Address The DNS server IP address could be the same as the Gateway IP Addr described in section 2 1 3 But it will be more efficient to define the actual DNS server IP address that your ISP provides You can usually obtain the DNS server IP address by going to the Administrator page of your router and pull up i
125. b server using a FTP client program The following sections describe how to use the free FileZilla FTP program to transfer these files and section 2 10 will describe how to customize the control web pages 2 9 1 Installing the FileZilla program First please download the FileZilla client from http filezilla project org Once you have gone to the web page from the above link you will need to select the client version to download Then you need to select the software version for your computers platform typically the Windows version and download it to your computer This is the installation setup file which you will need to execute after it has downloaded Please perform a default installation by following the installation steps 2 9 2 Configure FileZilla to Communicate with the Fx2424 After installing the FileZilla client please open it from the start menu or desktop icon and then go to the File menu and select Site Manager The following menu will then pop up Tri eee 2 33 INTERNATIONAL r Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Under the default General tab you will gt Manager Select Entry need to enter the Host IP address and fe eg General Advanced Transfer settings charset configure the Logontype Host 192 168 1 5 Port Servertype FTP File Transfer Protocol H Dee GE er IP
126. be connected together The twisted pair cable goes from node to node in a daisy chain fashion and should be terminated by a 120 ohm resistor as shown below o 5V Terminating resistor FMD FX1616 Nano10 RS 485 or RS485 RS485 RS485 FX PLC Figure 15 2 Note that the two wires are not interchangeable so they must be wired the same way to each controller The maximum wire length should not be more than 1200 meters 4000 feet RS 485 uses balanced or differential drivers and receivers which means that the logic state of the transmitted signal depends on the differential voltage between the two wires and not on the voltage with respect to a common ground As there will be times when no transmitters are active which leaves the wires in floating state it is good practice to ensure that the RS 485 receivers will indicate to the CPUs that there is no data to receive In order to do this we should hold the twisted pair in the logic 1 state by applying a differential bias to the lines using a pair of 560Q to 1KQ biasing resistors connected to a 9V at least 5V and OV supply as shown in Figure 15 2 Otherwise random noise on the pair could be falsely interpreted as data The two biasing resistors are necessary to ensure robust data communication in actual applications Some RS485 converters may already have biasing built in so the biasing resistors may not be needed However if the master is a Fx2424 then you should use the biasi
127. ble by TBASIC The PLC can open a new file for writing new data essentially deleting the old file content or open an existing file and append data to the end of the file It can also open a file and read data from the file as ASCII strings It can achieve this by using the PRINT 8 and INPUTS 8 functions which will be described in details in the following sections We have created a sample program ExtendedFileSystem PC6 click here http Awww tri plc com trilogi ExtendedFileSystem zip to download that demonstrates all these new capabilities 20 4 1 Open A File For Writing New Data Syntax PRINT 8 lt WRITE Zxxx yyy gt where Zxxx yyy is the file name If successfully executed the lt WRITE gt command will open the file and set the file pointer to the beginning of the file Thereafter the PLC can start writing ASCII data to the file using the PRINT 8 lt string data gt command Note the PRINT 8 command automatically appends a carriage return to the end of the string data unless the string data is terminated with a semi colon Tri ss 20 4 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 20 Extended File System When the PLC has completed writing data it must close the file by executing the command PRINT 8 lt gt E g PRINT 8 lt WRITE Z005 TXT gt PRINT 8 The current Greenwich Mean Time is PRINT 8 STRS TIME 1 STRS TIME 2 00 PRINT 8 lt gt
128. cally upload the data to a web server transforms the PLC into a potent data logger The PLC can be programmed to capture daily weekly or monthly data and then periodically upload the data file to an Internet web server with a unique time stamped filename E g temperaturelog2012 01 01 xls This allows the PLC to log data completely unattended The data uploaded by the PLC to the external web server can therefore be viewed or downloaded into a PC using any web browser anywhere in the world This allows you to carry out analysis of past logged data file for performance or diagnostic analysis at any time without having to physically access the PLC to retrieve the logged data Tri ss 20 2 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 1 1 Advantage of Using Data Uploading 1 Although it is possible to directly access the PLC s internal web server to download the data file it has created this does require active action by the user and to ensure that the data are retrieved before the file is full and deleted by the PLC to create space to log new data By programming the PLC to upload the data periodically the PLC can delete the file after it has successfully uploaded the data file to free up space to accept new data In other words the PLC will never run out of data space to log data since it can store the logged files on any server including the Cloud To directly access the file stored on the PLC from outside of t
129. ccess the ADC channel 2 in TBASIC you have to use the ADC 2 function instead An 8 bit hexadecimal number is used to denote the type of system variable as shown in the following table Variable 06 7 System type Variable ctrPV 0 Not a system variable in TBASIC but readable Command Format plett be a type Index type 01 to 0D denotes the type of system variable to access index 01 to 1F index into the array starting from 01 Response Format R v S 16 16 16 e 4 Hexadecimal Digit for 16 bit integer Example To read the value of DATE 2 which represents the month of the RTC send command RVS0902 and if the PLC responds with RVS0005 it means the month is May 16 20Read Variable High Speed Counter HSCPV Command Format PR iEvViHi o Channel 1 or 2 Response Format PR v A 167 16 16 ie 16 16 16 te 8 Hexadecimal Digit for 32 bit integer E g To read the value of HSCPV 2 send hostlink command RVH2 If variable HSCPV 2 contains the value 123456 1E240 the PLC will send the response string as RVH0001E240 TRI RESEARCH 16 10 INTERNATIONAL r Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 21 Write Inputs Command Format Winter kee Channel Data 00 to OF Response Format 16 22Write Outputs Command Format pw ofatn jie ie oO a oe a oe
130. ccssseceeessseceenseseeeeeseeeeeenseseeesnseseeesesseeeenenseenenes 16 12 16 27 Write Timer Set Value S V ccccssseceeeseseeeeesnneeeeensneeeenseeeeenseeeesnseseeeseseeeenenseeeenes 16 12 16 28 Write Counter Present Value P V cccesssseceeeseseeeeeseeeeeenseseeeseseseeeseseenenseessenenens 16 13 16 29 Write Counter Set Value S V siicss cout ccieiteceedesdeunsesecdoiesiedeaedvasndebesasdetweascdceswdeveddensddsteaness 16 13 16 30 Write Variable Integers A tO Z 2 ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeeeeenseneaeeeeeseeesnneeeeeeeenses 16 13 16 31 Write Variable Strings A to Z cssscssscessscesseeeeseeeenseeessesenseeeeneeeesnanseneenenseaeneas 16 14 16 32 Write Variable Floating point A tO Zi ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseseeeenseeeeseesenneeeneeeeneas 16 14 16 33 Write Variable Singe Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 cssseceeessseeeeees 16 14 16 34 Write Variable Multiple Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 ccessseeeeees 16 15 16 35 Write Variable Singe Float Array FP 1 to FP 1000 ssseseeessseeeenseeeeeeenes 16 15 16 36 Write Variable Multiple Float Array FP 1 to FP 1000 ecsssseceesssseeeeees 16 15 16 37 Write Variable System Variables ccssecceseeseseeeesneeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeseneeesnaeeeseeneees 16 16 16 38 Write Variable High Speed Counter HSCPV J ssecceseeesseeceseeee
131. ccupy the entire 1740K bytes of the file space Or you can configure Z000 yyy to occupy 20K 5 slots from the 36 slot and the next valid file should only start from Z005 yyy i e If you want to allocate 20K bytes of file space to file Z000 yyy you cannot use any file name Z001 Z002 Z003 and Z004 otherwise these file will corrupt the file space of Z000 yyy 7 This means that the programmer will have to design the file space carefully and determine how to best use the file structure to provide the right balance between the number of data files and the amount of data space allocated to each data file Note The file name restriction only applies to files stored on the PLC s internal file space When you use the FTP upload function described later you can specify any destination filename as long as they are acceptable to the external FTP server 20 3 Transferring Files To The PLC s Web Server If you are only using the extended file space for the purpose of storing additional web pages on the built in web server then you can use the FTP client software such as FileZilla client to transfer the program to the PLC as described in Section 2 10 20 4 Accessing The Extended Data Files Using TBASIC TBASIC program on a F series PLC with r77 firmware can directly access any data file with names from Z000 yyy to Z399 yyy File with names from O yyy to Y yyy are reserved for storing web pages only and hence are not accessi
132. ctric power meters analog I O modules e g the l 70xx modules by ICPDAS variable frequency drives etc that allows data communication via their RS485 port The Fx2424 PLC can use either COMM2 or COMMS port to access these devices The PLC has many built in commands for reading writing to these serial ports including built in commands for communicating with devices that use the MODBUS ASCII or RTU protocols 14 3 3 Interfacing Other Devices to Modbus Host or to the Internet Since the Fx2424 supports MODBUS protocols it can operate as a master PLC and serve as a gateway to interface non MODBUS enabled PLCs such as the E10 PLCs or the I 7000 analog modules to third party SCADA software or MMI hardware that speaks MODBUS The Fx2424 also makes it easy for these devices to be controlled or monitored over the Internet The master Fx2424 will use its RS485 port to pull data from these devices into its data memory The data memory in the Fx2424 is in turn accessible by a SCADA program using the Modbus serial or Modbus TCP protocol Through the Fx2424 these other connected devices are also accessible from the Internet using the i TRiLOGI client server software 14 3 4 Distributed Control Another important use of the RS485 port will be to connect a Fx2424 to other F series M series H series or E10 PLCs One Fx2424 will act as the master and all other PLCs will act as slaves Each PLC must be given a unique ID The master will send commands to all t
133. cursor or no cursor as well as display shift mode You have to refer to the LCD manufacturer s data sheet for the detailed commands Some of the most useful commands are listed below Actin S Command Clear screen SETLCD 0 1 CHR 1 No cursor SETLCD 0 1 CHR 12 Underline Cursor SETLCD 0 1 CHR 4 Blinking Cursor SETLCD 0 1 CHR 5 Underline Blinking SETLCD 0 1 CHR Cursor 13 3 Displaying Numeric Variable With Multiple Digits The SETLCD y x string command only overwrites the exact number of characters in the string parameter to the LCD display and thereafter the cursor is placed back to the location specified by the x and y parameters Thus if there exists some old characters right after the last character it can cause confusion especially if you are displaying a number E g If you first display the following string at row 1 and column 1 Pressure 12345 And if you subsequently display the string Pressure 983 at the same location without first clearing the line then you will see the following string being displayed r Tri eee 13 1 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 13 LCD Display Programming Pressure 98345 What happens is that the string Pressure 983 is correctly displayed but the two old characters 45 left over from previous display would appear to be part of the new data This can cause confusion There are several ways you can eliminate such a display problem 1 Clea
134. custom function where the date is set to October 17 2008 the day of the week is Wednesday and the time is 14 30 01 2 30 01 pm K Custom Function 1 SET_RTC Year Month Day Day of Week 1 Hour Minute 1 Second Figure 12 2 Set Date amp Time in TBASIC TR RESEARCH 12 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 12 Real Time Clock 12 6 Setting the RTC from Internet Time Server Please refer to Section 2 6 for more detailed information on how your PLC may be able to automatically set its own real time clock using the timeserver data available on the Internet A sample program is also included in that section 12 7 Setting up an Alarm Event in TBASIC Since to the TBASIC program the RTC data are simply integer arrays DATE 1 to DATE 4 and TIME 1 to TIME 3 they are fully accessible at any time by your PLC program Therefore if you want your program to execute a certain routine on a specific date and or time you would need to periodically check these variables against the desired settings and activate the action when the RTC variable s reach the set value Example Setup a1 minute clock pulse to monitor the RTC as follows Clk dmin CheckClock dCusF Lsd Custom Function 1 CheckClock So turn on LAMP at 6pm every day except Sunday IF TIME 1 18 AND TIME 2 gt 0 AND DATE 4 lt gt 7 THEN SETIO LAMP ENDIF turn OFF LAMP off at 11 30pm every day IF TIME 1 23 AND TIME 2 gt 30 THEN CLRIO LA
135. d 200 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 103 Moving Backwards STEPMOVE 1 500 101 channel 1 would send 500 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 101 STEPMOVE 2 750 102 channel 2 would send 750 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 102 STEPMOVE 3 200 103 channel 3 would send 200 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 103 TR RESEARCH 10 6 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control 10 4 5 2 Example PLC as a Full Step Motor Driver Moving Forwards STEPMOVE 11 8000 101 channel 1 would send 8000 pulses to a motor and then turn on relay 101 STEPMOVE 12 50 102 channel 2 would send 50 pulses to a motor and then turn on relay 102 STEPMOVE 13 900 103 channel 3 would send 900 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 103 Moving Backwards STEPMOVE 11 300 101 channel 1 would send 300 pulses to a motor and then turn on relay 101 STEPMOVE 12 1000 102 channel 2 would send 1000 pulses to a motor and then turn on relay 102 STEPMOVE 13 7500 103 channel 3 would send 7500 pulses to a motor and then turn on relay 103 10 4 5 3 Example PLC as a Half Step Motor Driver Moving Forwards STEPMOVE 21 8000 101 channel 1 to send 8000 forward pulses to motor and turn on relay 101 STEPMOVE 22 50 102 channel 2 to send 50 forward pulses to a motor and turn on relay 102 STEPMOVE 23 900 103 channel 3 to send 900 forward pulses to motor and
136. d Communication Formats Use of the SETBAUD Statement 14 3 14 5 Support of Multiple Communication Protocols ccsccsceeenseeseerseeesseeeseerseeeseeessnensnees 14 5 14 6 Accessing the COMM Ports from within TBASIC sccccssessseesteeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeenseeeeeeeees 14 6 14 7 Using The PLC As a Modbus Omron Slave SCADA HMI Applications 14 8 14 7 1 MODBUS ASCII Protocol Support eseeseeeeeesresresiesiesietintrissrinstnnsrnnstnnnrnnnnnnene ne 14 8 14 7 1 1 BIT ADDRESS MAPPING 14 10 14 7 1 2 WORD ADDRESS MAPPING 14 11 14 7 2 MODBUS RTU Protocol Support 14 11 14 7 3 OMRON Host Link Command Gupport esseseseeeseeeeesiesrissississinsrnssrissrinsrensrnn 14 11 14 7 4 Application Example Interfacing to SCADA Goitware 14 12 14 8 Using The PLC As a Modbus Master Getting Data From Power or Flow Meters14 13 14 8 1 Fx2424 PLC As MODBUS RTU Master 14 13 14 9 Using Modem to Remotely Program Monitor The PLC ssccsseessesseseseeeeeseeenenees 14 14 os TRIANGLE S Lied RESEARCH Page vii INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 14 9 1 WING BEE 14 14 14 9 2 leet ul TTT 14 14 15 HOST LINK PROTOCOL INTRODUCTION 15 1 15 1 Multiple Communication Protocols cc ccccessseceeeeseeeeeenseeneeenseaeeeenseaeeeenseaneeenseaeeeeenees 15 1 15 2 Native Mode Communication Protocolls ccccceenccesseeesesesceneeseseeeeeseseeeeeseseneessecenees 15 1 15 3 Point To Point Communication Format
137. d out MODBUS ASCII or RTU commands to access any other F series FMD or Nano 10 PLCs or any third party MODBUS slave devices The READMODBUS or READMB2 commands use MODBUS Function 03 this can be changed to function 04 using SETSYSTEM 6 4 command to read from the slave and WRITEMODBUS or WRITEMB2 use MODBUS Function 16 to write to the slave Note that when using the READMODBUS or WRITEMODBUS commands the 40001 address stated in Table 14 1 should be interpreted as address 0000 and 40002 as address 0001 and 41001 as address 1000 etc This is in accordance with the specifications stated in MODBUS protocol MODICON defined zero offset addresses for the MODBUS protocol yet in their holding register definition these are supposed to start from address 40001 hence the unusual correspondence But to maintain compatibility with the MODBUS specifications we have to adhere to their definitions 14 8 1 Fx2424 PLC As MODBUS RTU Master The Fx2424 PLC can also act as a MODBUS RTU master The same READMODBUS and WRITEMOBUS commands can be used to send and receive MODBUS RTU commands What you need to do is add 10 decimal to the COMM port number to signal to the processor that you wish to use MODBUS RTU instead of MODBUS ASCII to talk to the slaves In other words you should specify port 11 to use RTU commands on COMM1 and specify port 13 to use RTU commands on COMMS E g the statement DM 10 READMODBUS 13 8 16 will access via COMMS the s
138. d text box as shown in the following diagram Add user account Please enter the name of the user account that should be added PLC User should be member of the following group 8 Next click Shared folders page and you must setup a folder that is to be used to receive uploaded file Click Add at the Directories pane to add the folder You can choose any folder on your PC to be used for the FTP upload and you just have to remember the location so that you can look for the uploaded file later in the test However make sure that you check all the check boxes for Read Write Append etc as shown in the diagram TR RESEARCH 20 8 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System Page Shared folders Files Directories Aliases F Read mii on Deh Speed Limits He Ries M Write IP Filter M Delete V Append General Directores V Create V Delete M List Add Remove Rename Set as home dir A directory alias will also appear at the specified location Aliases must contain the full local path Separate multiple aliases for one directory with the pipe character 1 f using aliases please avoid cyclic directory structures it will only confuse FTP clients 9 Click OK to complete the setup The FTP server should now be waiting for connection 20 5 2 Testing Connection To The FTP Server Using Telnet You can now test the FTP Server using
139. device is ready for operation so that the modem can work properly A modem may also be connected to COMM2 or COMMS for multi drop remote programming and monitoring using TRiLOGI 6 or 7 software However you will need to purchase an auto turnaround type RS232 to RS485 converter such as the Auto485 hittp www tri plc com auto485 htm 14 9 2 Programming Please refer to the Internet i TRILOGI version Programmers Reference guide Chapter 3 Tor programming details for the PLC to communicate with the PC via modem i RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TR TRIANGLE 14 14 Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol j CA v TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol 15 HOST LINK PROTOCOL INTRODUCTION While a Fx2424 is running it may receive ASCII string commands that read or write to its inputs outputs relays timers counters and all the internal variables from a host computer or another F series FMD or Nano 10 PLC These ASCII commands are known as the Host link commands and are to be serially transmitted via RS232C or RS485 port to and from the controller The default serial port settings of the Fx2424 for host link communication are 38400 baud 8 data bit 1 stop bit no parity The baud rate and the communication format may be changed using the SetBAUD TBASIC command described in the i TRILOGI Programmer s Reference 15
140. ding on the number of parameters the statement or function has The program memory can be erased and reprogrammed more than one hundred thousand times which is a limit that you are unlikely to ever reach 1 7 2 Non Volatile FRAM Memory Users of the M Series PLCs T100MD and T100MX PLCs may be familiar with the PLCs EEPROM memory as well as some of its limitations The Fx2424 PLC does not use the EEPROM memory anymore Instead the Fx2424 employs 6K words of a new high tech memory product called Ferromagnetic RAM FRAM FRAM is non volatile memory just like the EEPROM that it replaced yet unlike the EEPROM which can only be erased and reprogrammed a limited number of times FRAM has no practical limit on how often it can be overwritten In fact since they are really RAM memory in nature there is no erase and program time penalty and you can read and write to them at full speed Also unlike the case of T100M EEPROM accessing the FRAM frequently would not have any adverse effect on serial communications Since the FRAM are in fact a replacement of the EEPROM data memory you can use the same TBASIC commands LOAD_EEP LOAD_EEP SAVE_EEP and SAVE_EEP in TRILOGI version 6 or 7 to read and write to the FRAM memory Just take note that FRAM has all the advantages of EEPROM but none of its disadvantages 1 7 3 Volatile Data Memory All the TBASIC variables used in the Fx2424 PLC A to Z A to Z FP 1 to FP 10
141. dress ERR 05 Prev Conn ON Another NS command has been executed and left the client socket opened but did not execute the PRINT 4 lt gt to close the client socket ERR 04 Not Connected Failed to connect to the targeted server STATUS 3 This TBASIC function returns 1 if connected or 0 if connection fails Description Once a connection is made you can then interact with the remote server using the PRINT 4 and INPUT 4 command You use the INPUT 4 command to read CR terminated text strings sent by the server You can also send data to the remote server using the PRINT 4 command Example Please refer to the fnTCPconn1 custom function in the demo program TestEthernet PC6 to see an example of how the PLC can connect to an NIST timer server and use the returned data to update the PLC s real time clock Note Some NIST time servers have strict policy against abuse so you should avoid sending repeated request within a short period of time otherwise further connections may be denied once you are considered to have violated their connection policy Tat RESEARCH 2 28 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 7 Web Service Accessing PLC s data from MS Excel The FServer provides an extremely useful feature called Web Service You can actually use your web browser to access the Fx2424 internal data by specifying the following URL lt IP Address portno of FServe
142. e 14 1 whether it is MODBUS function 01 02 or 05 However 32 bit variables and string variables are not mapped since they are fundamentally quite different in their implementation among different PLCs Internal variables that are not mapped can be still be accessed by copying the contents of these variables to unused data memory DM n this can be easily accomplished within a CusFn so that they can be accessed by these third party protocols 14 7 1 MODBUS ASCII Protocol Support The Fx2424 support MODBUS ASCII protocols with the following command and response format START LRC Check CRLF chars 2chars oe chars chars The following Function Codes are supported 06 Preset Single Word Register _ O Preset Multiple Word Registers The exact command response format of the MODBUS protocol can be found at http www modbus org However if your only purpose is to interface the PLC to other MODBUS hosts such as an LCD touch panel or SCADA software then there is no need to know the underlying protocol command format All you need to know is which PLC s system Variable is mapped to which MODBUS register as shown in Table 12 1 r TR RESEARCH 14 8 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications Table 14 1 PLC I O amp Variable to Modbus Address Mapping Fx2424 VO MODBUS Holding Register MODBUS Bit Addr Modicon Convention Input om NT 1 to 16 40001 1 to 40001 16 11016 oupi n O di en moe NSS
143. e Personal Area Network PAN After a transparent connection has been established A PC will be able to connect to any Fx PLC via ZigBee or any two Fx PLCs will be able to communicate with each other wirelessly using the same NETCMD READMODBUS and WRITEMODBUS commands as if they have been connected by physical wires 19 3 1 Connecting to Fx2424 Using XBEE 64 bit Addressing 1 Use the X CTU software and the USB RS232 interface board provided in the XBEE Development Kits to configure one XBEE module as ZIGBEE Coordinator AT e g firmware version 2041 and another one or more XBEE module as ZIGBEE Router AT e g firmware version 2241 Follow the procedure outlined in the XBEE user s manual to setup a ZigBee PAN Personal Area Network When setup properly the Coordinator will blink its red LED once every second while the Routers will be blinking their red LED twice a second The red LED on the interface board is the Associate LED that is used to indicate that a router or end device has successfully joined a PAN 2 With the X CTU Terminal connected to the Coordinator enter command mode by entering and the Coordinator should return OK then quickly enter ATND followed by a carriage return After a while the XBEE coordinator will return the 64 bit serial numbers of the devices are that joined to it In our example shown on the right the two devices are 0013A200 400A6364 and 0013A200 403E0279 Note
144. e baud rate is not affected by a software RESET but the settings will be lost when the power is turned OFF The available baud rates and their corresponding baud rate numbers for COMM1 2 and 3 are shown below Format baudno 0001 00 0101 xxxx 0000 xxxx T 0100 xxxx 1 1 1 Where xxxx a the baud rate of the comm port as follow 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1001 xxxx 1101 xxxx o 1111 xxxx e n e xxxx 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Baud Rate 100K 115 2K_ 230 4K 110 150 300 600 1200 A table of all the available baud rates and COMM formats is shown in the following page The communication format written as 7 2 e which means 7 data bits 2 stop bits and even parity Likewise 8 1 n means 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity You can use the table to select the baud number for a certain baud rate and COMM format Baud No Table All numbers in Hexadecimal amp H00 to amp HFF aT an ate ato zan 71e 210 aan ape Lee 2n 5B 7B 1D 600 JE N 0B 4B 6B 8B CB EB oB 78 o Toe TF oc sc 1 6c 86 CC Ec 5C 7C 9C DC F 0D 4D 6D 8D CD ED 5D 7D 9D DD F oe f 4e ee Be ce EE 5E 7E 9E DE F DE 4F 6F Let CF EF iF SF 7F OF DF F 2000 191 41 61 81 Ci Et 11 51 71 91 D1 F 4800 02 42 62 82 C2 E2 12 52 72 92 D2 F 9600 03 4
145. e multiple DM locations in a single command 16 48 1 Read IR Registers This command refers to Table 14 1 in Chapter 14 to map the PLC s I Os to OMRON IR register space from IRO to IR519 m Tri eee 16 20 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Command Format jafjajR R njnjnj nje lcefeclc beem Eg Device ID Header IR Address Dec IR count Hex a FCS Response Format a a R R s Is te 16 16 16 Nom Ny ee Ne ee Device ID Header Status 17 Data Hex 00 OK 15 Bad 16 a ae ain st Last data FCS E g To read Timer PV 1 to 7 using this command send 01RRO12800074D The PLC will send return a response 01RROOxxxxyyyyzzzZ 16 48 2 WRITE IR Registers This command refers to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 to map the PLC s I Os to OMRON IR register space from IROOO to IR519 Command Format f d a w R n n tn n 16 16 16 16 Fe Device ID Header IR Start Addr Dec 1 data 16 a Last data FCS Response Format yo Device ID Header Status FCS 00 OK E g To Write to CtrPV 1 to 2 using this command send 01WR0256xxxxyyyyff ma V TRIANGLE 16 21 Do RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format where xxxx and yyyy are the hex values to be written to CtrPV 1 amp 2 16 48 3 Read Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 Command Format jajajRrRj o n
146. e multiple counts if the rotor shaft jiggles at the transition edge of the phase resulting in multiple triggering of the counter This simplistic implementation however does have the advantage that the HSC can also be used for single phase high speed counting For the Fx2424 an enhanced quadrature decoding routine is provided which will lock out multiple counting by examining the co relationship between the two phases You can configure the Fx2424 to use the enhanced quadrature counting by using the SETSYSTEM command as follows SETSYTEM 4 n The value of n at bit 0 1 and 2 respectively defines if the HSC channel 1 2 and 3 is to run in Simple when the bit is 0 or Enhanced when the bit is 1 mode As such N bit 2 1 0 HSC 3 HSC 2 HSC 1 Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Enhanced Simple Enhanced Simple Simple Enhanced _Enhanced Enhanced Simple J Simple Enhanced Simple Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Simple Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced 7 3 Interfacing to 5V type Quadrature Encoder If you have a choice you should select an encoder that can produce 12V or 24V output pulses so that they can drive the inputs 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 directly If you have a 5V type of encoder only then you need to add a transistor driver to interface to the PLC s inputs The simplest way is to use an IC driver ULN2003 connected as shown in Figure 7 2 ULN2003A Input
147. e therefore of a simpler format as shown below I Tri eee 15 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol 15 3 1 Command Response Frame Format Point to Point Header Data Terminator Each command frame starts with a two byte ASCII character header followed by a number of ASCII data and ends with a terminator which is comprised of a iv character and a carriage return ASCII value 13 The header denotes the purpose of the command For example RI for Read Input WO for Write Output etc The data is usually the hexadecimal representation of numeric data Each byte of binary data is represented by two ASCII characters 00 to FF To begin a communication session the host computer must first send one byte of ASCII character Ctrl E 05Hex via its serial port to the controller This informs the controller that the host computer wishes to send a point to point host link command to it Thereafter the host computer must wait to receive an echo of the Ctrl E character from the controller Reception of the echoed Ctrl E character indicates that the controller is ready to respond to the command from the host computer At this moment the host computer must immediately send the command frame to the controller and then wait to receive the response frame from the controller The entire communication session is depicted in Figure 15 1 After the controller has received the command it will send a response frame
148. e to access index 01 to 1F index into the array starting from 01 Response Format E g To set clk 1 which represents the hour of the RTC to 14 send the command wVS0801000E to the PLC 16 38Write Variable High Speed Counter HSCPV Command Format ee 8 Hexadecimal Digit for 32 bit integer Response Format E g To clear the value of HSCPV 2 send hostlink command wVH200000000 Ca TRIANGLE 16 16 URA RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 39Halting the PLC Command Format When the PLC receives this command it temporarily halts the execution of the PLC s ladder program after the current scan However the PLC continues to scan the I Os and processes host link commands sent to it and will report the current I O data and internal variables to the host computer 16 40 Resume PLC Operation Command Format Response Format When the PLC receives this command it will resume execution of the ladder program if it had been halted previously by the C2 command Otherwise this command has no effect B B g 16 41 Read Analog Input This command forces the PLC to refresh the value of its ADC data at the analog channel before returning its value in the response string i e no need for the PLC to execute ADC n function to refresh the analog input Command Format PR AtTn t ate tec o kemmer kee Starting Analog Channel count Channel 01
149. e using the View Variables window TR RESEARCH 16 23 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 50Visual Basic Sample Program To help users get started writing their own Visual Basic program to communicate with the PLC we have created a sample Visual Basic program with full source code listing Please visit the following web page to download the visual basic sample program http www tri plc com applications VBsample htm 16 51Inter PLC Networking Using NETCMD Command All Fx PLCs are able to send out host link commands to other Fx PLCs M series or H series PLCs using the built in TBASIC function NETCMD This function accepts host link commands in multi point format and automatically computes the Frame Check Sequence FCS characters appends them to the command string and sends out the whole command string together with the terminators The function then waits for a response string and checks the integrity of the received response string for errors This function returns a string only if a proper response string has been received Please refer to the TBASIC Reference for a detailed explanation of this command The NETCMD function therefore greatly simplifies the programming tasks for handling networking between PLCs The programmer only needs to construct the correct command string according to the formats described in this chapter pass the formatted string to the NETCMDS function and th
150. ead Digital Input Chantnels cccccssecceseesseeseeeeeeeeeeeesneeseseeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeenseeeeeseseneeneneeeeees 16 1 16 3 1 Definition of Input Channels ccccceceeeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeesnaeeeseaeeseaes 16 2 16 4 Read Digital Output Channels ccccsecceseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneseseeeeseeeseeeseseaeenseeeesneeesseseneenenes 16 2 16 5 Read Internal Relay Channels ccseccesecesseeceseeeeeseeeeeceseseeeeseeeseeeseseaeenseeeeeseeessaeseseenenes 16 3 16 5 1 Definition of Internal Relay Channel Numbers c ccceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesecaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeas 16 3 16 6 Read Timer Contacts eseu 16 3 16 6 1 Definition of Timer Contact Channel Numbers s ssssssssssssnnssennnnsnrnnsennnnnnrnnnnnrnn nnne nn n 16 4 16 7 Read Counter Contacts cccccecccccceeeeeesceeeesesceeeeeseseeesesnseeeeeseseeeeeseeceeseseeceeseseeceneenssssenens 16 4 16 7 1 Definition of Counter Contact Channel Number 16 4 16 8 Read Timer Present Value P V cccseccecssceecesesecceeesesceeeeseseeeseseseeeseseseeeeenseseensnseeanes 16 4 16 9 Read Timer Set Value take eege enee edd 16 5 16 10 Read Counter Present Value P V ccccsseeceeeseeneeseseeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeseseseeeseeneseeeseseeeenes 16 5 16 11 Read Counter Set Value S V aiicciiscisccstieecccccnseevevtaceecevbaceneevbautecccaneevevaantosuevbauttescansedecs 16 5 16 12 Read Variable Integers A tO Z ccsecceceseeeeeees
151. ect the LCD module to the Fx2424 LCD port using a 14 way IDC ribbon cable and header Make sure that the pin number on the PLC matches that of the LCD module Wrong cable connections can destroy the LCD port or LCD module There are quite a number of 14 pin LCD modules available on the market with many different display sizes or character formats to choose from e g 1x8 1x16 1x20 2x16 2x20 1x40 2x40 and 4x20 Triangle Research International TRi currently supplies two models of backlit LCD display modules for use with the Fx2424 PLC Each model is supplied with a 0 5m long 14 pin ribbon cable for connection to the PLC s LCD port The LCD216 is a 2 line x 16 characters per line module and the LCD420 is a 4 line x 20 characters per line module For more electrical and mechanical information on these two LCD models please visit our website at http www tri plc com Icd htm The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted using the preset potentiometer VR1 marked with the word contrast just below the LCD connector If you find that the LCD display is too dark or too dim please adjust VR1 with a small screwdriver to obtain the preferred contrast from the regular viewing angle 1 6 1 Wiring Instruction of LCD216 and LCD420 Backlight To use the LCD simply plug the 14 pin connector into the LCD port header making sure that pin 1 the colored wire of the ribbon cable aligns with pin 1 of the port header Pin 1 is the pin with a square s
152. ecution of the SETPROTOCOL command Also remember that when the PLC is reset this way its COMM1 will power up at default format of 38 400 8 n 1 only so you will need to configure TLServer s serial port to 38 400bps to communicate with it 14 6 Accessing the COMM Ports from within TBASIC Besides responding automatically to specific communication protocols described in section 14 5 all three serial ports COMM 1 2 and 3 are fully accessible by the user program using the TBASIC commands INPUT INCOMM PRINT and OUTCOMM It is necessary to understand how these commands interact with the operating system as follow When a COMM port receives serial data the operating system of the Fx2424 automatically stores them into a 256 bytes circular buffer so that user programs can retrieve them later The serial data are buffered even if they are incoming commands of one of the supported protocols described in section 14 5 In addition processing of a recognized protocol command does not remove the characters from the serial buffer queue so these data are still visible to the user s program Each COMM port has its own separate 256 byte serial in buffer As long as the user program retrieves the data before the 256 byte buffer is filled up no data will be lost If more than 256 bytes have been stored the buffer wraps around and the oldest data is overwritten first and so on The following describes how INCOMM and INPUT PRINT and OUTCOMM funct
153. eeeeaaesseaeeseeeeesaeeneaaeeees 2 45 3 PROGRAMMING I O AND INTERNAL RELAYS 3 1 3 1 ge E e TE 3 1 3 2 Programming DIO with Ladder LOGIC csssccsseceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeseneeeseaesesenenes 3 1 32 1 For PRYySiGal O iets ccccssatescavenaescaviesoscuauansasdsnshgoaccusaenchvesdnadenakh op ES Ed isiesacedstezseraatengecers 3 1 3 2 2 For Internal Relays Non Latching esseesseesssessesssnsssnnssnnnsnnstntnsnnssnnssnnnsnnnsrnnsrnnnnnsrnsnnnn 3 1 3 2 3 For Internal Relays LL atchimg 3 1 3 2 4 Programming EXA Mpe Sereia aaa araa dues aster sabes DEER 3 1 3 2 4 1 Example 1 Editing Label Names 3 1 3 2 4 2 Example 2 Creating a Simple Ladder Logic Creunt 3 2 3 2 4 3 Example 3 Creating a Latching Relay Cireun 3 2 3 3 Programming DIO in a Custom Function ssssssssnsuunsnunnunnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnn nn 3 2 3 3 1 Editing Ee Na 3 3 3 3 2 Controlling I O from Custom Functions cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeetaeeneaaeeee 3 3 3 3 3 Example 1 Turn on off an Output 3 4 3 3 4 Example 2 Toggle an Output 3 4 o_O TRIANGLE i URA RESEARCH Page iv INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 3 3 5 Example 3 Test the Status of an Output 3 4 4 TIMERS COUNTERS AND SEQUENCERS 4 1 4 1 lge E d E 4 1 AAt imer EE 4 1 44 2 Counter e EE 4 1 E E Ee 4 1 4 2 Programming timers and counters On Ladder LOGIC csecceeseeeseeeeene
154. eeeeceeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeneeeeas 10 8 10 4 6 2 Example PLC as a Full Step Motor Driver 10 8 10 4 6 3 Example PLC as a Half Step Motor Driver 10 8 10 4 7 Demo Program for Stepper Motor Control 10 8 11 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED OUTPUTS 11 1 11 1 Juge e CUO EE 11 1 11 2 FX2424 PEC PWM Kefir CC 11 1 11 3 Increasing Output Drive Current Opto lSolated ccccccsesceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeees 11 2 CA TRIANGLE Lied RESEARCH Page vi INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 11 4 Position Control Of RC Servo Motor cccsceceseesseeeeseeeeeeeeesseaeseseeeeeeeeeseeseseaeeneeeeeseeees 11 3 11 4 1 Using Fx2424 PWM Output To Control RC Servo Non Isolated c ceeseeeeeeee 11 4 11 4 2 Using Fx2424 PWM Output To Control RC Servo Opto lsolated c eee 11 5 11 4 3 RC Servo Positioning Hesolution 11 5 12 REAL TIME CLOCK 12 1 12 1 Intro HEH ee EE 12 1 12 2 TBASIC variables Used for Real Time ClOCK ccseccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeenseeeeeeeeess 12 1 12 3 RTC Error Status On Ladder LOGIC 0 cccccssccsseeeeeseeeeeseeeesneeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseseeeseeeeesseseseenenss 12 1 12 4 Setting the RTC Using TRILOGI Software ccccsseceseseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeseeeeseens 12 2 12 5 Setting the RTC Using TBASIC eeeseEERREEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEREREEEREEEEER Nun 12 2 12 6 Setting the RTC from Internet Time Server ccsecccesccesseeeeeeeeseeee
155. eeeeeneneeeeesnseeeensesceeseseeceeseseseenenseeeenenss 16 7 16 13 Read Variable Strings A to Z sssccsssscssssesseeeesseeeeseeecseesesneeeenseeesseseseaesnseeeesseeess 16 7 16 14 Read Variable Floating Point A to Z c ccccceseeeeesesceeeeesesceeeeseseeeensesenenseeenenss 16 7 Cat TRIANGLE Ge Lied RESEARCH Page viii INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 16 15 Read Variable Single Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 ecssseeeressseeees 16 8 16 16 Read Variable Multiple Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 cssseenessesceees 16 8 16 17 Read Variable Single Floating Point Array FP 1 to FP 1000 sscessseeeees 16 9 16 18 Read Variable Multiple Floating Point Data FP 1 to FP 1000 essssee 16 9 16 19 Read Variable System Variables cccseccsesceesseeeeseeeeeeneeeseaeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaseeeenseeeeeeeaeas 16 9 16 20 Read Variable High Speed Counter HSCPV J cssseccesecesseeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeseneeeenseeeeesees 16 10 16 21 WIG INU secon sce Secs EE EE ee 16 11 16 22 NEMEI ee 16 11 16 23 Write Relays deeg eege 16 11 16 24 Write Timer COntact ccceceeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeenneeeeeenseeeeeegseeeeeenseeeeeseseneeeeenseenenenseeeenens 16 11 16 25 Write Counter Contacts cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeesneeeneeeeeeeeesnaeenseeeeeeeeesaesasaeeenseeesscesaseeneneeeeees 16 12 16 26 Write Timer Present Value P V c
156. eeeeeseeeseeeeesneeeees 4 2 AQAA For WUMGRS EE 4 2 4 2 2 FOR COUMEIS occ cos cate ccssc ccs cesats ecczapeceseceudacesteted scezancneedunetneceapeetecdudeg tiesesehdedecueteduasteneacc duteeds 4 2 4 2 3 Example 1 Creating a Simple Timer Circuit in Ladder Logic cctceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 2 4 Example 2 Creating a Simple Counter Circuit in Ladder Loge 4 3 4 3 Programming timers and counters in Custom FUNCTION s cceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeseneeeeeeeeeneae 4 4 4 3 1 Timers and Counters Present Values cccccescccesseseeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeesssesaeensensaeess 4 4 4 3 2 Inputs Outputs Relays Timers and Counters Contacts 4 4 4 3 3 Changing The Timer and Counter Set Values in a Custom Functon 4 4 4 3 4 Controlling a Timer or Counter in a CUSTOM Funclon nennen 4 4 4 4 Programming Sequencers on Ladder LOGIC cccseceseeceseeeeeeseeeseeesesneeenseeeseseeeaneeeenseeeees 4 5 AA NMOGUCHON EE 4 5 4 4 2 Advance Sequencer AVSCQ cccesceceeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeaeseeeeeseaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeetaeeneneeee 4 6 4 4 3 Resetting Sequencer TDHGesenl neern nesr nesrnesrnesrnsernsennsstnsttnnnnnennsennsennnennnenn 4 6 4 4 4 Setting Sequencer to Step N StepN 0 0 cece cece eeee eee eeceeee seas eeseeee scenes seaeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeee 4 6 4 4 5 Reversing a Geouencer ccceeccecesceeeeeee tees eeeaaeceeneeeeeeecaaeseeaaeedaeeeecaaeseeaaeseeeeseaeeteaaeseeneeee 4 6 4 46 Pro ram
157. efore you can receive the response data 2 We have provided a more complete Excel spreadsheet example ExcelQuery xls which can be downloaded from __http www tri plc com appnotes F series ExcelQuery xls The macro in this file converts the RIXX data it receives into ON OFF indicators on the Excel Spreadsheet cells Note that this spreadsheet file uses the HEX2DEC function that is not normally available when you first install the Excel program But you can add it in by installing the Analysis Toolpak Please search your Excel Help file for the specific method of adding in this toolpak as it may change from one version of Excel to another On Excel 2000 you can click on the Tools gt Add Ins check the Analysis Tookpak check box and then click OK MS Excel will automatically install the toolpak for you Tri Bass 2 30 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 8 Accessing The PLC from Internet 2 8 1 Small Local Area Network Using Consumer Grade Network Router When you connect a F series PLC to your home Ethernet router the PLC would have joined a private local area network LAN It is accessible through its private static IP address by other devices on the same LAN as long as each device is on the same subnet See section 2 1 for an explanation of subnet settings The PLC is also able to access the Internet through the router because the router would translate a private TCP IP packet sent fro
158. en check for the response string A Fx PLC may use the NETCMD to map the I O of another PLC into its internal relays and use the other PLC as its remote I O There are some programming examples in your TRILOGI TL6 usr samples folder that illustrate the use of NETCMD to map I Os of a slave PLC to the master Please study the two examples RemotelO Hseries PC6 and RemotelO Mseries PC6 carefully to understand the mechanism of mapping I Os between the PLCs The TRILOGI program REMOTE Hseries PC6 will work on the H series M series or F series PLCs as slaves whereas the program REMOTE Mseries PC 6 will only work with F series FMD or Nano 10 This is because the Fx PLC host link command set is a superset of the H series host link command set and this example uses the more efficient M series host link commands to read write 16 bit data for networking between M series PLCs An application note and example programs demonstrating how to use our other PLC models as slave remote I O for the F or M series PLC can be found at the following web page http www tri plc com appnotes AppnoteMain htm 16 52Inter PLC Networking Using MODBUS Protocols The PLCs may also pass data to each other using special MODBUS commands which are even simpler to use than NETCMD but are restricted to accessing variables that are mapped into MODBUS address structure Please refer to the Section 14 7 and 14 8 as
159. eneeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeenseneesseseseenenseeeees 18 2 18 3 Zero crossing Detection cccceeeeececeeeee ee neeeee ee eeeeee ee neeeenseseeeeeseseseeeseseeneeseseeneeseseeneneneeeennens 18 3 18 4 Programming Light Dimmer Control 0 ccccsccssseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseaeenseeeseneeessneeenseeeees 18 3 18 4 1 Enable Zero Crossing Interrupt ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeesneeeeaeeseaes 18 3 18 4 2 Programming Individual Dimmer Channel 18 3 18 4 3 Programming Example c ccccsceceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeneeeceaeeeeaaeseeneecaeeesaaeseeaaesseeeeseaeeeeneeeseaes 18 4 19 ZIGBEE NETWORKING 19 2 UE E WW lee E Vu EE 19 2 19 2 Installation of the XBEE Module ccccceeesseeceseeeeeeeeeeseaeeesneeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeenseeeeeseeesnaeenseeneees 19 2 19 3 Using The XBEE s Transparent Mode ccsccsseeeeseeeeeseeeesneeeeeeeeseeeesnaeenseeeeeseeseseenenseeeees 19 3 19 3 1 Connecting to Fx2424 Using XBEE 64 bit Addreseing 19 3 19 3 2 Defining Node Identifier for XBEE Module 19 5 19 3 3 Wring TBASIC Program To Configure XBEE ssesssesesesssiessrsssrisrrennssnnnsrnnstnnsennsnnns 19 7 19 3 4 Practical Applications of XBEE Modules In Transparent Mode 19 7 19 4 Using The XBEE s API Mode sccsseceseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeeescaesnseeeenseeeseaesesnaeseeeeeessaesaseanenseaeees 19 8 20 EXTENDED FILE SYSTEM 20 2 20 1 InthOduCtiONsc22 ice che Reine ee hee ee eee 20 2 20 1 1 Advantage of Using Data
160. er can vary in size and cost Most stepper motor drivers have opto isolated inputs which accept a direction signal and stepping pulse signal from the Stepper Motor Controller In this case the Fx2424 is the Stepper Motor Controller which will supply the required pulse and direction select signals to the driver Note that the digital outputs 5 9 and 13 automatically become the direction select signals for the Stepper controller channels 1 2 and 3 respectively when the stepper controllers are being used The direction pin is turned ON when the motor moves in the negative direction and turned OFF when the stepper motor moves in the positive direction The STEPMOVEABS command makes it extremely simple TR RESEARCH 10 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control to position the motor at an absolute location while the STEPMOVE command lets you implement incremental moves in either direction for each channel 10 3 1 Interfacing to 5V Stepper Motor Driver Inputs Some stepper motor drivers accept only 5V signals from the stepper motor controller In such a case you need to determine whether the driver s inputs are opto isolated If they are then you can simply connect a 2 2K current limiting resistor in series with the path from the PLC s output to the driver s inputs as shown in Figure 10 4 Stepper Motor Driver Direction Select Input 12 24v DC F Series PLC Power OUTPUTS Calculation
161. er interface board remove the XBEE module and plug it into the Fx2424 s XBEE socket make sure power to PLC is turned OFF before doing this Turn on power to the Fx2424 and you should see the green Assoc LED located next to the lower left corner of the XBEE socket starting to blink twice a second This means that the XBEE module on the Fx2424 is connected to the PAN setup by the Coordinator TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TR 19 4 7 We will next attempt to use the TRILOGI software to connect to the PLC via the XBEE connections Remember that the XBEE module is physically connected to COMM2 of the Fx2424 PLC with the default serial baud rate of 38 400 8 1 n But the XBEE module s serial port is default to 9600 8 1 n so either one of them must change so that the XBEE module can talk to the PLC s COMM2 using the same serial settings You can change the PLC s baud rate by adding the statement SETBAUD 2 3 to initialize the PLC s COMM2 port to 9600 8 1 You need to transfer this program to the PLC using the regular program transfer method e g via Ethernet port or comm Port before our test 8 You should now click the Close Com Port button to close the COM Port at the X CTU and start up TLServer Click the Serial Port Setup button on TLServer and select the same COM port that X CTU uses to connect to the coordinator Set the serial port to 9600 8 n 1 Then enter the command 01IRO0
162. er of conflicting signals or garbled messages to handle Pros and Cons This method also does not incur any hardware cost but it requires the programmer to draw up a plan on what internal relay or variable to use as the token and how the PLC can relinquish its token to the token master It could be by fixed timing or by returning a message to relinquish the token It is a challenging job for programmers unfamiliar with networking schemes but with some experimentation it can be achieved readily 15 5 4 3 Rotating Master Signal In this scheme we make use of the digital inputs of the Fx PLCs to grant the PLC the right to act as the network master Lets call this input the Be the Master input We can use a low cost H series PLC running a sequencer to activate the Be the Master input line of each PLC one at a time Each PLC is given a fixed amount of time to be the master e g 0 1S each Only when the Be the Master input is ON can the Fx PLC start sending out host link commands to other PLCs So at any one time there will only be one master on the network and no conflict will occur as a result Pros and Cons This method is the easiest to program since there is no need to handle the token with the token master or perform extensive error check on the response string However this method uses one input of each PLC and as many outputs on the master signal generator PLC as there are PLC masters It also requires wiring the PLCs to the m
163. er which describes how to do it i RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TR TRIANGLE 920 11 Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 6 Uploading File From PLC to FileZilla FTP Server Directory 20 6 1 Overview of The FTP Protocol The FTP protocol requires two socket connections between the devices performing the file transfer One connection is the command channel where FTP commands such as STOR or DELE and the responses are sent as plain ASCII text strings between the FTP client and the FTP server The second connection is the data channel where only the file content or the file directory data are being transferred There are two transfer modes Active mode and Passive mode Active mode requires that the server establish a data connection back to the client Passive mode on the other hand requires that the client also be the one to establish the data connection i e For passive mode both the command and the data connections are performed by the client the PLC in this case The PLC has been designed to use only passive mode to transfer file to the FTP server Passive mode is preferred because that is the only way to transfer file if the FTP Server is located on the Internet The alternative active mode transfer requires the server to make a data connection back to the PLC that is sitting behind a router firewall and that can be problematic unless the router is specifically configured to forward the data port to the PLC
164. ery low cost and stable device that can be used to measure a wide range of ambient temperature from freezers to hot water boilers which are commonly used in HVAC applications In order to convert the resistance changes into voltage readings to be read by the PLC s analog input you can use it to form an arm of a voltage divider circuit which would present a variable voltage to the analog input when the temperature changes A type of thermistor that measures 10 0K ohm at 25 degree C simply called 10K thermistor is especially suitable for use with the Fx2424 PLC as illustrated below For ADC 1 to 4 you can use an external 20 K Ohm resistor to form the voltage divider with the 10K thermistor For ADC 5 to 8 it is even simpler because you can connect the 10K thermistor directly to the analog input since there is already an internal resistance of 20 00K ohm 0 1 accuracy A D 1 4 A D 5 8 TaN 10K Thermistor To 10K Thermistor Internal Connecting 10K Thermistor to ADC 1 4 Connecting 10K Thermistor to ADC 5 8 Figure 5 6 Note that since the thermistor resistance value vs temperature change is a non linear function you cannot simply use a formula to calculate the temperature from the voltage value For better accuracy you need to use a look up table plus a linear interpolation technique to determine the temperature based on the ADC readings The look up table and interpolation method can be implemented using TBASIC quite e
165. eseeeeeseeseneeeenseeeneas 16 16 16 39 Halting the Re 16 17 16 40 Resume PLC Operation oic ciccccsccccsceceticevesce aoaeiaa nanpa aana msi Ga aaaea aaia aaa aaia aaan 16 17 16 41 Read Analog INpuUt suissssiss ausies niiina dauana aiaei asiaa aaia aaiae 16 17 16 42 Read EEPROM Integer Data cccsccsseceseeceeeseeeesneeenseeeeeeeeesnaeseneeeenseeeeseeseseaeenseeeeeees 16 18 16 43 Read EEPROM String Data sccccssccsseeesseeeeeseeeeseeeenseeeeeeeeeseaesaseeeenseeeessaeseseaeenseeeenens 16 18 16 44 Write Analog OUtpUE E 16 18 16 45 Write EEPROM Integer Data sssnssunseunneunneunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnn nna 16 19 16 46 WRITE EEPROM String Data 2 2 2 cs ccesceeeceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeesneesneenaees 16 19 16 47 Force Set Clear Single UO Bit c cscccssecesseeeeeseeesseeeeseeeenseeeeseaeseseaeenseeeeeneeeseaeeaseanenees 16 20 16 48 Using OMRON Host Link Command ccccsecesteeceseeeeeeeeeeeneeseneeeenseeeeeeeeeneaeseseeneneees 16 20 16 48 1 Read IR Registi Sissin ananing daea dinaa iiia 16 20 16 48 2 WRITE IR Hegoieterg irnir nadaanan dirade ria aa 16 21 16 48 3 Read Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 seesseesseesseesseeeseessesssrsssnsennrsnnssnssnnnsennssenens 16 22 16 48 4 WRITE Data Memory DM 1 to DM 4000 ssnssssnssnnsneennennsnnsnnssrnnnnsrnsnnsnnssnnnnsrnnrnnsn 16 22 T o_O TRIANGLE j URA RESEARCH Page ix INTERNATIONAL USE
166. eseeeenseeeeeseeesneeeenseeeees 12 3 12 7 Setting up an Alarm Event in TBASIC 0 tccccscesesee este eeseeeeeeeeeseaeeesneeeeeeneeseeseneeesnseeeeeeneeas 12 3 K L BE 12 3 12 9 Troubleshooting the RUG a ciccccceeccesccsnecceseeecesnceersccnenceecercnesanseeeeccenenceraseseeeecessuncesaseseueneceue 12 4 13 LCD DISPLAY PROGRAMMING 13 1 13 1 SETLCOD Command enee EENS 13 1 13 2 Special Commands For LCD Display ccscccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseneseseaeenseeeeeeeeesseseseenenes 13 1 13 3 Displaying Numeric Variable With Multiple Digits ccsecesecssseeeeseeeeeseeseeeeesneeenes 13 1 13 4 Displaying Floating Point cccceeccecseceeeseeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeecaeseseeeneeeeseesseseeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeees 13 2 14 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 14 1 TAA Tee DE ON E 14 1 14 2 COMM1 RS232C Port with Female DBO Connector ccccsseceeseeeeeeeeeseeesesneenseeeeeeeeees 14 1 14 3 COMM2 COMMS Two wire RS485 Polt ccccsccsssesseeesseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeenseeeeseees 14 2 14 3 1 PROGRAMMING AND MONITORING sseessesseessesesseesseessisrrssrsnsenrtennsennnsennsrnnnrnnnsentnt 14 2 14 3 2 Accessing 3 Party RS485 based DeViCeS c scscccssssesesseseseesesteestestetsstesteesseteneessen 14 3 14 3 3 Interfacing Other Devices to Modbus Host or to the Internet cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 14 3 14 3 4 Distributed COMO suetan iaaiaee a aaa EE let EEE EE SAE ENER 14 3 14 4 Changing Baud Rate an
167. ess in its ARP cache ARP Address Resolution Protocol So when you power off one PLC and immediately plug another PLC with the same IP address to the network then Windows will pass to FileZilla the MACID of the PREVIOUS PLC instead of the new PLC using data in its ARP cache memory When FileZilla tries to connect to the right IP address but a wrong MACID it of course would not be able to connect properly In such a scenario you must clear the Windows ARP cache first using a command prompt as follow e Command Prompt Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2606 lt C Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings Owner gt arp d C Documents and Settings Owner gt _ The arp d command tells windows to delete its ARP cache data So when you use FileZilla to connect to a new PLC Windows will do the necessary to properly connect to the new PLC that has a different MACID from the previous PLC Note that the same issue applies to using I TRiLOGI to transfer program to multiple PLCs that are all set to the same default IP address even though only one PLC will be connected to the network at a time You will need to clear the ARP cache after every transfer to avoid problem Or else you have to wait for windows to expire its ARP cache data before connecting the next PLC ed Bass 2 38 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 10 Accessing and Customizing the HTML Web Interface for Control and Monitoring
168. etail or if the battery is not installed The special bit is called RTC Err and can be obtained from the Special Bits I O Table The RTC Err contact can be used r an V TRIANGLE 12 D RESEARCH LAS INTERNATIONAL Chapter 12 Real Time Clock to activate an alarm of some kind The following ladder logic circuit is an example of this using the RTC Err bit as an input that controls an output called RTC_Alarm RTE EI RTC_Alarm OUT In the circuit above RTC Err is a special bit that cannot be renamed in your program The output RTC_Alarm is a user defined output that could be named to anything If the RTC Error event occurs for any reason the HTC Err bit would activate the RTC_Alarm output 12 4 Setting the RTC Using TRILOGI Software The RTC date and time can be easily set within TRILOGI by selecting Set PLC s Real Time Clock from the Controller menu A window will pop up with default values entered as shown below in Figure 12 1 All of these values can be edited and then written to the PLC by clicking on Set PLC s Clock KE Set Target PLC s Real Time Clock Month Day Year 1 7day fo fz28 2008 D RER fe Hour Mi n Sec Set PLC s Clack Cancel Figure 12 1 Set Real Time Clock 12 5 Setting the RTC Using TBASIC The PLCs RTC can be set from TBASIC using the DATE and TIME registers shown in section 12 2 Figure 12 2 Set Date amp Time in TBASIC shown below is an example of a
169. etween the FTP client and the FTP server The second connection is the data channel where only the file content or the file directory data are being transferred TRI RESEARCH 20 15 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System There are two transfer modes Active mode and Passive mode Active mode requires that the server establish a data connection back to the client Passive mode on the other hand requires that the client also be the one to establish the data connection i e For passive mode both the command and the data connections are performed by the client the PLC in this case The PLC has been designed to use only passive mode to transfer file to the FTP server Passive mode is preferred because that is the only way to transfer file if the FTP Server is located on the Internet The alternative active mode transfer requires the server to make a data connection back to the PLC that is sitting behind a router firewall and that can be problematic unless the router is specifically configured to forward the data port to the PLC 20 8 2 PLC FTP Upload Procedure In order to upload file to the FTP Server the PLC would use the PRINT 4 lt TCPConnect XXX XXX XXX XXX 21 gt command tag to connect to the FTP server port 21 to establish the command connection to the FTP Server The PLC uses its PRINT 4 to send and INPUT 4 to receive ASCII text strings from the FTP server via the command channel The PLC w
170. experienced with JavaScript and would like to expand on the interface between the Fx PLC and the html files Note that we do not support customizing the M JS file if you choose to do so 2 10 1 Accessing the HTML Files from a Standard Browser In order to access the web pages stored in the Fx PLC you will need to open your web browser and enter the IP address and port number of the PLC s FServer in the address bar You also need to append the filename of the web page to the end of the address All this should be done in the following format IP Port Filename For example if the IP address of the FServer is 192 168 1 5 and the port number is 9080 these are the default values then you should enter the following in the address bar in order to access the 2 HTM file http 192 168 1 5 9080 2 HTM If you want to access the O HTM then you can change the filename in the address or you can remove the filename so that only the IP Port are in the address bar This will work only for the O HTM file because it is loaded by default when no other filenames are specified If you have removed O HTM from the Fserver then you will always have to specify the filename of the web page you want to access This is what the default web pages will look like when they are loaded into your browser i o ae y TRIANGLE 2 39 GON Ir RESEARCH Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 0 HTM a o 2 HTM O Continuous Update E Conti
171. f 8 or 16 bits organized into channels Command Format PWtb n tn n n x x o a NT UO Bit address 00 Clear I O bit OFF Hex FF SET I O bit ON Response Format wtb IO IO Type Bit address nnnn Hex Input 1 to 256 0000 to OOFF Output 1 to 256 0100 to 01FF Timer 1 to 256 0200 to 02FF Counter 1 to 256 0300 to O3FF Relay 1 to 256 0400 to 04FF Relay 257 to 512 0500 to O5FF E g To force output 1 to ON send wb0100FF To turn it OFF send wb010000 16 48Using OMRON Host Link Commands Since the PLCs also support OMRON C20H Host Link commands which are very similar in construct to our multi point command response format you can also make use of OMRON commands to supplement the native host link commands We will only discuss four of the OMRON host link commands RR WR RD and WD in this section because these commands can be used by users to read write to multiple I O registers and data memory in a single command Note maximum length of command string should be lt 80 characters Note Fx PLC native protocol command set now includes reading and writing of multiple DM and FP that are not available on F2424 F1616 BA FMD and Nano 10 PLCs To maintain backward compatibility with FMD and Nano 10 PLCs that only support read write of single DM there is no FP in these PLCs these OMFRON host link commands may be used to read writ
172. f digital inputs 1 to 6 and 9 to 12 can be defined as interrupt inputs using the INTRDEF statement The Interrupt inputs may also be defined as either rising edge triggered input goes from OFF to ON or falling edge triggered input goes from ON to OFF When the defined edges occur the defined CusFn will be immediately executed irrespective of the current state of execution of the ladder program A simple interrupt test function is as follow i FE TRILOGI Version 6 14 DA TESTINTRDEF PC6 Lea ll tzend File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Circuit 1 QAQA Meine quick tags 1st Scan dCusF ES Custom Function 1 fnINTRDEF INTRDEF ERR Define input 9 as interrupt and Custom Fn 10 to service it Custom Function 10 A Atl Variable A will be incremented on every rising edge sensed on Input 9 Note Since inputs 1 to 6 can also be used as other special inputs such as High Speed Counter HSC inputs and or Pulse Measurement PM as described in Chapter 6 7 and 8 if these inputs are defined as interrupts using the INTRDEF statement then they will lose their other special function l e they can only be defined either as a HSC PM or as an interrupt input and not both Inputs 9 to 12 on the other hand fe o TRIANGLE IRA RESEARCH al INTERNATIONAL Chapter 9 Interrupts are not shared with other special functions Hence these can be used eithe
173. facing to Limit Switch and NPN Sensor 1 5 Digital Output Circuits 1 5 1 Electrical Specifications Output 1 to 4 Output 5 to 16 Output 17 to 24 Output Driver type NPN Darlington N Channel power MOSFET N Channel power M with low er 0 05 Q MOSFET array Maximum Breakdown Co ET Continuous Output Current 350MmA 250MA Output Voltage when OFF Resistor pulled up to 24V power rail Output Voltage when ON 1 2V 1A 0 2V 4A 0 2V OR Inductive Back EMF Bypass Yes Yes Built in diode Intrinsic Zener Intrinsic Zener All outputs have red colored LED indicators The Fx2424 PLC employs sinking NPN type power transistors or MOSFET outputs that turn ON by sinking current from the load to the terminal Every 8 outputs are grouped together into a single strip of detachable screw terminal Figure 1 6 shows the wiring diagram of the digital outputs Note Output 5 to 16 can each sink up to 8A peak or 4A continuous current 24VDC Output 5 to 8 can also be configured as PWM outputs to drive heating elements or proportional valves using the SETPWM command please see Chapter 6 for more information 1 5 2 Digital Output Wiring Diagram I TRIANGLE 1 6 TRI RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide F2424 PLC 24V DC Power Supply OUTPUTS Figure 1 6 Transistor Output Interfacing to Load All digital outputs are directly programmable in Ladder Logic as well as in TBASI
174. file name can be any legal name acceptable to the server so you can attach a date or time stamp to the file name for easy identifications When the above lt FTPUPLD gt command is run the PLC will send the actual STOR command in the background to the FTP server and then obtain the port number from the server and it will then make a data connection to it and file transfer can then begin i RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TR TRIANGLE 20 12 Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 6 3 Monitoring The FTP Upload Progress Once the file transfer begins the PLC firmware will handle the rest of the file transfer until either the file has been completely transferred or the transfer is aborted due to a network or server trouble You can monitor the progress of the file transfer using either the STATUS 4 or STATUS 20 functions STATUS 4 0 FTP client was idle or last FTP failed 1 FTP data transfer just started 2 1st FTP segment transferred now transferring the rest 3 FTP data transfer completed STATUS 20 gt 0 Number of bytes uploaded to FTP Server Transfer is in progress lt 0 Total number of bytes uploaded Transfer completed For example If 2 345 bytes has been uploaded to the server and the transfer has ended STATUS 20 will return the number 2345 Since file transfer can take substantial amount of time to complete it is not wise to run a loop to wait for the file transfer to complete since this wi
175. first 16 ON OFF inputs of the Fx2424 can be configured as special inputs such as High Speed Counters Interrupts and Pulse Measurement 12 of the 16 outputs can also be configured as PWM or stepper motor controller driver pulse outputs If these special I Os are not used then they can be used as ordinary ON OFF type I O in the ladder diagram The High Speed Counters and Pulse measurement inputs share physical inputs but they can be used simultaneously as HSC and PMON unlike M Series Note that if any other two special functions share the same I O then only one of them can be active at any one time The location of these special I Os are tabulated as follows Special Inputs 1 Ch t PhaseA Long Chit 2 Chit PhaseB Ch 2 Ch 2 3 Ch 2 PhaseA Ch 3 Ch 3 O 4 Ch 2 PhaseB Inn Ch 4 6 Ch 3 PhaseB_ os Ch 6 ee ee e o ea EE EECH Note While inputs 1 6 can be used simultaneously as High Speed Counters and Pulse Measurement pins any pins defined as interrupts can only be interrupts Special Outputs Output Stepper Pulse Dir outputs Stepper Driver Outputs PWM output Ch 1 Direction Ch 1 Pulse Ch 2 Direction Ch 2 Pulse Ch 3 Direction Ch 3 Pulse These special I Os therefore share the same electrical specifications as the ON OFF type I Os which have already been described in the Chapter 1 Installation Guide We will describe each of these special I Os in greater detail
176. for echo Ready to process command return Ctrl E 05H Send Command string to controlle Wait for response Lam Execute command Return Response string to host Accept Response Check for errors Figure 15 1 15 4MULTI POINT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM In this system one host computer may be connected to either a single PLC via either RS232 or RS485 or multiple PLCs on an RS485 network 15 4 1 Command Response Frame Format Multi point eeek pepe ey fe Nyt Fer y eee ker Device ID Header Data FCS Terminator Each command frame starts with the character and two byte hexadecimal representation of the controller s ID 00 to FF and ends with a two byte Frame Check Sequence FCS and the terminator FCS is provided for detecting communication errors in the serial bit stream If desired the command frame may omit calculating the FCS simply by putting the characters 00 in place of the FCS Note we call 00 the wildcard FCS which is available when the PLC is in auto protocol mode This is to facilitate easy testing of the multi point protocol However the wildcard FCS can be disabled if the PLC has executed the SETPROTOCOL n 5 to put its COMM port n into pure native mode In that case you will have to supply the actual FCS to your command string O D TRIANGLE 5 3 URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL j Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol 15 4 2 Ca
177. four byte ASCII text characters from 0000 to 9999 Note that this command header contains small letter m instead of M in the RM command 16 10Read Counter Present Value P V Command Format PRP Ut atr tol oe nn Counter1 00 Counter16 0F Counter64 3F Response Format ER Lu jijijiji o Counter present value in Decimal The Present Value of the specified counter is returned in decimal form as four byte ASCII text characters from 0000 to 9999 16 11 Read Counter Set Value S V Command Format PR putratay o KT nn Counter1 00 Counter16 0F Counter64 3F Response Format RJJ u 10 to to ji jo a Counter Set Value in Decimal r an V TRIANGLE 16 5 Do RESEARCH LI Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format The Set Value of the specified counter is returned in decimal form as four byte ASCII text characters from 0000 to 9999 Note that this header contains small letter u instead of U in the RU command Ti ees 16 6 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 12Read Variable Integers A to Z Command Format Pe v apa TO A B C Z Response Format Ry 16 16 16 16 16 r6 te te 8 Hexadecimal Digit for 32 bit integer E g To read the value of the variable K send host link command RVIK If variable K contains the value 1234561
178. ful feature of the sequencers 4 4 5 Reversing a Sequencer Although not available as a unique special function a sequencer may be stepped backward by decrementing its step counter using the DNctr command on the counter that has been defined as a sequencer This is useful for creating a reversible sequencer or for replacing a reversible drum controller 4 4 6 Program Example Assume that we wish to create a running light pattern which turns on the LED of Outputs 1 to 4 one at a time every second in the following order LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 all LED OFF and then restart the cycle again This can be easily accomplished with the program shown in Figure 4 5 The 1 0s clock pulse bit will advance increment Sequencer 2 by one step every second Sequencer 2 should be defined with Set Value 8 Each step of the sequencer is used as a normally open contact to turn on the desired LED for the step A Stop input resets the sequencer asynchronously When the sequencer counts to eight it will become Step 0 Since none of the LEDs are turned ON by Step 0 all LEDs will be OFF CO TRIANGLE a URA RESEARCH 4 6 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers Clk1 Os Seq2 SS _ _ rvs Seq LEID OUT Seq2 8 Seq2 2 LED2 L OUT Seq Seq2 3 LED3 r QUT Seq2 6 Seq2 4 LED4 OUT Seq2 5 Stop Seq Peg Figure 4 5 4 5 Programming Sequencers in Custom Fu
179. gain some understanding of the XBEE addressing method In the next example we are going to simplify the connection process using Node Identifier 19 3 2 Defining Node Identifier for XBEE Module In the last example we showed you how to use the ATDH and ATDL commands to set the 64 bit destination address of a slave XBEE module It is certainly not convenient having to enter so many digits just to change a destination node to connect to To simplify the connection procedure XBEE offers a very useful Node Identifier command that allows you to assign alphanumeric names up to 20 characters with no spacing to each XBEE module using the ATNI command 1 First turn off power to the PLC and then move the XBEE module to its RS232 interface board Next use the X CTU terminal screen to enter the command as shown below TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TR 19 5 17 X CTU COM5 Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication About PC Settings Range Test Terminal Modem Configuration Line Status Assert ETS CD DER CTR IV ATS Bech 4 0K ATNIPLC1 Close Assemble Clear Show Com Port Packet Screen Hex 2 By using the command ATNIPLC1 we have defined this XBEE module with the identifier PLC1 We next issued the ATWR command to save the identifier to the non volatile memory To confirm that the identifier has been saved you can power off the XBEE module and then on again and enter the command
180. gh the origin But if there were any zero offset error then the line would be above or below the origin The DAC output on the Fx2424 should not have any zero offset error and you normally should just leave these fields set to O However if for any reason there is a need to apply a Zero offset error correction you can enter a value between 100 to 100 into the DAC Zero Offset field The CPU would add the zero offset value you enter into this field to the X in the SETDAC n x statement and only send the sum to the actual DAC hardware 5 5 5 A D Moving Avg This field lets you define the number of points of moving average that the Fx2424 CPU firmware uses to compute the value returned by the ADC n function Please see explanation of moving average in Section 5 2 5 A larger number of moving Average points has the positive effect of filtering out large noise spikes seen at the analog input but the disadvantage is that the PLC would be slower in noticing a sudden step change at the analog input If you specify a moving average of 1 point that means no moving average will be used and the ADC n function will return the most recently sampled data at the analog input n GC TRIANGLE _ Ind RESEARCH 5 11 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 6 Special Digital I Os Chapter 6 Special Digital I Os r an TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 6 Special Digital I Os 6 SPECIAL DIGITAL I Os 12 of the
181. guration program please click on the Windows Start button and open the F series PLC Configuration group and select the Ethernet Configuration Utility program The following screen should appear e RE have a RS232 port Otherwise you should IPAddress fics fo f Factory purchase a USB to RS232 converter Subnet Mask 255 255 Joes o Default Gateway IPAddr i932 fies fi 7 First click on the Serial Setup button and set the A f a S PC s COM port to the same settings as the PLC s DR IS Sen Giele RS232 port Default settings are 38 400bps 8 DNS Server Io jo lo lo F a d S d data bit 1 stop bit and no parity It is important F Server Port 9080 Node FSewver that you select a valid COM port on the PC ets Name Jo otherwise the program will crash and exit when it beer 2 ee ei fails to open the COM port The selected COM port S z Le number is shown in a small text box below the Serial Setup button so that you can see the Username Tee Usemame Password currently selected COM port readily Password e e Yes f No Next click on the Retrieve Parameters from F Firmware eae PLC so that you can capture a copy of the current coms configuration in the PLC You can then selectively Access Level 1 Programmer modify the parameters of interest r Reset PLC After Save Exit Successfully Retrieved Setup Data Figure 2 1 4 The main difference between this standal
182. h the corporate firewall is entirely decided by the System Administrator according to the company s security policy Most corporate LANs would not allow incoming packets from reaching an internal server until the System Administrator has given the permission to do so Some company s network may not even allow devices such as the PLC to open a connection to the Internet to access external data If your application requires the PLC to access the Internet or to be accessible from the Internet then you would need to consult your system administrator on the required procedure TR RESEARCH 2 32 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 9 Installing a Control Web Page Into the Fx PLC Fx PLC web server space can host up to 1 7M bytes of data files which can be HTML JPG JS javascript files etc Thanks to its support of the web services commands a programmer can create its own sophisticated control webpages using only standard HTML and Javascript TRi has created an example control webpage which can be downloaded from http www tri plc com download Fx HMI zip Note that one of the files M JS inside the Fx HMI zip is password protected To obtain the password please write to support triplc com and provide your purchase references purchaser s name company name invoice etc When you have successfully unzipped all the files from the Fx HMI zip into your hard disk you will need to transfer the files to the PLC s we
183. hange with other devices is to send a command string using the PRINT n and then start a timer and let the PLC program continue to scan the ladder program When timer times out the timer contact is used to activate a custom function and use INPUT n to read the return message from the device This is most efficient use of the CPU time since the program will not have to waste time to wait for response string from the device and that s the reason for INPUT n to default to non blocking mode Another way to deal with this is to use the NETCMD function terminated with NETCMD sends a command string and will return immediately when it receives a response string or if more than 0 15s has passed If the device is slow to response the CPU basically sits in a loop to wait for the response for up to a maximum of 0 15s NETCMD function also re tries the communication several times if it does not receive a response in the first try A third way of handling serial exchange with other devices is to use the INPUT n command in blocking mode Starting from CPU firmware r72 and above if you run the command SETSYSTEM 19 t This will configure the INPUT n command to block the CPU for up to maximum of t x 10 milliseconds to wait for a valid string from 3 party device Although this command also wastes CPU cycles to wait for a response and hence it is not as efficient compared to using the timer activated method mentioned above it nonetheless is
184. hat disabling the firewall allows you to successfully connect to the PLC server and view the directory listing then you can add the PLC s IP address as well as FileZilla program to the firewall exception list so that you can leave your firewall enabled if you wish To add FileZilla to the Windows firewall exception list you will need to open the Windows firewall from your network settings configuration area Then you will need to click on Change settings which will open up a new window You will need to go to the Exceptions tab in the new window and look for FileZilla in the list of programs If you see FileZilla in the list then you will need to check the box beside it to add it to the exception list Otherwise you will need to manually add it to the list by clicking Add program and searching for FileZilla in its installation directory Here is a picture of the Windows Firewall status window and the Change settings window with the Exceptions tab T INTERNATIONAL fe gt TRIANGLE R RESEARCH 2 35 Chapter 2 Ethernet Port a x SW Windows Firewall Settings General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall x 8 sad Exceptions control how programs communicate through Windows Firewall Add a Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to program or part exception to allow communications through the firewall ogram through your computer
185. he LAN you will need to setup the router or firewall to forward the PLC s server port e g 9080 to the PLC If you have multiple PLCs logging data then each PLC will need to have a different port number in order to properly forward the data This not only complicates the setup but also is often frown upon by System Administrator and may not even be permitted by the corporate network security policy The PLC is designed to upload data to any web server via FTP passive mode by providing the login username and password Using FTP passive mode allows the PLC to open a network connection to an external web server to upload a file and then close the connection immediately It does not require opening a port on your router to permit external access to the PLC from the Internet Hence there is no complicated router setup involved as there is no port forwarding required It also eliminates the security risk from someone trying to take control of the PLC from outside of your LAN and is generally much more acceptable to the System Administrator If you have multiple PLCs in use you can program each PLC to upload data to a different directory or append a different file name prefix or to a different server and once programmed all PLCs will happily log data unattended indefinitely 20 2 File Structure and File Naming of The Extended File System Fx2424 uses a very simple file system where the 1740K bytes of file space are divided into 435 slots of 4
186. he file 20 4 3 Delete A File Syntax PRINT 8 lt DELETE Zxxx yyy gt where Zxxx yyy is the file name of the file to be deleted There is no need to close a deleted file 20 4 4 Open A File For Reading Syntax PRINT 8 lt READ Z2xxx yyy gt where Zxxx yyy is the file name of the file to be opened for reading If the file has been successfully opened for reading after execution of the PRINT 8 lt READ gt command the PLC i Toi Bes 20 5 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System can start to retrieve ASCII data from the file line by line using the INPUT 8 command A line is either a string that is terminated with a Carriage Return character ASCII 13 or is a 70 character long string which is the maximum length of any string variables A to Z without carriage return In either case the return string does not contain the CR character itself The PLC can check if a file has been successfully opened for reading using the STATUS 2 function AFTER executing the PRINT 8 lt READ gt command STATUS 2 will only return a 1 if a file has been successfully opened The PLC can determine if the End of File EOF has been reached using the STATUS 2 function after every INPUT 8 command has been executed STATUS 2 returns a 255 if the EOF has been reached The PLC should then close the file by executing the PRINT 8 lt gt command A lt READ Z STRS F 3 txt gt
187. he slaves using the NETCMD or READMODBUS WRITEMODBUS READMB2 WRITEMB2 statements and coordinate information flow between the PLCs In this way a big system can be built by employing multiple units of F M E or H series PLCs connected in a network This results in more elegant implementation of complex control systems and simplifies maintenance jobs 14 4Changing Baud Rate and Communication Formats Use of the SETBAUD Statement The Fx2424 PLC s COMM ports are highly configurable All 3 COMM ports can be set to a wide range of baud rates You can also program them to communicate in either 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits odd even or no parity The baud rate and communication formats of the serial ports are set by the following command SETBAUD ch baud_no ch represents the COMM port number 1 2 or 3 only The baud_no parameter takes a value from 0 255 amp HO to amp HFF which allows for additional configuration of the communication format The upper 4 bits of baud_no specify the communication format number of data bits number of stop bits and parity and the lower 4 bits represent the baud rate Hence the baud_no for 8 data bit 1 stop bit and no parity is the same as the old models providing compatibility across the PLC families r Tri es 14 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications Once the new baud rate has been set it will not be changed until execution of another SETBAUD statement Th
188. hen the direct connections offered by MODBUS TCP provide simplicity without time consuming login sequences As such Modbus TCP m TRI RESEARCH 2 24 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port protocol is itself inherently insecure and not meant to be exposed directly to the Internet where malicious attacker can take control of the equipment Typically Modbus TCP devices are deployed in a local area network and protected by the network firewall A SCADA or OPC server program is used to connect to the Modbus TCP devices on LAN and the PC running the SCADA OPC server software can then be the only device exposed to the Internet where secured access can be implemented by the server software External HMI client software can then make connection to the SCADA OPC server which will in turn access the Modbus TCP devices such as the F series PLCs However if you only have a single Modbus TCP device and need to expose it to the public Internet for external access then you ought to consider the security issues associated with MODBUS TCP connections Since a MODBUS TCP connection does not require a username password login sequence unlike the FServer login the only way to protect against unauthorized access is through the Trusted IP addresses defined using the F series Ethernet Configuration software To define a list of Trusted IP addresses please click on TL7 s Controller menu and select Ethernet amp ADC Configuratio
189. ial source of serious trouble as signal wires with a floating ground easily induce large voltage differences between nodes when subjected to electromagnetic interference Hence for reliable operation it is important to provide the common ground A grounded shield also has the additional advantage of shielding the electrical signals from EMI 15 5 3 Single Master RS485 Networking Fundamentals RS485 is a half duplex network i e the same two wires are used for both transmission of the command and reception of the response Of course at any one time only one transmitter may be active The Fx2424 implements a master slave network protocol The network requires a master controller which is typically a PC equipped with an RS485 interface In the case of a PC you can purchase an RS 485 adapter card or an RS232C to RS485 converter and connect it to the RS232C serial port A Fx2424 can also be programmed to act as the master it can communicate with other PLCs by executing the NETCMD function or the READMODBUS or the WRITEMODBUS commands the latter two are for communicating using MODBUS protocols only and are covered in Section 14 8 CA V TRIANGLE 15 7 Ind RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol Only the master can issue commands to the slave PLCs To transmit a command the master controller must first enable its RS 485 transmitter and then send a multi point command to the network of
190. icators that will light up whenever the corresponding serial channel sends or receives data This makes it extremely convenient for troubleshooting serial communication problems 14 2COMM1 RS232C Port with Female DB9 Connector This port is configured as a DCE Data Communication Equipment and is designed to connect directly to the PC s serial port without the need for a null modem cable COMM1 communicates with the host computer at a default baud rate of 38 400 bit per second with 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity The communication baud rate can be changed in software from 1200 bps to 115 2K or 230 4K bps which is compatible with most PCs and industrial equipment The COMM1 port is the main communication port used by the PLC configuration software See Chapter 2 1 as well as for program transfer and on line monitoring of the PLC program when it is not connected to an Ethernet router or hub The pin connections with the host PC are shown below Host PC RS2382 or USB RS232 Converter Male DB9 F2424 COMM1 Female Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 14 1 Connecting COMM1 with PC However to connect COMM1 to another DCE device e g a modem you need to make a special cable which swaps the transmit and receive signals as follows r LIN RESEARCH Wes INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications Modem Female DB9 FX2424 COMM1 Female DB9 Figure 14 2 Connecting COMM1 to a MODEM Pin 4 and 6
191. ich means that they are open minded and listen to all serial data coming through the COMM ports The CPU tries to determine if the serial data conforms to a certain protocol and if so the COMM mode is determined automatically 2 Once the protocol is recognized the CPU sets that COMM port to a specific COMM mode which enables it to process and respond only to commands that conform to that protocol Error detection data such as the FCS LRC or CRC are computed accordingly which method is used to verify the integrity of the received commands If errors are detected in the command the CPU responds in accordance with the action specified in the respective protocols 3 When the COMM port enters a specific COMM mode it will regard commands of other protocol as errors and will not accept them Hence for example if COMM 1 has received a valid MODBUS RTU command which puts it in an RTU mode it will no longer respond to TRiILOGI s attempts to communicate with it using the NATIVE mode You will receive a communication error if you try to use TRILOGI to access a PLC COMM port that has just been communicating in other protocol modes 4 To improve the flexibility of switching from one COMM mode to another The Fx2424 incorporates a COMM mode self reset timer such that a specific COMM mode will time out automatically and enters into AUTO mode after 10 seconds if no more commands are received from that COMM port When a use
192. ileZilla into your destination folder It is best to make a copy of these files as a backup on your computer so that you have the original copies available in case you need them Uploading Files When you are ready to transfer your own web pages or applet to the PLC you just need to drag it from the folder it is saved to on your computer into the bottom right window of FileZilla where the current files are shown If you didn t change the filename you can tell the new file to overwrite the old file Otherwise you will need to manually delete the old file from the PLC s web server in FileZilla by right clicking on it and selecting Delete TR RESEARCH 2 36 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 9 4 Troubleshooting FileZilla File Transfer Problems 1 FileZilla appears to have connected to the PLC s FTP server but it cannot list the directory or i transfer any file to the PLC The reason almost always have something to do with the PC s software firewall You need to configure the Windows Firewall and any software anti virus firewall on your PC to allow incoming connections to the FileZilla program You can try to disable the firewall temporarily to test the connection and if does work you can then be sure that it is the firewall configuration issue that need to be resolved The following paragraphs explain how the firewall can affect the FTP communications for those who are interested The File Transfer Protoco
193. in 20 8 3 Monitoring The FTP Upload Progress Once the file transfer begins the PLC firmware will handle the rest of the file transfer until either the file has been completely transferred or the transfer is aborted due to a network or server trouble You can monitor the progress of the file transfer using either the STATUS 4 or STATUS 20 functions 0 FTP client was idle or last FTP failed 1 FTP data transfer just started 2 1st FTP segment transferred now transferring the rest 3 FTP data transfer completed STATUS 4 i TR RESEARCH 20 16 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System STATUS 20 gt 0 Number of bytes uploaded to FTP Server Transfer is in progress lt 0 Total number of bytes uploaded Transfer completed For example If 2 345 bytes has been uploaded to the server and the transfer has ended STATUS 20 will return the number 2345 Since file transfer can take substantial amount of time to complete it is not wise to run a loop to wait for the file transfer to complete since this will block the PLC from processing any other part of the program The demo ExtendedFileSystem PC6 shows you how to setup a monitoring function to periodically monitor the progress of the file transfer and report the transfer status on the LCD display Please refer to the comments in the custom function fnConnFTP and fnMonFTP of the ExtendedFileSystem PC6 program for more detailed desc
194. in the I O Table and added in a ladder logic circuit Custom functions act the same way as coils in ladder logic in that that they need a contact to activate them Once they are activated the code inside them will execute To create a custom function circuit follow these 3 steps INTERNATIONAL OH TRIANGLE Toi RESEARCH 3 2 Chapter 3 I O and Internal Relays Programming 1 Edit the name of the custom function in the I O Table 2 Place the activating contact in the ladder logic circuit 3 Place the custom function at the end of the circuit 3 3 1 Editing Label Names This is the same as for the digital I O except that the I O table window needs to be scrolled to the custom function area for editing custom function names Placing the custom function in the circuit is done the same way as other ladder logic contacts and coils by selecting the za and then choosing the Differential custom function dCusF from the pop up D CusFn Custom Function E dCusF Diff Up Custom Funcs F MaRST Master Reset The circuit should look something like below window Dei TRiLOGI Version 6 13 Untitled File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Figure 3 5 Circuit with custom function dCusF 3 3 2 Controlling I O from Custom Functions An empty custom function looks like this KE Custom Function 1 func__1 Select Function Edit Fn Name Insert Keyword lt q lt gt gt gt TBASIC code is e
195. in the factory and in that case you will need to install it yourself Please refer to Section 1 9 for information on both purchasing and installing the RTC battery NOTE If the RTC battery is not installed or the battery is removed for more than 15 seconds when the PLC is powered down then the PLC will lose its real time clock data when it is powered up again When this happens the RTC Error status LED on the CPU board will light up and the RTC Err bit in the ladder logic special bit will be ON so that user program can use it to alert the operator 12 2 TBASIC variables Used for Real Time Clock Date Time YEAR DATE 1 HOUR TIME 1 MONTH DATE 2 MINUTES TIME 2 DAY DATE 3 SECOND TIME 3 Day of Week DATE 4 There are 7 registers available in TBASIC that are used to access and configure the date and time These registers which are shown above can be read from and written to just like any other integer variable The data for these registers are in integer format DATE 1 may contain four digits e g 1998 2003 etc DATE 4 1 for Monday 2 for Tuesday 7 for Sunday 12 3 RTC Error Status On Ladder Logic There is a special bit available in TRILOGI that allows you to notify the PLC program if the RTC Error event occurs and the RTC Error status light is turned on The RTC Error event occurs if the RTC is corrupted or damaged see section 12 8 for more d
196. ions interact with the serial buffer a INCOMM n Every execution of the INCOMM n function removes one character from the circular buffer When no more data is available in the buffer this function returns a 1 The data removed by INCOMM will no longer be available for the INPUT command b INPUTS n When the INPUT n function is executed the CPU checks the COMM n buffer to see if there is a byte with the value 13 the ASCII CR character which acts as a terminator for the string If a string is present all the characters that make up the string will be removed from the COMM buffer If a completed string is not present then the COMM buffer will not be affected and INPUT n returns a null string This ensures that before a complete string is received the serial characters will not be lost because of the unsuccessful execution of the INPUT n function c INPUT n in Blocking Mode i Ti ss 14 6 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications INPUT n is designed to be non blocking and to return immediately i e either it returns a complete string or it returns an empty string This means that INPUT n will not suspend the CPU and wait for a valid string from the COMM port However in real world communication very often you will need to send a command to a device and it takes a while for the device to be able to send back a response string The most efficient way of handling such serial communication exc
197. ired location you will need to do some trial and error with different numbers Relocating the LCD Display Note that the LCD Display content is not configured in the HTML files because it is displaying what is set in the PLC program The display is grouped as a single unit so it is not possible to define separate locations for each display line remember it is a 4 line by 20 character display emulation This is the code to change the coordinates for the starting location of the LCD screen LCDXY 22 52 starting x y location of LCD panel All you need to do is change the numbers in the square brackets The x location is 22 by default and the y location is 52 by default both relative to the top left corner of the browser display area Relocating the Internal Relay Bit Buttons Each of the eight buttons 4 input buttons and 4 output buttons can be moved individually by editing the following code ITOLocx IOLocY 24 120 24 120 24 120 24 120 142 142 164 164 267 267 290 290 The values in the square brackets for IOLocX are the x coordinates and the values in the square brackets for IOLocY are the y coordinates for each button The button for Output1 is the first value and the next value is for Output2 etc Relocating the Data Memory Labels and Fields The labels and fields are grouped together for each of the four data memory locations used so each label and field group will move as one item Here is the code to
198. its desired location is instantly being corrected by the servo mechanism 11 4 1 Using Fx2424 PWM Output To Control RC Servo Non lsolated As you probably have realized by now that you can use a single PWM output to very easily position the RC Servo to whatever position within its range of travel However since the Fx2424 power supply is 12 to 24V vs 4 8 to 6V on the typical RC Servo and the PWM output is NPN current sink type the signal to the servo is actually inverted if you connect the PLC s output to the Servo s control input directly 24V DC 4 8V to 6V Power DCPower For PLC For Servo Control OUTPUTS 1N4001 E T E A P Gre N E RES Figure 11 4 Non isolated Interace to RC Servo As shown in the above figure we use a 1K ohm resistor to pull up the Control input to the RC Servo s power supply so that when the PLC s output is OFF the Control input is 6V and when the PLC output is ON the Control input is pulled to low The 1N4001 diode is to prevent the 24V weak pullup signal at the PLC output from entering the servo s Control input As such when the PLC output is ON the Control input is pulled down to about 1 diode drop about 0 7V In other words the RC Servo connected above are controlled by the PLC s PWM output but the duty cycle is inverted Le To send a 5 positive PWM control pulse to the Servo you can run the following statement SETPWM 2 9500 50
199. ively communicate with any controller connected to a common RS485 bus see Chapter 3 for details The ID has no effect for point to point communication The device ID is stored in the PLC s non volatile memory and therefore will remain with the controller until it is next changed 16 2Device ID Write Command Format Me Be a el Be now Deve Device ID 00 to FF CIE Format E g To set the PLC s ID to OA send command string won to PLC 16 3 Read Digital Input Channels Command Format et we a o oe 8 bit Channel Hex 2 TRIANGLE 16 1 mmm URA RESEARCH LAS INTERNATIONAL m Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Response Format SEHR ER ES KT 8 bit Data Hex 16 3 1 Definition of Input Channels The following table shows the input numbers as defined in TRiILOGI s Input entry table corresponding to the input channel number Bit7 EE Numbers Bito CHOO CHO1 CHO2 CHO3 CH04 CHO5 CHO6 CHO7 CHO8 CHO9 CHOAie CHOBie s 94 G t 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 Kee ee COHEN CHiF re The 8 bit inputs of each channel are represented by a two byte ASCII text expression of its hexadecimal value For example if inputs 1 to 3 are logic Oe inputs 4 to 10 are logic 1 s and all other inputs are logic 0 s then if you send command R100 you will get the response RIF8 F ie 1111 10003 16 4Read Digital Output Channels Command Format
200. l disconnect the client if there is no activity for more than 10 minutes The current version of the TRILOGI program may not detect that the connection has been closed and it may instead think that the PLC is not present When this happens you should click on Controller menu and select Disconnect to properly shut down the connection that has already been reset by the PLC 2 If you are unable to connect to the PLC then check that both the PLC and the PC running your TRILOGI software are connected to the same network and are on the same subnet Generally for a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 if the PC s IP address is 192 168 1 xxx then the PLC should have an IP address of 192 168 1 yyy and it will not work if the PLC has IP address such as 192 168 0 yyy or 192 168 2 yyy since this means that the two devices are on different subnets Likewise if your PC s IP address is 192 168 0 xxx then please change your PLC s IP address to 192 168 0 yyy Also ensure that the PLC s IP address is not already assigned to another device on the same network otherwise a conflict would occur and communication is not possible 2 4 Using F series PLC Network Services Commands The Fx2424 implements a list of Network Services commands similar to what you may have read in the User s Manual of the X Server NS commands and TLServer Files and Email Services These Network Services or NS in short can be used to inst
201. l is unique in that it requires two socket connections between two devices that are communicating via FTP When FileZilla is connected to the PLC s FTP server on port 21 it establishes a command channel and it is through this command channel that FTP commands are being sent However once the command channel is established FileZilla is connected to the FTP Server a second socket connection known as the data channel needs to be made between FileZilla and the PLC All data such as the directory information and content of any files to be transferred between FileZilla and the PLC will need to go through the data channel They are two possible ways of establishing this data channel one is called the Active Transfer and the other is known as Passive Transfer FileZilla is able to operate in either transfer mode but the PLC FTP Server can only operate in Active Transfer mode Active Transfer mode requires that the client FileZilla provides a listening socket for the server PLC and the server PLC will then try to connect to this socket to establish the data connection So if the FileZilla program sits behind the software firewall and no exception has been configured then the PLC FTP Server will not be able to make a connection to the FileZilla data socket because it is blocked by the firewall and the connection will therefore fail This explains why FileZilla seemingly able to connect to the PLC but yet i
202. lable at 2 14 Standalone Version of Ethernet Configuration Software Now these settings can be configured directly from the TRILOGI programming software as described next 2 1 Configuring The Ethernet Port This tool which is located in the Controller Menu of TRILOGI allows you to configure the Ethernet Port and ADC RTC calibration settings on a TRi s PLC with built in Ethernet port such as the Fx PLCs When the Ethernet amp ADC Calibration is selected from the Controller menu you will see the following screen The configuration program communicates with the PLC Ethernet Configuration BASIC IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Addr SMTP Server IP DNS Server FServer Port MBTCP Port LAN Speed Username T00Mbps Factory Default Node Name FServer Number of I q Connections Fserver MBTCP v Use username password the same way as i TRiLOGI which is through the serial TLServer or the Ethernet FServer If your i TRiLOGI is not yet connected to a TLServer software or directly to the PLC s built in hostlink command server known as F Server for all F series PLCs then you will need to login the standard way from the Controller menu See the i TRiLOGI Programmers Reference Manual for more information on this If you are communicating through TLServer which is via leocccccccccced Yes No Password the RS232 serial port your PC should have an RS232 port Otherwise you sho
203. lave with ID 08 and read the content of register 16 This register corresponds to MODICON address 40017 and is the OUTPUT 1 of the slave PLC The ability to speak MODBUS RTU greatly extends the type of peripherals that can be used with a Fx2424 PLC You can now make use of many off the shelf third party RTU devices to extend the PLC capability o_O TRIANGLE 14 13 Lied RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 14 Serial Communications 14 9Using Modem to Remotely Program Monitor The PLC TLServer 3 x supports remote dial up to M series and F series PLCs via standard off the shelf modems It takes two modems to communicate between two devices The host end of the modem setup and configuration is handled by the TLServer software itself whereas on the PLC side the PLC has to configure the modem so that it can successfully communicate with the host computer running TRILOGI 14 9 1 Wiring The modem is often connected to the PLC s COMM1 Since the serial port on most modems are DCE type you will need a make a special cable also known as null modem to connect them as shown in Figure 14 2 H the modem only has a DB25 connector you can connect the wires as shown in the following diagram F1616 BA Female DB9 Modem Female DB25 Figure 14 3 Connecting Fx2424 s COMM1 to a modem s DB25 port Note that pin 6 DSR and pin 20 DTR at the modem end are tied together This is often required to inform the modem that the
204. lculation of FCS The FCS is 8 bit data represented by two ASCII characters 00 to FF It is a result of performing an Exclusive OR on each character in the frame sequentially starting from in the device number to the last character in the data An example is as follows Device ID Header Data FCS 0100 0000 XOR 0 0011 0000 XOR 4 0011 0100 XOR R 0101 0010 XOR V 0101 0110 XOR 0100 1001 XOR A 0100 0001 0100 1000 48 Value 4846 is then converted to ASCII characters 4 0011 0100 and 8 0011 1000 and placed in the FCS field FCS calculation program example The following C function will compute and return the FCS for the string passed to it unsigned char compute_FCS unsigned char string unsigned char result result stringt first byte of string while string result stringt XOR operation return result A Visual Basic routine for FCS computation is included in the source code of a sample communication program you can download from http www tri plc com applications VBsample htm VB6sample 15 4 3 Communication Procedure Unlike the point to point communication protocol the host computer must NOT send the CTRL E character before sending the command frame After the host computer has sent out the multi point host link command frame only the controller with the correct device ID will respond Hence it is essential to ensure that every controller on the RS485 network
205. le stored on an external server So you could try the following bgimagesrc http tri plc com nano hmipics panelblack2 jpg This is how you set the background image for your web page All you need to do is replace URL of the JPEG file with the URL of your own background graphics file hosted on any web server Changing Label Names The names of the eight Internal Relay Bit buttons and the four Data Memory labels can be changed to anything or even left blank All you need to do is replace the words in the single quotes with anything from the following lines of code Internal Relay Bit buttons IOname Relay129 Relay130 Relay131 Relay132 Relay133 Relay134 Relay135 Relay136 Relay137 Relay138 Relay139 Relay140 Relay141 Relay142 Relay142 Relay144 Data Memory labels DMlabel DM 1 DM 2 DM 3 DM 4 DM 5 DM 6 DM 7 DM 8 TR RESEARCH 2 42 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Relocating Display Data Buttons and Labels It is possible to change the default locations of the interactive objects which are the Data Memory labels and fields the Internal Relay Bit buttons and the LCD Display All of these things have x y coordinates that are defined in the level 1 user modification area The coordinates are relative to the top left of the browser window which would be 0 0 These coordinates can be easily modified but in order to find the right values for your des
206. lease see the TRILOGI programmer s manual for an explanation of the use of the port number One reason why you may want to change the port number is to use the port forwarding capability of an NAT router so that different F series PLCs may be accessible from the Internet using the same public IP address of the router but with different port numbers 2 1 7 Modbus TCP Secondary Port No According to MODBUS ORG specifications all Modbus TCP servers must listen on port 502 However Modbus org also permits the device to be assigned a different secondary port number As such the Modbus TCP server will always listen on port 502 for all of its connections by default Should you choose to define a secondary port number then the Modbus TCP server will only listen on port 502 on fe o gt TRIANGLE 7 Toi RESEARCH 2 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port one connection while the additional connections 1 to a maximum of 4 would be listening on the secondary port You may specify any port number between 1024 and 65535 except for the port number already used by the FServer to be the secondary port number Please see the TRILOGI programmer s manual for an explanation of the use of the port number One reason why you may want to change the port number is to use the port forwarding capability of an NAT router so that different F series PLCs may be accessible from the Internet using the same public IP address of the router b
207. ll block the PLC from processing any other part of the program The demo ExtendedFileSystem PC6 shows you how to setup a monitoring function to periodically monitor the progress of the file transfer and report the transfer status on the LCD display Please refer to the comments in the custom function fnConnFTP and fnMonFTP of the ExtendedFileSystem PC6 program for more detailed descriptions of each command involved in the FTP file transfer 20 7 Setting Up A FTP Server Behind a Windows Firewall Please refer to the following Microsoft document describing issues and solutions related to FTP server behind the Windows Firewall http technet microsoft com en us library dd421710 WS 10 aspx Microsoft focuses mainly on the FTP server in their IIS server for obvious reasons instead of Filezilla If you are setting Filezilla as a permanent FTP server behind a software firewall you can try to make the following configuration setup 1 You must specifically setup a range of port number for Passive mode use These are the port number that Filezilla will assign to the PLC to make a data channel connection when it attempts to transfer a file using passive mode The following is an example where two port numbers are assigned so that two PLCs may connect to the Filezilla simultaneously You can add a larger port range if more PLCs may connect to the FTP Server simultaneously i ma aD TRIANGLE 20 13 DA RESEARCH INTERNATI
208. logi FPLCsamples zip r ma V TRIANGLE 9 16 Line RESEARCH LI INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port includes all examples of how to use the NS commands via virtual comm port 4 which serves as a good starting point for you to learn these simple but yet powerful methods for making a client connection over the LAN or the Internet 4 The PLC reserves only a single client socket to implement the Network Services If you use any of the NS commands listed below please ensure that the command is completed so that the client socket can be closed before issuing a different NS command All NS commands begin with a string enclosed within the angle bracket called a tag e g lt EMAIL gt lt CONNECT gt Most NS commands end with a closing tag lt gt except the lt REMOTEFS gt tag which ends with a lt REMOTEFS gt closing tag Depending on the command type the F series CPU may return one or more response strings via virtual comm port 4 from which the PLC can read to determine if the NS command has been executed properly The PLC can operate the Ethernet port by means of TBASIC INPUT and PRINT commands operating on COMM 4 It uses the PRINT 4 command to send out NS commands and the INPUT 4 command to receive response data via the Ethernet port Notes 1 Only PRINT 4 and INPUT 4 are implemented on virtual COMM port 4 The Fx2424 currently DOES NOT support the INCO
209. ly up to the maximum current limit that the PLCs output can safely drive For larger motors industrial grade variable speed drives should be used instead 11 4 Position Control Of RC Servo Motor RC Servo is a class of DC servo motor commonly used in remote control hence the term RC for positioning a device at a desired location It is often termed proportional control because the position where the motor will turn to is directly proportional to the pulse width of the control signal When chosen appropriately RC Servo can provide an extremely inexpensive and versatile solution for positioning a device For example for controling the percentage opening of a HVAC damper or to rotate the angle of window blinds or to position a solar panel to track the sun light There are many sizes of RC Servo available in the market from those that weigh just a few grams to those for controlling an industrial scale unmanned vehicle e g UAV or unmanned submarine A small self contained RC servo typically cost less than 20 retail price and is incredibly easy to control using the PWM output on the Fx2424 m rY d l o r Figure 11 3 RC Servo and Control Signal RC Servo typically only have 3 wires Power typically 4 8 to 6V anda Control input To position the RC Servo to a position within its range of travel Some are 0 to 90 degree and there are those that can go from 0 to 180 degree you send a positive pulse with
210. m the PLC into a public TCP IP packet out of the Internet and if there is any return data from the Internet meant for the PLC the router would know that and automatically routes the return packet back to the PLC The router performs what is known as Network Address Translation NAT and such routers are called NAT routers However the same FServer and Modbus TCP servers on the PLC are typically inaccessible from the public Internet This is because the router has a built in firewall that does not permit external TCP IP packets from the public Internet to reach the devices on the private LAN In other words the NAT router allows the PLC outgoing access to the Internet but by default does not allow incoming access Most small NAT routers for home use such as those produced by Linksys Netgear D Link or Belkin do allow you to configure the router to open and forward a specific port number to a specific device on the private network For example if your PLC static IP address is 192 168 1 5 and you wish to open its FServer port 9080 but not its Modbus TCP port 502 to the public internet you would configure your router such that it will forward the incoming TCP IP packet destined for port number 9080 to the device at IP address 192 168 1 5 Once you have done that you will then be able to access the FServer from the Internet using the router s public IP address this is typically assigned by the Internet Service Provider and the po
211. mage in 0 HTM and it is displaying a world clock which is controlled by the i Relay PC6 PLC program The display in the HTML files is showing the 4 line by 20 character virtual LCD display controlled by the Fx PLC program using the SETLCD command This means you can configure your PLC program to display up to four lines and up to 20 characters on each line TR RESEARCH 2 40 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Internal Relay Bits Figure 2 10 4 The I Relay PC7 program map the 16 internal relays shown on 0 HTM to Fx PLC s Input 1 to 8 and output 1 to output 8 However the relay bits don t have to just interact with physical I O they can control anything in the PLC program such as custom functions timers counters etc If you click on any of the relay 129 to 136 the corresponding internal relays will be toggled and the relay state is mapped to the PLC s output by the I Relay PC7 program and will be turned ON Likewise when an input 1 to 8 is turned ON the I Relay PC7 program will map the input logic states to relay 137 to 144 and will be displayed on the HMI screen on the next screen refresh Data Memory DM 1 DM 5 DM 2 Dip DM 3 DM DM 4 DMB Fgure 2 10 5 There are 8 Data memory locations that can both display the values set by the PLC program and accept new values to be stored in the PLC DMI locations The first eight DM ocations are used which are DM 1 DM 2 DM 3
212. maining connections will only be listening on the secondary port number If you have a MODBUS TCP client program e g you can download a trial version of Modbus Poll from http www modbustools com for testing you simply specify the F PLC s IP address and connect to it Once connected you will then be able to read from or write to most of the Fx2424 s internal data from the MODBUS TCP client The PLC s I O and internal variables are mapped to the MODBUS device space according to table 2 5 1 2 5 1 1 Bit Address Mapping All the F series I O bits are mapped identically to both the MODBUS Ox and 1x space The bit register offset is shown in the last column of Table 2 5 1 Although MODBUS names the Ox address space as Coil which means output bits and the 1x address space as Input Status which means input bits only the Fx2424 treats both spaces the same Some MODBUS drivers only allow a read from Ox space and a write to 1x space but you still use the same offset shown on Table 2 5 1 Example 1 To map an element to the PLC Input 5 you select the MODBUS register address 0 0005 You can also map the element to the PLC s output 2 In that case you should map it to MODBUS register address 0 0258 2 To map an HMI toggle switch symbol to the PLCs input 5 if you are restricted to select only MODBUS 1x address space then you will have to map the switch to 1 0005 and likewise you can
213. map the switch to output 2 using the MOBDUS address 1 0258 However if the driver allows the switch to be mapped to the 0x space then you can use MODBUS register space 1 0258 and 0 0258 for the output 2 mapping with identical result i o ae y TRIANGLE 2 22 GON Ir RESEARCH CN Dro j d Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Table 2 5 1 Memory Mapping of F series CPU Internal Data to MODBUS Register MODBUS Holding Register Mapping Modicon convention Fx2424 PLC Timer on O 0033 1 to 40033 16 13 to 528 0034 1 to 40034 16 29 to 544 0035 1 to 40035 16 45 to 560 49 to 64 0036 1 to 40036 16 61 to 576 MODBUS Bit Addr Mapping A 17 to 32 40050 1 to 40050 16 33 to 48 40051 1 to 40051 16 49 to 64 40052 1 to 40052 16 17 to 832 Relay on 1024 n 0065 1 to 40065 16 0066 1 to 40066 16 0067 1 to 40067 16 0069 1 to 40069 16 Counter n 40049 1 to 40049 16 0070 1 to 40070 16 0071 1 to 40071 16 0072 1 to 40072 16 0073 1 to 40073 16 0074 1 to 40074 16 161 to 176 0075 1 to 40075 16 1185 to 1200 177 to 192 0076 1 to 40076 16 193 to 208 0077 1 to 40077 16 209 to 224 0078 1 to 40078 16 C 497 t0512 40097 1 to 40097 16 1521 to 1536 TRIANGLE RESEARCH 2 23 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port PLC Modicon convention Binary address Timer 1 to 64 40129 to 40192 _ to 191 Present Values Counter 1 to 64 40257 to 40320 WE to 319 Present Values TIME 1 TIME 2 TIME 3 DAT
214. me This makes it very convenient for the PLC to collect large amounts of data and save them to the easily accessible virtually limitless hard disk storage space that is available in today s PCs For detailed descriptions of the available File Service Tags please refer to TRiLOGI programmer s reference manual under the chapter File amp Email Services All TLServer s File amp Email Services tags such as lt Email gt lt WRITE gt lt APPEND gt lt READ gt and lt READ RTC gt are available to the F series PLC through the use of the lt REMOTEFSs tag You simply have to wrap the abovementioned command tags between the lt REMOTEFS IPAddr port gt and lt REMOTEFSs tag where IPAddr port is the IP address and listening port of the remote TLServer E g through the lt READ RTC gt tag the PLC can synchronize its Real Time clock with a remote TLServer As you will later see this feature is probably not very useful for the Fx2424 anymore since Fx2424 has the ability to connect to the NIST Time Server to update its real time clock to Atomic clock accurately Note Only TLServer version 2 1 or above can handle the lt REMOTEFS gt command tag sent by the Fx PLC 2 4 6 Other Network Services Tags i asss DE 2 21 We will describe two more Network Services commands lt TCPCONNECT gt and lt MBTCPCONNECTS in separate sections later in this manual oO INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port
215. ministrator page of the router and define the range of DHCP for use by the PCs and then you may assign the PLC with any IP address that is outside of the DHCP range E g If you define the DHCP address range to be 192 168 1 100 to 192 168 1 150 then you may assign the PLC with any IP address between 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 99 Usually the router itself would have the IP address 192 168 1 1 so that address is not available and also between 192 168 151 to 192 168 1 254 again making sure that 192 168 1 254 is not already used by your router DHCP IP Address New on Fx PLC Only For the Fx2424 PLC if you set the IP address to 0 0 0 0 then the PLC will send DHCP request to the DHCP server to request for an IP address The DHCP server is assumed to have the same IP address as the Gateway server You can find out the IP address assigned to the PLC by sending the command PRINT 4 lt IP gt and then read the response using INPUT 4 see example in C TRILOGIKTL7 usr samples Ethernet TestEthernet PC7 and the address can then be displayed on the PLC s LCD display using SETLCD command i ma V TRIANGLE GE Dro RESEARCH LI INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 1 2 GateWay IP Addr The Gateway IP address lets the Fx2424 communicate with other LAN segments or connect to the Internet The gateway address is usually the local IP address of the router where the PLC is connected For small local networks with no pla
216. n Next click on the Advanced button on the FServer Basic Configuration and you should see the following Advanced Configuration screen The first thing you should do is to click on the Retrieve Parameters from PLC so that you can capture a copy of the Factory Default ema MAC ID 00 1F 2E 01 02 03 ead Ale current configuration in the PLC and you can then modify selectively Advanced Configuration Trusted IP 1 192 168 1 25 2 0 0 0 0 Trusted IP 3 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 You can define a list of up to 6 Trusted IP addresses in this panel To enable the Modbus TCP Trusted IP click on Mobdus TCP UseTrusted IP FServer UseTrusted IP the Yes button next to the en dk hr Au Modbus TCP Use Trusted IP ADC Calib Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 ChB Ch7 Ch8 oo00x 0 o o Note The FServer can also be enabled Zero Offset D to only allow connections from devices that match one of the Trusted IP defined in this panel This is on top of the username password login sequence that can be enabled disabled from the Basic Configuration screen In other words you can choose either security ADC Moving Avg method to access the FServer or of datapoints implement both security methods at the Trusted P 5 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 DAC Calib 0 000x Zero Offset same time Basic Config Retrieve Parameters from PLC
217. n a motor or solenoid valve etc As an example a simple Pick and Place machine that can pick up a component from point A to point B may operate as follow Step Action Wait for Start signal Forward arm at point A Close gripper Retract arm at point A Move arm to point B Forward arm at point B Open gripper Retract arm at point B Move arm to point A CO NO C1 AIIN oO Tri aes 41 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers 4 2 Programming timers and counters on Ladder Logic The timers and counters can be programmed in ladder logic in a few simple steps 4 2 1 For Timers Edit the label names Place the input contact s into the ladder logic circuit Place the timer coil at the end of the ladder logic circuit Place the timer contact in one or more ladder logic circuits SONS 4 2 2 For Counters Edit the label names Place the input contact s into the ladder logic circuit Place the counter coil at the end of the ladder logic circuit Place the counter contact in one or more ladder logic circuits optional OMS 4 2 3 Example 1 Creating a Simple Timer Circuit in Ladder Logic You can place components in the circuit by clicking in the green area to the right of the red arrow as shown in Figure 4 1 below This will bring up the component tool bar in the gray area above the green circuit area KS TR
218. n allow you to manipulate individual bit within a 16 bit word So it is also possible to map individual I O bits to the 4x address space E g Input bit 1 can be mapped to 4 0001 1 and output bit 2 is mapped to 4 0257 2 etc This is how it is shown in Table 14 1 However if you do not need to manipulate the individual bit then you simply use the address 4 0001 to access the system variable INPUT 1 and address 4 0257 to access the system variable OUTPUT 1 Note that INPUT 1 and OUTPUT 1 are TBASIC system variables and they each contain 16 bits that reflect the on off status of the actual physical input and output bits 1 to 16 14 7 2 MODBUS RTU Protocol Support The Fx2424 also support the MODBUS RTU protocol The difference between the ASCII and RTU protocols is that the latter transmits binary data directly instead of converting one byte of binary data into two ASCII characters A message frame is determined by the silent interval of 3 5 character times between characters received at the COMM port Other than that the function codes and memory mappings are identical to the MODBUS ASCII protocol Table 14 1 therefore applies to the MODBUS RTU protocol as well MOBBUS RTU has the ee command and response format Address Function Data CRC 16 St of 3 5 1 byte 1 byte byte 2 bytes r of 3 5 char times char times The following Function Codes are supported 06 Preset Single Word Register Preset Multiple Word Registers
219. n be programmed as a contact on the ladder diagram as SeqN X where N Sequencers 1 to 8 and X Steps 0 31 e g Seq2 4 Step 4 of Sequencer 2 Seq5 25 Step 25 of Sequencer 5 CO TRIANGLE S URA RESEARCH 4 5 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers Although a sequencer may go beyond Step 31 if you define a larger SV for it only the first 32 steps can be used as contacts to the ladder logic Hence it is necessary to limit the maximum step number to not more than 31 Quite a few of the ladder logic special functions are related to the use of the sequencer These are described below 4 4 2 Advance Sequencer AVseq Increment the sequencer s step counter by one until it overflows This function is identical to and hence interchangeable with the UpCtr function 4 4 3 Resetting Sequencer RSseq The sequencer can also be reset to become inactive by the RSseq function at any time Note that a sequencer that is inactive is not the same as sequencer at Step 0 as the former does not activate the SeqN 0 contact To set the sequencer to step 0 use the StepN function described next 4 4 4 Setting Sequencer to Step N StepN In certain applications it may be more convenient to be able to set the sequencer to a known step asynchronously This function will set the selected sequencer to step N regardless of its current step number or logic state The ability to jump steps is a very power
220. n for connection to the Internet the Gateway IP Address is not needed and can be set to 0 0 0 0 But if you plan to use the Fserver s email capability then you must fill in the correct Gateway IP Address Ask your system administrator if you have any question about this 2 1 3 SMTP Server IP Address The SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol Server field lets you define the IP address of the email server that the PLC can use to send out emails from user s program please see section 2 3 3 for more details on how to program the PLC to send emails This is the same SMTP server that your normal email client software such as Thunderbird or MS Outlook uses to send out email You can ask your Internet Service Provider ISP for the IP address of their SMTP server The ISP usually provides the SMTP server in domain name form such as mail sbcglobal net but you should also be able to request the numerical IP address of the SMTP server from the ISP For Windows XP or Vista users you can resolve the IP address as follows First launch the Command Prompt window Then enter the command nslookup lt smtpserver name gt to get the IP address An example is shown below where the IP address of mail sbcglobal net is resolved to the IP address 207 115 36 120 C ayer Pde mail lobal net WK Shawcable net Server Address Non author Figure 2 1 3 Windows users may also search the Internet for a free host exe tool th
221. n would return 1 until the key has been released and a new key or the same key is being pressed again A sample program IRremoteControl Pc6 that turns on output 1 to 10 in response to a key press of 0 to 9 received from a Sony TV remote can be downloaded from hitp www tri plc com trilogi FPLCsamples zip This program also demonstrates how to turn the key presses on the IR remote into a numerical keypad The entered number is displayed on the LCD display along with the IR code You can use the volume up button to accept the entry into variable B and use the volume down button to delete the wrongly entered number The sample program is ready to use and you can transfer it to the PLC and use a Sony TV remote control to test it immediately O E TRIANGLE 17 2 Line RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 17 IR Remote Control 17 3 1 Relocating The IR Remote Sensor If the PLC is installed inside an opaque enclosure and you want to be able to aim your remote at it without opening the enclosure then you need to relocate the IR sensor to the external surface of the enclosure We enable you to do this easily by installing the IR sensor with long leads so that you can cut the lead and relocate it to a desirable location You will need to connect 3 wires to the leads of the sensor and the other ends of the wires are to be soldered to the Fx2424 PCB We have provided 3 blank solder pads next to the original sensor solder pad j
222. nation address has been correctly setup by entering ATDH and ATDL without any parameters and the XBEE module would return the previously defined destination address You can enter ATWR if you wish to store the destination address into non volatile memory Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication un x cTu com7 About PC Settings Range Test Terminal Modem Configuration Line Status Assert free Show SAGE OTR ATS Break Com Port Hex Clear Screen Assemble Packet 0K a ATDH0013A200 OK ATDL403E0279 ATDH 13A200 ATDL 403E0279 4 0K ATWR C COM 9600 8 N 1 FLOW NONE Rix 31 bytes Note XBEE automatically exits command mode within 10 seconds of no activity so if you enter a command and did not see any response then you need to re enter command mode by typing again and then re enter the command If you have another PC connected to the Router s interface board via RS232 you can run the HyperTerminal program default to 9600 bps 8 data bit 1 stop bit and no parity to test the connection Once the coordinator is connected to the router designated by the ATDH amp ATDL command anything you type on the terminal at the coordinator terminal side will appear at the router terminal screen and vice versa This means that you now have a proper transparent connection between the coordinator and the router Next you can turn off power to the Rout
223. nction You can change the current step of Sequencer easily from within a Custom Function by changing the present value of their equivalent counter E g Sequencer 3 is the same as Counter 3 thus if you wish to assign Sequencer 3 to Step 10 you can achieve it as follows CTRPV 3 10 TR TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL 4 7 Chapter 5 Analog I Os Chapter 5 Analog Inputs and Outputs H m v TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os 5 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 5 1 Analog Power Supply The analog power of the PLC is derived from the same 12 to 24VDC power supply as the CPU It will generate a stable 5V 41 accuracy regulated DC voltage source that will be used internally as voltage reference and is available externally for use by other analog input devices The reference voltage output is available on the analog I O connector pin 15 and may be used as the source voltage for connecting to potentiometers Its current is limited to 10mA only Thus if you need more current for your analog device you will need to supply your own quiet 5V DC source The analog reference voltage is generated by a stable voltage reference IC LM4040 5 0 on the carrier board and is not user adjustable 5 2 Analog Inputs Each Fx2424 PLC is equipped with 2 independent 12 bit A D Analog to Digital converters Each A D converter multiplexes with up to 4 Analog input pins giving a total of 8 analog input ch
224. nd the devices connected to the router such as the PLC and PC Before You Begin The first thing you need to do is configure the network settings in the PLC to match those of the LAN This is typically done as follows 1 Find out what your routers gateway address is typically 192 168 1 1 or 192 168 0 1 and what static IP addresses are free to use with your PLC NOTE if the routers gateway address is 192 168 1 1 the default PLC IP address 192 168 1 5 will most likely work unless it is already used by another device on the same network If it is free to use the next two steps can be skipped as the PLC will already be able to connect to the LAN 2 Connect to the PLCs serial port from the PC with TRILOGI and TLServer 3 Edit the PLC network settings using the Ethernet amp ADC Configuration tool from the Controller menu in TRILOGI Only the IP address is necessary to configure for basic connection to the LAN Please refer to the Quick Connection guide in appendix 1 of the i TRiILOGI Programmers Reference Manual to connect the PLC to your PC via serial port Please refer to section 2 1 of this manual for more detailed information on network configuration Network Wiring You will likely already have a network available that consists of an Internet modem that provides Internet to a wired or wireless router which has at least one PC connected to it In this case all that needs to be done is connect the PLC to the ro
225. ne degree C If the master PLC does not receive updated information it can then assume that the temperature did not change Of course in order to ensure that all the slave PLCs are still operational and are connected in the network you can also design the system in such a way that the master PLC expects the slave PLC to always send a message within a certain time say every 5 minute The master will query the slave if it did not see any update after a certain amount of time and it could sound an alarm if it discovers that the slave is no longer accessible on the ZigBee network We have created a simple demonstration project based on the abovementioned arrangement You can download the demo programs from the following URL http www tri plc com trilogi XBEE TransparentModeMasterSlaveDemo zip In this project two F series PLCs with XBEE Router modules are used as slave controllers and they will only send ASCII strings to the master PLC when its digital input status has changed The master PLC will interpret the ASCII string and extract the input status of the two PLCs and then echo them on the master s PLC digital output 1 16 for the first PLC and 17 32 for the second PLC It is a simple project but does illustrate the concept well and you should be able to easily modify the programs to suit your application needs 19 4 Using The XBEE s API Mode To be Appended ang T V TRIANGLE 19 8 i RESEARCH LI INTERNATIONAL Chapter
226. nformation on the WAN E g The DNS server address you can see from the following screen is 64 59 144 92 Connection Type DHCP Client QoS Engine Active Cable Status Connected Network Status Established Connection Up Time 4 Day 16 Hour 58 Min 51 Sec MAC Address 00 0F B0 01 0D 1D IP Address 24 81 71 204 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Default Gateway 24 81 68 1 Primary DNS Server 64 59 144 92 Secondary DNS Server 64 59 144 93 2 1 5 No of Connections FServer Modbus TCP The F series CPU assigns sufficient memory to support up to a maximum of 6 simultaneous TCP IP connections to the FServer and Modbus TCP server By default each server is assigned a maximum of 3 connections each However to improve flexibility you can re assign the mix of maximum connections between the two servers as long as the no of Modbus TCP connections does not exceed 5 and the no of FServer connections does not exceed 4 This means that you can define 1 to 4 FServer connections and 2 to 5 Modbus TCP connections When you change the number in one box the other box will change automatically so that the total number of possible connections remains at 6 2 1 6 FServer Port No The Port number is a 16 bit integer range 0 to 65535 that needs to be specified on top of the IP address when accessing the FServer from across the network The default value is 9080 which is the same default value used by the TLServer and TRILOGI client software P
227. ng bar code data every few seconds it is better to use the system clock pulses e g Clk 1 0s to trigger a dCusF 3 Always try to keep your interrupt service routine short and ensure that it will not end up in an endless loop The TBASIC custom function execution time should be much shorter than the period of the PTI events Otherwise you may find that the CPU will be spending most of its time servicing the PTI interrupt routine leaving very little time for scanning the ladder program and that will have an adverse impact on the CPU performance 9 3 Power Failure Interrupt PFI The Fx2424 CPU has a power failure sensing circuit that will call a custom function when it detects an impending power failure This allows you to save critical data to the PLC s non volatile memory see Section 1 7 2 just before power failure The syntax for the PFI is as follow INTRDEF 17 cfnum 1 Interrupt 17 is reserved for PFI cfnum custom function number to execute when PTI event takes place E g INTRDEF 17 256 1 call function 256 when power failure occur r Tri eee 9 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control cD TRIANGLE W URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control 10 STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL 10 1 Technical Specifications No of Channels full driver Max Pulse Rate pps 10000 single channel running Continuous Current per phase
228. ng resistor to fix the logic states to a known state Although in a lab environment the PLCs may be able to communicate without the biasing resistors their use is strongly recommended for industrial applications 15 5 2 Protection of RS485 Interface The simple direct multi drop wiring shown in Figure 15 2 will work well if all the networked PLCs are in close proximity and they all share a common power supply They will even work for long distance as long as there are no wiring errors However in an industrial environment the PLCs are most likely far apart and may each have their own power supply Since processes are often modified regularly should somebody on one occasion by mistake short one of the PLC s RS485 to high voltage all the PLCs connected to the same RS485 wiring will be fried simultaneously This can result in very costly down time for the whole process because all of the PLCs connected to the network will need to be repaired Hence for networking over long distances and involving more than a few PLCs it is important to either strengthen or protect the RS485 interface as described below 1 You can replace the standard RS485 driver 75HVD3082 on the PLC with a fault tolerant RS485 driver IC part number LT1785AIN8 This 8 pin IC is made by Linear Technology and can Tri eee 15 6 INTERNATIONAL j Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol withstand wrong voltages of up to 60V The LT1785AIN8 is a 1 4 power RS
229. nne nnnn nnne nnne nnnn nannaa 1 12 1 10 CPU Status Indicators cceeceseeeeeeeeeenee en eeeeeeee ee saeesenneeeneeeeseaesesaeesaseeeeeeeeeseesaseeesnsneeeeeeaeas 1 13 1 10 1 ATC Error Green LED EE 1 13 1 10 2 Pase Red LED EE 1 13 1 10 3 Run Error Red RETTEN 1 13 ETHERNET PORT 2 1 2 1 Configuring The Ethernet Port cc ssccccsssesceesseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenneaeeeensneaeeeenneeeeenseaeenenees 2 1 ZV IP ADA EEN 2 2 2 1 2 GateWay IP Addr o0 eccceccceceeeeeeeeeeceee eee aeeeeeee sees eee aeeeeaaeeeeeee sae eeegaaeegeeeeseeeeeaeeseaaeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 2 1 3 SMTP Server IP Address cence cage eeeaaeseeeeeeeaaeeseaaeseneeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeee 2 3 2 1 4 DNS Server IP Address 2 3 2 1 5 Noof Connections FServer Modbus TC 2 4 2 1 6 FServer Port NO cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeeaeeeeaaeegeeeeecaaeseeaaesgeeeeseaeeseaaeseeaeesgaeeeseaeeeeaaeessaneeeeaeen 2 4 2 1 7 Modbus TCP Secondary Port No 2 4 2 1 8 LAN Speed TE 2 5 21 9 Node NaMe 20 cece cece eeee cece ce eenee eee aeeeeaaesaeeeeaaeeeeaae ee eaaesaeeeesaaeeecaaesgeaeeesnaeeseaaeegeeaeseeeeeseaees 2 5 2 1 10 Username and Password FServer ov 2 5 2 1 11 Use Username Password vesahol 2 5 2 1 12 ACCESS Level ai ciienissegiiceneds cc nats desezendnnen used enina aanne aaide 2 5 2 1 13 Advanced Confouratton nnna 2 5 o_O TRIANGLE iji URA RESEARCH Page iii INTERNATIONAL USER MANUAL 2 1 14 Standalone Version of Ethernet Configuration Software
230. no need for PLC to execute SETDAC to update the analog output amg Del Daer 16 18 r INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format Command Format pW At na n c c 16 16 161 6 16 16 Nm ee ee Se egenen a Starting Analog channel DAC output data DAC output data channel 01 02h count for 1 channel for subsequent ch Hex Response Format KT channel count Hex 16 45Write EEPROM Integer Data Command Format haa Starting EEPROM count Hex data for starting Address 0001 xxxx 01 10h EEPROM address 16 16 16 16 Tele data for subsequent EEPROM addresses Response Format Maximum allowable word count per command is 16 01 to 10 Hex 16 46WRITE EEPROM String Data Command Format wjxis n njonjnjafajl falo EEPROM String ASCII characters Address Hex max 40 characters Response Format wjxjs gt o E g To write the string data Hello TRI at EEPROM String address 12 send host link command RX 000CHello TRix T Ten Resear 16 19 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format 16 47 Force Set Clear Single UO Bit This new Wbnnnnxx command allows you to change a single I O bit on the PLC You can force set or clear any single input output relay timer or counter bit This has an advantage over other write commands such as WI WO etc that affects the entire group o
231. not to respond to a host link command that it received via the XBEE channel 19 3 3 Wring TBASIC Program To Configure XBEE So far we have been using the X CTU Terminal software provided by Digi to manually enter command mode to configure the XBEE module such as to set the destination address This is useful as it gives us the visibility of what s going on when you send commands to the XBEE module For real world applications you may want to program the Fx2424 PLC to configure the XBEE module instead of doing it manually by X CTU software To put the XBEE module into transparent mode the PLC needs to send three character to COMM2 while observing the guard time before and after the characters We also find that adding a small delay between each character works better If successful the XBEE module would return an OK string that is terminated with a carriage return You can use the INPUT 2 command to read the OK string as a confirmation that the command mode has been entered Next you can use the PRINT 2 statement to send the commands to the XBEE module and the INPUT 2 statement to read the response We have created a sample program XBEE COMM2 PC6 that will put the XBEE module into command mode and send a command string stored in A to the XBEE module and return the response string from XBEE in A back to the calling program You can download the sample program from http Awww tri plc com trilogi
232. nsidered to lead the input 2 and HSC 1 will be incremented Likewise if input 1 is OFF then pulse trains arriving at input 2 will decrement HSC 1 Inputs 3 and 4 form the inputs for High Speed Counter channel 2 and Inputs 5 and 6 form the inputs for High Speed Counter channel 3 HSC 2 and HSC 3 operate in the same way as HSC 1 described above The fact that the Fx2424 automatically takes care of the direction of rotation of the quadrature encoder greatly simplifies the programmer s task of handling high speed encoder feedback The HSCDEF statement can be used to define a CusFn to be executed when the HSC reaches a certain pre defined value Within this CusFn you can define the actions to be taken and define the next CusFn to be executed when the HSC reaches another value Please note that the HSDDEF statement will also activate the Pulse Measurement hardware as described in the Pulse Measurement section A programming example of the HSC can be found in your iTRILOGI program folder C TRiLOGI TL6 usr samples HighSpeedCtr PC6 r agm V TRIANGLE 7 1 UTR RESEARCH LN INTERNATIONAL Chapter 7 High Speed Counters 7 2 Enhanced Quadrature Decoding The default method in which the PLC handles quadrature signals as described above is somewhat simplistic It does not take into consideration the jiggling effect that occurs when the encoder is positioned at the transition edge of a phase Mechanical vibration could caus
233. ntact by selecting the 1 component from the toolbar ES and then selecting the digital input from the I O Table The contact will then be automatically placed in the ladder logic circuit The same can be done for the output coil by selecting the 7 component from the toolbar O and then selecting an output that has been entered into the I O Table After selecting one input and one output the ladder logic circuit should like something like Figure 3 3 below KE TRILOGI Version 6 13 Untitled File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help cireuit 1 SR JAR JAE 9 94 Foto H gt Inputt Figure 3 3 Completed Ladder Circuit 3 2 4 3 Example 3 Creating a Latching Relay Circuit The first part of the circuit follows the same procedure as the previous example except that the 7 coil should be a Relay coil So it should look similar to the circuit in Figure 3 3 The next part requires a parallel contact to be added to the Input contact This is done by selecting the Input contact or whichever contact was used and then adding the 3 contact HF as shown in Figure 3 4 below KS TRILOGI Version 6 13 Untitled File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Circuit 1 Ary HHAH H Je SF ng HF ng gt Relay1 Input Relay1 RLY Figure 3 4 Completed Latching Circuit 3 3 Programming DIO in a Custom Function In order to program digital I O or anything in a custom function a custom function must be created
234. nteractive objects as well as their main color size and name properties However the level 2 user modification area allows you to go further and customize some style details such as font text size more colors and other layout style properties We recommend that only expert HTML programmers make any changes to this area but even users with basic HTML knowledge should be able to make some changes by trial and error However we do not provide support for making changes to this area and we advise that back up copies are kept in case you find that the web page is not working and you may need to refer to the original copy i O D TRIANGLE 2 45 LRR RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 3 I O and Internal Relays Programming Chapter 3 UO and Internal Relays Programming E CA v TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 3 I O and Internal Relays Programming 3 PROGRAMMING I O AND INTERNAL RELAYS 3 1 Introduction The Fx2424 will have a certain no of physical digital inputs and outputs depending on the particular model but all will have 512 internal relays available in both ladder logic and BASIC 3 2 Programming DIO with Ladder Logic The physical I O and internal relays can be programmed in ladder logic in a few simple steps 3 2 1 For Physical UO 1 Edit the label names 2 Place the input contact s into the ladder logic circuit 3 Place the output coil at the end of the ladder logic circuit 3 2 2 For
235. ntered into the custom function which allows the possibility of total control of all of the PLCs functions and hardware There are 7 TBASIC functions available to control all of the digital I O which are SETIO labelname CLRIO abelname TOGGLEIO abelname TESTIO labelname SETBIT v n CLRBIT v n TESTBIT v n F Ome Oe Each function has its own advantage depending on what needs to be done to a digital I O Each of these functions is explained in the programmer s reference manual which should be referred to for further information Here are some examples of how to control digital UO using these functions INTERNATIONAL O TRIANGLE TRY RESEARCH 3 3 Chapter 3 I O and Internal Relays Programming 3 3 3 Example 1 Turn on off an Output This can be done using both the SETBIT v n CLRBIT v n command and the SETIO abeiname CLRIO labelname command 1 Using SETBIT v n CLRBIT vn SETBIT OUTPUT 1 0 This will turn on the first output using the output register CLRBIT OUTPUT 1 7 This will turn off the 8th output using the output register 2 Using SETIO labelname CLRIO labelname SETIO oun This will turn on the output out1 CLRIO out5 This will turn off the output outS In this case out and out5 would need to be entered in the I O Table as an output Otherwise there will be a compilation error 3 3 4 Example 2 Toggle an Output TOGGLEIO light This will change the output light from off
236. nuous Update Refresh Cycie t 55 C Zone 1 Temp HHH fo C Zone 2 Temp Los Angeles 18 45 22 cm Gr New York 21 45 23 BER London 2 45 23 Tokyo 9 45 24 2070 Triangle Research Init inc All rights Rserved 2010 Triangle Research int l inc Alt rights Rserved Figure 2 10 1 Figure 2 10 2 2 10 2 Control and Monitoring Components in the Default HTML Files The 0 HTM and 2 HTM files both include the same components but they are arranged and configured differently with a different background image set Both files have the following components available Background Image which can be defined in the HTML file LCD Display which will display whatever the PLC program is displaying on an LCD screen 8 internal relay bits as buttons with configurable label names 4 Data Memory variables DM 1 DM 4 with configurable label names Continuous Update checkbox with cycle count and refresh button Background Image In the 0 HTM file the background image is set to the gray border picture and all the other components are positioned inside the blue border The background image should be a JPEG file loaded from any webserver The 0 HTM background image is loaded locally U JPG but the 2 HTM background image are loaded from the TRI PLC server LCD Display Los Angeles 16 28 58 New York 21 28 58 London 2 28 58 Tokyo 9 28 58 Figure 2 10 3 The LCD display is positioned at the top of the i
237. nverters today use the RTS signal to control the RS485 transmitter direction which is supported by the TLServer software However we strongly recommend an auto turnaround type of converter such as the Auto485 adapter configured in Auto mode for use with Windows programs Under Windows the application software does not have very deterministic control of the RTS pin at precise timing and that can contribute to the occasional loss of communication when the RS485 transceiver is not switched at the proper moment Programming via COMM2 or COMMS is particularly useful if COMM1 is already assigned to other tasks such as interfacing to modem bar code readers a SCADA system or MMI The programmer can continue to program and monitor the PLC using its RS485 port while its COMM1 is actively communicating with other devices This makes it much easier to troubleshoot communication problems O a TRIANGLE 14 2 Lied RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 14 Serial Communications at COMM1 since you can continuously monitor the data exchange between the PLC and the external devices connected to its COMM1 Of course since the Fx2424 PLC has a built in Ethernet port you can always program it via the local area network But the fact that all 3 serial ports can be programming ports makes them truly flexible for many industrial applications 14 3 2 Accessing 3 Party RS485 based Devices There are more and more industrial devices such as ele
238. o II J Leen m Zero Offsetlo g 0 o 0 0 lo 0 ADC Moving Avg o RTC Calib 0 of data points Ee Figure 5 9 5 5 1 ADC Calib These fields are used to apply a multiplication factor to the value returned by ADC function The multiplication factor 1 x 10000 Example 1 If you apply 2 500V to ADC 1 you would expect the value returned by ADC 1 to be 2048 But the actual average reading centers around 2060 Proportional Error 2060 2048 1 005859 Multiplication factor required to correct this error 1 1 005859 0 9942 1 58 10000 gt X 58 You should therefore enter a value of 58 into the ADC Calib field for Ch 1 and save it to the PLC After the PLC has rebooted the CPU would apply the multiplication factor of 0 9942 to the readings it received which would correct the reading to 2060 x 0 9942 2048 Example 2 If you apply 4 000V to ADC 8 you would expect the ADC 8 function to return a value of 4 000 5 000 x 4096 3277 However your program returned a value of 3230 from ADC 8 Proportional Error 3230 3277 0 985658 Multiplication factor required to correct this error 1 0 985658 1 0146 1 146 10000 gt X 146 RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL TRI TRIANGLE 5 9 Chapter 5 Analog I Os To compensate for this error enter a value of 146 in the ADC Calib for Ch 8 and save it to the PLC After the PLC has rebooted the CPU would apply the multi
239. o be set as white for white background LCDTextColor black LCD text color Changing the Internal Relay Bit Buttons Color The eight Input and Output buttons have two background color settings one for an ON status and one for an OFF status and a text color setting that can each be configured Text Color IOnameColor black F REN 2 44 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Background Color ONcolor yellow yellow can also be written in RGB value as ffff00 OFFcolor grey grey can also be written in RGB value as 7f 7f 7 The ONcolor value is the color that a relay bit button will turn when it has been activated The OFFcolor value is the color that a relay bit button will turn when it is deactivated Changing the Data Memory Labels and Fields Color Only the background color for the Data Memory labels can be changed in the user level 1 user modification area but not the Data Memory field where the actual data is shown background color or the Data Memory label field text color Data Memory Label Background Color DMlabelBgColor efffff The Data Memory label text color is defined by lt style gt body at the top of the 0 HTM file The Data Memory field text and background colors can be changed in the level 2 user modification area 2 10 4 Level 2 User Modifications The level 1 user modification area allowed you to quickly and easily customize the layout of the i
240. o is open the Control Panel from the Start menu by right clicking in the bottom left corner of the screen where the Start Menu is accessed below left screenshot gt fF E gt Control Panel gt Programs and Features Mobility Center Power Options Adjust your computer s settings Event Viewer si Sch System and Security Device Manager Review your computer s status Disk Management Save backup copies of your files with File History EE Find and fix problems Command Prompt SE Network and Internet Command Prompt Admin H View network status and tasks s Choose homegroup and sharing options Task Manager J Hardware and Sound Control Panel View devices and printers File Explorer Add a device Search Adjust commonly used mobility settings Run Si Programs Desktop l DN Uninstall a program 2 Open View Network Status and Tasks Window Next you need to click on the View network status and tasks link under the Network and Internet category above right screenshot which will bring up the Network and Sharing Center window below screenshot T SE Network and Internet gt Network and Sharing Center v Co Sei View your basic network information and set up connections Control Panel Home View your active networks Change adapter settings Change advanced sharing canadatri 2 settings Private network Access type Int HomeGroup Joi Connections Ett 3 Click on the Change Adapter Settings Link
241. oard with the markings shown on the right a a a Run Pause RTC Err Err All these indicators will light up for about 0 5 seconds during power on Thereafter they should go off and if any one of them remains lit it represents the various operating status of the PLC as follows 1 10 1 RTC Error Green LED If this indicator is turned ON it indicates the PLC s real time clock RTC has lost track of date and time The RTC Err flag in the Special Bit menu will also be turned ON This indicator will be turned OFF automatically after you have set the PLC s date and time using the Set PLC s Real Time Clock command in the Controller pull down menu For more information about using the RTC please refer to Chapter 12 1 10 2 Pause Red LED This indicator will be turned ON if one of the following has occurred 1 The PLC s program is corrupted 2 APAUSE statement has been executed 3 The user halts the PLC by pressing the lt P gt key during On Line Monitoring 4 DIP Switch SW1 4 is turned ON which halts the program If this light is ON please connect the host computer running i TRiILOGI to the PLC and run the On Line Monitoring program You will be informed of the reason that caused the PAUSE condition Except for condition i and iv you can release the PLC from the PAUSE state by clicking on the Pause button or by pressing the lt P gt key during On Line Monitoring
242. od in 0 1 microsecond resolution by executing the following command once only during initialization SETSYSTEM 20 1 Once the above statement is executed if PUSLEWIDTH 1 PULSEWIDTH 4 returns the value 1234 it means the measured pulse width is 123 4 us However PULSEWIDTH 5 and PULSEWIDTH 6 would still only return the measured width in microsecond A sample program can also be found on your i TRiLOGI installation folder at C TRiLOGITL6 usr samples PulseMeasurement PC6 r o T y TRIANGLE H IRR RESEARCH Chapter 8 Frequency Speed Measurement 8 2 Applications 24V EE en yore ve NPN type Optical Sensor Input 3 F Series PLC Figure 8 1 Setting Up a Simple Tachometer or Encoder 8 2 1 Measuring RPM Of A Motor One useful application of the PM capability is to measure the speed of rotation RPM of a motor A simple optical sensor coupled with a rotating disk with slots fitted to the shaft of a motor See Figure 8 1 can be fabricated economically When the motor turns the sensor will generate a series of pulses The frequency of this pulse train directly measures the rotational speed of the motor RPM Frequency x 60 and can be used to provide precise speed control Note that the above setup can also double as a low cost position feedback encoder when used with the high speed counter since the number of pulses counted can be used to determine the displacement With the Fx2424 the pulses can be
243. older pad and the pin number is also printed on the PCB Both LCD models provide yellow green LED backlight which can be powered by the same DC power supply as the PLC with the simple addition of a current limiting resistor Wiring of the backlight differs slightly for the two models as shown below It is assumed that the unit will be connected to the 24V power supply of the Fx2424 PLC If you are using other voltages then compute the values of the current limiting resistors to obtain the same backlight current taking note that the LCD backlight LED has a forward voltage drop of about 4V IMPORTANT Please ensure that the current limiting resistor is in place and wired properly before turning on the power supply Connecting the LED backlight to the 24V power supply without the current limiting resistor will definitely destroy the backlight unit Also please ensure that the polarity is connected correctly because reverse connection is likely to damage the backlight unit as well For the LCD420 the backlight is brought to a screw terminal via a small PCB Use a multi meter to check which terminal is connected to pin 15 Anode and 16 Cathode if you are unsure of the polarity CA TRIANGLE Lied RESEARCH 1 8 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide Current 90mA 24V Power Supply Current 130mA 00000000 00000000 LCD420 1500 DW 4 lines x 20 chars 24V Power Supply Figure 1 8 Wiring of LCD216
244. om Analog input 1 to 4 FOR I 1 to 4 DM I 10 ADC I 5000 4096 NEXT Figure 5 5 You can examine the readings of DM 11 to DM 14 from the Online Monitoring View Variables DM n screen These readings represent the voltages measured at the analog input pins You can also read the OH o gt TRIANGLE Toi RESEARCH 9 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os raw ADC readings which will change in the range between 0 to 4095 from the View Variables integer screen 5 2 6 Moving Average The Fx2424 PLC offers a built in Moving Average computation routine for each ADC channel When moving average is enabled the PLC firmware would store the past analog readings for each channel in its own historical memory array and each new instantaneous reading would overwrite the oldest reading When you run the ADC n function the PLC firmware would return the average of these past readings instead of the instantaneous new reading You can define a moving average of 1 to 9 points using the procedure described in Section 5 4 5 Defining a larger moving average can better help to even out fluctuations in ADC readings that can be caused by interference from digital noise However the larger the moving average the slower the ADC n function can detect a sudden change in the amplitude of the analog signal due to the averaging effect For a system that needs to quickly detect a signal change conside
245. one version of the F series Ethernet Configuration software and the built in version is that it communicates directly with the PLC via the serial port whereas the built in version requires TLServer or the FServer in order to create a connection However the standalone version can only communicate through the PLCs serial port whereas the built in version can connect to the PLC through a serial or Ethernet connection The standalone version can be useful for OEM designers who want to provide their customers with a way to configure the Ethernet settings and or calibrate the ADC and RTC settings but don t want to provide access to the programming software fe o TRIANGLE 7 Toi RESEARCH 2 6 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 2 Connecting Ethernet to the PLC Introduction All Fx2424 PLC can connect to the PC running TRILOGI many ways as follows a Wired connection to a router that the PC is also connected to PC connection can be wired or wireless b Direct connection to the PCs wired Ethernet port via crossover cable c Wireless connection to a wireless router if the PLC is connected to a wireless bridge adapter Only the first two options which are most common will be described here 2 2 1 Connecting the PLC to a Local Area Network In a typical local area network LAN there would be one router wired or both wired and wireless that the network devices connect to one modem that provides Internet to the router a
246. ore you proceed to test the FTP upload features of the PLC to avoid connection problem that is to temporarily TURN OFF the Windows Firewall and any r Ti ss 20 10 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 20 Extended File System software firewall setup by anti virus software during your test You can always re enable your software firewall s after the test if you wish PC operating system are designed to run client program normally instead of acting as a server so Windows Firewall by default is to block all incoming connections to the FTP Server Thus it can give you a lot of headache when you are trying to connect to the FTP server operating behind the Windows Firewall Notes a The main purpose of Windows Firewall is to protect your PC when you are connected to say a public wi fi network But if your PC is connected to the Internet via a router at work or at home the router hardware itself would act as a firewall to isolate your PCs and a software Firewall is actually redundant If a hacker tried to connect to a port to your public Internet IP address what he reached would be the port on the router and he would not be able to reach your PC unless you have specifically set up to forward all TCP IP messages sent to that port to a specific PC b If you really want to use the Filezilla FTP Server as a permanent server on a PC to receive files and still want to have the Windows Firewall enabled you can refer to the last section in this chapt
247. ould then send the command PASV to inform the FTP server that it wants to transfer a file in passive mode At this point you can use the PRINT 4 command to send any valid FTP command to the server including changing directory CWD command make sure the directory exist deleting a file DELE command beware of what you are deleting etc When the PLC is ready to start a file transfer to the FTP server the server will in turn provide the PLC with the port number that it has opened for the PLC to connect to establish a data connection Upon receiving this port number the PLC will make a second TCP connection to the given port and then the actual file transfer will begin A new network service command tag named FTPUPLD handles the negotiation between the FTP Server and the PLC as well as handling of the data transfer from the PLC to the FTP server The following is the syntax PRINT 4 lt FTPUPLD Zxxx yyy destination file name gt Where Zxxx yyy is the file name of the extended file that the PLC has access to The destination file name can be any legal name acceptable to the server so you can attach a date or time stamp to the file name for easy identifications When the above lt FTPUPLD gt command is run the PLC will send the actual STOR command in the background to the FTP server and then obtain the port number from the server and it will then make a data connection to it and file transfer can then beg
248. ow cost IR LED and a resistor and connect it to one of the PLC s PWM output channels see Section 17 4 for details The IR LED emitter is not included with the PLC 17 2 Applications of IR Remote Control 1 Use your IR remote control to Start Stop your machine or activate some command remotely 2 Use the remote control as a keypad to enter parameters into the PLC preferably use one with an LCD display so that you can see what you have entered rd eee 17 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 17 IR Remote Control 3 Use the remote control to enter a multi digit security code to unlock certain routines or to run some program code e g setup or calibration routine that is not normally accessible by the equipment operator 4 Teach the PLC different remote control codes so that the PLC can be programmed to control a combination of different devices by sending out IR signal to turn them ON OFF or to adjust their settings This is extremely useful for home automation HVAC or AV control tasks 17 3 Decoding Sony IR Remote Control Signal You really don t have to learn anything about how the IR signal is encoded and decoded in the Sony SIRC protocol in order to use it with the Fx2424 PLC This is because the PLC s operating system takes care of decoding the signal and it simply presents the data to you as a single 16 bit binary word However for those who are interested in how the IR signals are encoded by a Sony IR remote control you c
249. plication factor of 1 0146 to the readings it received which would correct the reading to 3230 x 1 0146 3277 Notes 1 We have created an MS Excel spreadsheet file AnalogCalibration xls to facilitate the computations of the correction factor X used in the ADC and DAC Calibration This file can be downloaded from the following web page http www tri plc com appnotes F series AnalogCalibration xls 2 Changes to the ADC calibration data only take effect after the PLC has been cold booted You can either power cycle the PLC or simply check the Reboot PLC After Save checkbox and the PLC will re boot after you have transferred the parameters to it 5 5 2 ADC Zero Offset ADC n value 4095 4094 4093 3 Zero 1 Offset 0 Input Voltage 5 00 Figure 5 10 The zero offset error can be corrected by entering a value into the ADC Zero Offset field Any number between 100 and 100 can be entered here The ADC n function would add the zero offset value that you entered here to the measured value and return the total sum to the calling routine 5 5 3 DAC Calib A value x entered in each of these fields represents the multiplication factor 1 x 10000 that the PLC will apply to the value parameter which is executed by the command SETDAC n value before actually writing to the DAC output This allows the user to apply a correction factor to the DAC out
250. pulse width between 1 00 ms to 2 00 ms to the Control input once every 20ms The servo will position the actuator to one end when it receives a pulse of 1 00ms and the other end when it receive a pulse of 2 00ms If you send it a pulse of 1 50ms it will position the actuator to the center TR RESEARCH 11 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs In PWM term 1 00ms pulse width every 20ms means a duty cycle of 1 00 20 00 5 00 2 00ms pulse width every 20ms means a duty cycle of 2 00 20 00 10 00 duty cycle So to control the position of the actuator one only needs to send it a positive PWM signal with frequency 1 0 02 50Hz and duty cycle between 5 and 10 The gear and servo feedback mechanism within the RC Servo produces a huge amount of torque relative to its weight for positioning the actuator to the position determined by the pulse width at the control input Yet once it is in the correct position the servo draws only minimum current required to maintain its position Hence being a closed loop controller an RC Servo is actually a much more efficient and effective positional control device for a limited range than a stepper motor which relies on a constant current in its winding to provide the holding torque for positioning The open loop nature of stepper motor means that it does not know if the device is actually being knocked out of its desired location whereas in the Servo any deviation from
251. put if there is a problem with the DAC voltage Example 1 If you execute SETDAC 1 2048 you would expect the DAC 1 to output 2 500V but instead you only get 2 480V CO TRIANGLE _ Ind RESEARCH 9 10 INTERNATIONAL Chapter5 Analog I Os Proportional Error 2 480 2 500 0 992 Multiplication factor required to correct the DAC output 1 0 992 1 0081 1 81 10000 You can therefore enter the value 81 into the DAC Calib field corresponding to DAC 1 and save the parameters to the PLC After the PLC has rebooted when you execute the statement SETDAC 1 2048 the CPU would apply the multiplication factor of 1 0081 to the actual digital value it sends to the DAC output The actual DAC output 2 480V x 1 0081 2 500V Example 2 Same as Example 1 but you measure 2 515V when you expect 2 500V Proportional Error 2 515 2 500 1 006 Multiplication factor required to correct the DAC output 1 1 006 0 9940 1 0 0060 You should therefore enter the value 60 into the DAC Calib field corresponding to DAC 1 and save it to the PLC After the PLC has rebooted when you execute the statement SETDAC 1 2048 the PLC will apply the multiplication factor of 0 9940 to 2048 before it writes to the DAC hardware The actual DAC output 2 515V x 0 994 2 500V 5 5 4 DAC Zero Offset If you plot the line graph for the output voltage versus the DAC set value the line should normally pass throu
252. puts etc The following table shows the timer numbers defined in TRiLOGI s Timer entry table and their corresponding channel numbers bit7 Timer Contact numbers bit CHo 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CH1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 _ 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 16 7 Read Counter Contacts Command Format RIERA EES KT 8 bit channel Hex Response Format PR c te te tal 8 bit data in Hex_ 16 7 1 Definition of Counter Contact Channel Numbers The 64 counter contacts are assigned channel s in exactly the same way as the 64 timers Please refer to the last section 16 6 Read Timer Contacts for details 16 8Read Timer Present Value P V Command Format BIvlntnxlr fo KT nn Timeri 00 Timer16 0F Timer64 3F Response Format R M 10 10 10 10 Timer present value in Decimal one V TRIANGLE 16 4 Do RESEARCH LJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 16 Host Link Command Response Format The present value PV of the specified timer is returned in decimal form as four byte ASCII text characters from 0000 to 9999 16 9Read Timer Set Value S V Command Format PR im ton n oO a oe nn Timeri 00 Timer16 0F Timer64 3F Response Format R m 10 10 10 10 LO Timer Set Value in Decimal The Set Value S V of the specified timer is returned in decimal form as
253. r Connect using in the current window lt b Local Area Connection Properties Connect using This connection uses the following items El Client for Microsoft Networks B File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Sos Packet Scheduler z lt install Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Figure 2 8 3 4 Configure IP Address and Gateway Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties By default your Ethernet settings will be Ee configured to be obtained automatically in this General Atemate Configuration case only the IP settings are set to be obtained You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports automatically This setting will not work since this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the F series PLC does not have the ability to the appropriate IP settings assign IP address to the PC s Ethernet port So you need to manually set the IP address and the Subnet mask The IP address should be on the same subnet as the IP address you have set for your PLC For example if your PLCs IP address is set to the default address of 192 168 1 5 then you should set your PCs
254. r as ordinary digital inputs or as interrupt inputs 9 2 Periodic Timer Interrupt PTI The Periodic Timer Interrupt PTI not available on T100M PLC lets you define a custom function that will be executed by the CPU precisely every x number of milliseconds ms The syntax for setting up a PTI is as follow INTRDEF 18 cfnum x Interrupt 18 is reserved for PTI cfnum custom function number to execute when PTI event takes place x The period in number of milliseconds between two PTI events E g INTRDEF 18 101 15 call function 101 every 15 ms The Periodic Timer Interrupt runs independently of the ladder logic and its execution is therefore not affected by the total PLC program scan time When the PTI timer times up the CPU will suspend the execution of the ladder logic or a non interrupt TBASIC function and immediately calls up the custom function defined by the INTRDEF 18 statement However if the CPU is currently executing a user interrupt service routine e g an input interrupt or HSC interrupt then the CPU will have to complete the current interrupt service routine before it will run the PTI interrupt function Notes 1 Limit the use of PTI only for critical code that requires precise timing between two evenis Program bugs that occur due to problems in the PTI interrupt routine may be quite hard to debug 2 For normal periodic routines such as checking for temperature or checking serial port for incomi
255. r circuit that contains one counter contact and one output the ladder logic circuit should like something like Figure 4 4 below KS TRILOGI Version 6 14 Untitled DER File Edit Controller Simulate Circuit Help Counter1 CTR Counter1 Output OUT Figure 4 4 Completed Counter Circuit O TRIANGLE TRY RESEARCH 4 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers 4 3 Programming timers and counters in Custom Function 4 3 1 Timers and Counters Present Values The present values PV of the 64 timers and 64 counters in the PLC can be accessed directly as system variables timerPV 1 to timerPV 64 for timers present value ctrPV 1 to ctrPV 64 for counters present value 4 3 2 Inputs Outputs Relays Timers and Counters Contacts The bit addressable I Os elements are organized into 16 bit integer variables TIMERBIT n and CTRBIT n so that they may be easily accessed from within a CusFn These I Os are arranged as shown in the following diagram 1 0 numbers 48 33 32 17 16 1 Bit 15 0 15 0 15 0 TIMERBIT 3 TIMERBIT 2 TIMERBIT 1 CTRBIT 3 CTRBIT 2 CTRBIT 1 4 3 3 Changing The Timer and Counter Set Values in a Custom Function You can use the SetTimerSV and SetCtrSV functions to change the Set Value SV for a timer and counter respectively An example of this is shown below SetTimerSV 1 500 Define Timer 1 to have a Set Value of 500 SetCtrSv 10 1000 Define Counter 10
256. r gt HOSTLINK lt Point to point hostlink command without gt E g Please enter the following URL into your web browser URL address space 192 168 1 5 9080 HOSTLINK IR You will see the following data appear on your browser screen IRO1 IR is one of the many host link commands that allows a host computer to read or write to the PLC s internal data space using ASCII strings This particular command IR is for reading the PLC s ID and in this case the PLC returns 01 by default For more details on the list of host link commands please refer to Chapter 15 of this manual Normally the host link commands are sent to the PLC via the serial port as per all other PLC models produced by TRi The Fserver however permits these host link commands to be sent using the HTTP protocol which enables the Fx2424 to be easily accessible by enterprise software using what is known as Web Query methods The enterprise software only needs to know the format of the host link command required to read the target data and then they can use their web query capability to query the PLC and extract the required data from the response string One example which you can try immediately is to use the Microsoft Excel 2000 or later version spreadsheet program First open a blank spreadsheet then click on the Data menu and select Get External Data gt New Web Query as shown below Microsoft Excel Bock SI File
257. r the line first before overwriting with a new string You can create a custom function just to clear a particular line E g if you pass the parameter DM 100 to the custom function and inside the custom function you do the following SETLCD DM 100 1 Hence calling this custom function with DM 100 1 2 3 or 4 would clear the corresponding line 2 A quick and lazy way to do it is to add a few more characters to the back of the string to be displayed which will wipe out old characters that could be present adjacent to the new string DI E g SETLCD 1 1 Money Sir STRS D 3 If there is data to the right of the currently displayed string that you cannot overwrite with spaces then you can restrict the number of digits that a numeric variable may be converted to using the two parameters from the STR or HEX command E g SETLCD 1 1 Temp STRS T 4 The STR T 4 function will always return 4 digits of the data stored in T If T is less than 4 digits then one or more preceding O s will be added E g if T 12 then this function will return the string 0012 Note that for negative numbers the negative sign is counted as part of the digit count so you need to provide enough spaces to take care of the sign if you need to handle both positive and negative numbers 13 4 Displaying Floating point The STR x and STR x n can convert a floating point number x into a text string which can
258. r the user s program control to be played back through an IR LED emitter user supplied connected to one of the PLC s digital outputs 5 to 8 The PLC uses the PWM capability of any one of these 4 outputs to generate the 38KHz modulating signal at a 33 duty cycle and uses the recorded timing information to re construct the IR signals Up to 128 IR remote control signal sets each with up to 128 bits of data can be recorded by the Fx2424 Any of the pre recorded IR data can be called up in any order by a user s TBASIC program This makes the Fx2424 extremely useful for home automation tasks that involve controlling devices that can only be controlled by an IR remote control signal 17 4 1 Recording IR Remote Control Data Set After the SETSYSTEM 17 1 statement has been executed as mentioned in Section 17 3 the PLC will automatically record the IR remote data set into the Current IR Buffer This buffer can only hold one IR data set of not more than 128 bits of information at any one time A new data set received will always overwrite the last data set The Fx2424 CPU has dedicated 64Kbytes of flash memory to store up to 128 data sets The data set in the Current IR Buffer can be saved to any of the 128 locations n using the following command SETSYSTEM 17 n 2000 That is to say if you run the SETSYSTEM 17 xxx with the second parameter that is between 2001 and 2128 the CPU will record the data set in the Cu
259. r using either a smaller number of moving average points or call the ADC n function more frequently so that a sudden change can be detected earlier 5 2 7 Scaling of Analog Data The 12 bit analog inputs on the Fx2424 return data in the range of 0 to 4095 which corresponds to the full range of the voltage input presented at the analog pin However very often a user needs a formula to translate this numeric data into units meaningful to the process e g degree C or F psi etc To do so you need to know at least two reference points of how the native unit maps to the PLC s ADC reading Reference Point ADC Reading x1 al x2 a2 Hence for any reading A ADC 1 the corresponding X is derived from X x1 A al gt X x2 x1 A a1 a2 a2 x1 x2 x1 a2 al Note that since x1 x2 a1 and a2 are all constants the actual formula is much simpler then it appears above E g Temperature measurement Temp ADC n 30 200 100 3000 So for any ADC readings A the temperature is X 70 A 200 2800 30 Note To get better resolution you can represent 30 degree as 300 and 100 degree as 1000 so if X 123 it means 12 3 degree O E V TRIANGLE 5 5 Ind RESEARCH LJ INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os 5 3 Temperature Measurement Using Analog Inputs 5 3 1 Thermistor Temperature Sensors A thermistor is a kind of resistor whose resistance decreases when its surrounding temperature increases It is a v
260. r wants to switch from one COMM mode to another he she often will be changing the serial connector from one device to another During this time there is no data received by the COMM port which presents an opportunity for it to reset its COMM mode However the surest way to reset the specific COMM mode is to cycle the power to the PLC so that its COMM port will be reset to AUTO mode and ready to communicate with any supported protocols r Tri es 14 5 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications 5 If you wish to use the COMM port for serial data input only you can use the SETPROTOCOL command to set the COMM port to NO PROTOCOL This can prevent the PLC from erroneously treating some serial data as the header of an incoming communication protocol and respond to it automatically The SETPROTOCOL command can also be used to set the PLC to a specific protocol This may be desirable if the COMM port has a specific role and you do not want it to enter other modes by mistake Please refer to the TBASIC Programmers Reference manual for a detailed description of the SETPROTOCOL command Note If you fix a COMM port to a non native non auto mode TRILOGI will not be able to communicate with the PLC anymore You may have to power cycle the PLC to reset the COMM mode If you use the 1st Scan contact to activate the SETPROTOCOL command then you will need to cycle the power to the PLC with DIP switch 4 set to ON to halt the ex
261. ration Properties Whether the stepper motor channels are being used to control a stepper motor driver or to drive the motor directly the STEPSPEED command must be executed first in order to define the acceleration settings Once this command has been executed the acceleration settings will not change until another STEPSPEED command is executed with different settings or if the PLC is powered down If the PLC is powered down the STEPSPEED command will need to be executed again before the stepper motor channels can be used However if a software reset executed from online monitoring or within the program the STEPSPEED command does not need to be re executed STEPSPEED ch pps acc Tat RESEARCH 10 5 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control The ch parameter should be a value between 1 and 3 Speed pps is based on the no of pulses per second pps output by the pulse generator The pps parameter should be set to a value between 1 and 10000 max rated pps for the Fx2424 The acceleration acc determines the total number of steps taken to reach full speed from a standstill and the number of steps from full speed to a complete stop The stepper motor controller calculates and performs the speed trajectory according to these parameters when the STEPMOVE or STEPMOVEABS commands are executed To set stepper motor channel 3 to a speed of 100 pps in 50 steps the command would be as follo
262. re position and velocity of a moving object in real time 10 of the digital inputs can also be defined as interrupt inputs allowing fast events to be handled in the shortest possible time and to not be constrained by the program scan time The Fx2424 is expandable up to a total of 128 digital inputs and 128 digital outputs using optional expansion modules EXP1616R and EXP4040 It has one RS232 port and two RS485 ports all of them are conversant in MODBUS protocol The built in LCD port allows for a simple interface to industry standard LCD modules from 8 characters to 80 characters Tr v TRIANGLE 123 T RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide 1 2 Physical Mounting amp Wiring The Fx2424 PLC comprises two PCBs that are stacked together in a very compact form factor There is a Fx CPU board that carries the RJ45 Ethernet port socket the DIP switch and the status LEDs There is also a battery compartment that takes one CR1632 primary lithium cell which powers the battery backed real time clock to the CPU The second PCB is the F 2424 carrier board that carries the power elements and all the I O interfaces and connectors including the power connector the RS232 and RS485 terminals the digital input and output drivers and the expansion connector There is even an Infra Red IR remote control sensor that lets you use a Sony TV or VCR remote control to control your PLC The Fx CPU board is plugged into the F 2
263. receive connection from these ports that the PLC will be using to make the command and data connections 20 14 INTERNATIONAL Tr TRIANGLE T RESEARCH Chapter 20 Extended File System Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections except for the programs and services selected below Adding exceptions allows some programs to work better but might increase your security risk Programs and Services Name Skype Skype Extres Manager Skype4 Sling Player Test_USB_ML_CF_Hardware UPnP Framework Visual Cafe Executable M Windows Home Server Connector Windows Live Call M Windows Live Messenger MA Wiindawe Maeeenner ait LE Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions Add a Port Use these settings to open a port through Windows Firewall To find the port number and protocol consult the documentation for the program or service you want to use Name FTP Server Port Port number 21 cP UDP What are the risks of opening a pot 20 8 Uploading File From PLC to FileZilla FTP Server Directory 20 8 1 Overview of The FTP Protocol The FTP protocol requires two socket connections between the devices performing the file transfer One connection is the command channel where FTP commands such as STOR or DELE and the responses are sent as plain ASCII text strings b
264. resistance between terminals 1 and 2 will be twice the resistance between terminals 1 and 5 or between 2 and 5 likewise for terminals 3 4 and 6 There will be no connectivity between terminal 1 and 3 and between terminal 2 and 4 It will however be more tricky to figure out the actual wiring of a 5 wire stepper motor since it is difficult to figure out which is the coil 1 2 and which is the coil 3 4 so some trial and error may be required to get the motor working 10 2 2 Damping Circuits Inductive Bypass Since the stepper motor windings are all inductors it is important to connect damping diodes across each winding to absorb the inductive kicks produced when the windings are turned OFF There are several ways to connect the damping circuit the simplest way is to connect a diode from the PLC s output to the Stepper motor power supply V as shown below in Figure 10 2 Figure 10 2 TR RESEARCH 10 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control The above circuit works best when the stepper motor power is the same voltage as or is a slightly higher voltage than the PLC s power supply Note The maximum stepper motor s power supply voltage must not exceed the PLC s stepper output driver breakdown voltage of 55V If the stepper motor s power supply were lower than the PLC s power supply then connecting the output shown in Figure 10 2 would result in the PLC s output LED to light up even when the output driver i
265. riptions of each command involved in the FTP file transfer Tri es 20 17 INTERNATIONAL i Chapter 20 Extended File System 20 9 Setting Up A FTP Server Behind a Windows Firewall Please refer to the following Microsoft document describing issues and solutions related to FTP server behind the Windows Firewall http technet microsoft com en us library dd421710 WS 10 aspx Microsoft focuses mainly on the FTP server in their IIS server for obvious reasons instead of Filezilla If you are setting Filezilla as a permanent FTP server behind a software firewall you can try to make the following configuration setup 1 You must specifically setup a range of port number for Passive mode use These are the port number that Filezilla will assign to the PLC to make a data channel connection when it attempts to transfer a file using passive mode The following is an example where two port numbers are assigned so that two PLCs may connect to the Filezilla simultaneously You can add a larger port range if more PLCs may connect to the FTP Server simultaneously FileZilla Server Options General settings A BBE ter ers Welcome messi IP bindings V Use custom port range 41000 41001 1 65535 IP Filter EE EEN beneiden IPv4 specific Securty settings Miscellaneous External Server IP Address for Use custom PASV settings if you Admin kene ai passive mode transfers are operating the server from Ke Default behind a NAT
266. rom the Start menu by selecting Network as shown here Ti aes 2 12 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Computer Connect To POWERPNT EXE calc exe Control Panel hotopnt exe Bar P Default Programs fiezilaexe Help and Support Ki WindowsPhotoGallery exe Windows Security a notepad exe gt AllPrograms Ktart Search 2 Open Network and Sharing Center In the Network window click on the Network and Sharing Center option on the top pane as in the below picture f Ke a b Network gt DEZ File Edit View Tools Help og aap tanner pease arc menipe near year ese cas Network and sharing Center Add a printer Gy Organize ez Views v 3 Manage Network Connections In the Network and Sharing Center window click on the Manage network connections option under the tasks pane on the left side of the window as in the below picture a kr Ney 55 gt Control Panel Network and Sharing Center File Edit View Tools Help E Network and Sharir View computers and devices Connect to a network Set up a connection or network A Za Manage network connections TRI RICHM 4 Follow steps 2 5 in the Windows XP Ethernet Configuration section above to complete the setup as it is the same process TR RESEARCH 2 13 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Windows 8 Ethernet Configuration 1 Open the Network Window The first thing you will need to d
267. ronounced when a Modbus slave device fails to respond e g not online The system designer must therefore take this into consideration when designing the system 1 The Modbus TCP client should not overload the Modbus gateway with unnecessarily frequent Modbus requests Whenever the PLC report a TARGET DEVICED FAILED TO RESPOND function the client program should back off for a while before re trying communication with the Modbus RTU slaves again 2 You can change the number of wait states the gateway will wait for a response from the Modbus RTU slave by running SETSYSTEM 1 w Where w number of serial port wait states for each COMM port as follow Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Ethernet COMM3 COMM2 COMM1 Thus each COMM port could be configured to wait from 0 to 3 wait states for a response The default settings for w amp H55 or 01010101 binary which means each COMM port as well as the Ethernet port uses 1 wait state of about 150ms 3 You can change the number of retries default 2 the gateway will attempt to get a response from the Modbus RTU slave by running SETSYSTEM 2 n TR RESEARCH 21 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 21 Using PLC As A Modbus TCP Gateway Where n number of retries for each COMM port as follow Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Ethernet COMM3 COMM2 COMM1 Thu
268. router or a firewall going In that case the IP address of GSS Settings O Use the following IP the server is not accessible from Speed Limits outside of the router so you Filetransfer compres should fill in the correct address SSL TLS settings You can also enter hostnames i erg eeh on eg F iii v O Retrieve external IP address from ariei dea SS router Information for users with dynamic IPs If your external IP changes it might take up to 5 minutes after the next failed transfer until FileZilla Server recognizes the changed IP In most cases the IP is updated within 30s after a failed transfer Don t use external IP for local connections Next open up Windows Firewall and add to the Exception list the port 21 command port and ports 41000 to 41001 or whatever range limit you have set to in the FileZilla Setup screen This should allow the FTP Server to receive connection from these ports that the PLC will be using to make the command and data connections INTERNATIONAL TRI RESEARCH 20 18 Windows Firewall General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections except for the programs and services selected below Adding exceptions allows some programs to work better but might increase your security risk Programs and Services Name Skype Skype Eres Manager Skype4 Sling Player Test_USB_ML_CF_Hardware UPnP Framework Visual Cafe Executable Windows
269. rrent IR Buffer into the reserved flash memory i an V TRIANGLE 17 3 p RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 17 IR Remote Control 17 4 2 Loading IR Remote Control Data Set Any of the 128 data sets that are previously stored in the flash memory can be loaded back into the Current IR Buffer using the following command SETSYSTEM 17 n 1000 That is to say if you run the SETSYSTEM 17 xxx command with the second parameter that is between 1001 and 1128 the CPU will load the previously recorded data back into the Current IR Buffer You can use the techniques discussed in the next subsection to playback the IR remote signal that is currently in the Current IR Buffer 17 4 3 Playback of IR Remote Control Signal If your application requires the PLC to send out IR signals to your devices then you have to construct an IR emitter as shown in the following diagram Power Supply Can be any voltage from 5V to 24V DC V 24VDC but most convenient to use the same V of the PLC s power supply IR LED Not included Most Infra Red LEDs that you purchase from Digikey can be used R1 You may also salvage one from an old remote control F2424 IR LED a R1 It depends on the current I1 that the LED can handle and the output power you want Typically 20 to 50mA should be adequate Output 5 R TI 32 1 6 7 or 8 E g for 50mA V 24V
270. rror response will be received Error Response Format Device ID Header FCS Terminator The host computer program should always check the returned response for possibilities of errors in the command and take necessary action 15 4 6 SHOULD YOU USE POINT TO POINT OR MULTI POINT PROTOCOL Although at first the point to point protocol appears simpler in format having no ID and no FCS computation the communication procedure is actually more complex since it involves the need to synchronize the two communicating devices by exchanging the Control E character The lack of error checking also makes the protocol less reliable especially in noisy environment In fact the TLServer software will only accept multi point communication protocol from the client software with the exception of the IR command which is needed to obtain the ID of a PLC with unknown ID Hence if you were to write your own communication program to talk to the PLCs we would strongly recommend using only the multi point protocol exclusively due to its simplicity and built in error checking capability I Tri eee 15 5 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 15 Host Link Communication Protocol 15 5RS485 Primer 15 5 1 RS485 Network Interface Hardware The built in RS 485 interface allows the Fx PLCs to be networked together using very low cost twisted pair cables Since the Fx PLCs are fitted with a 1 8 power RS485 driver such as the 75HVD3082 up to 256 devices can
271. rs the AD 5 to 8 However to convert 0 20mA or 4 20mA current source into 0 5V or 1 5V voltage signal you should use a 253 16 ohm resistor which when paralleled with the 20K ohm of internal impedance will yield a 250 0 ohm total resistance You can obtain 253 16 ohm by combining a 250 ohm and a 3 16 ohm metal film resistor 5 2 3 Interfacing to two wire 4 20mA sensors Many 4 20mA analog sensors only have two wire connections and are designed to be powered by the 4 20mA output current that flows through it These types of sensors can be interfaced easily to the 0 5V analog inputs of the PLC as shown in the following diagram PLC s V V4 C s V 12 or 24V P S for PLC And Sensors ADC Input PLC s 0V For ADC 5 to 8 use a 253 16 ohm resistor instead of 250 ohms as explained in 5 2 2 The sensor output will be converted to a 1 5V analog voltage and can be read by the PLC using the ADC n statement which will return readings of between 819 and 4095 E Tri eee 5 3 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 5 Analog I Os 5 2 4 Using Potentiometer to Set Parameters A potentiometer can provide a very low cost means for users to input parameters to the PLC such as temperature settings timer or counter preset values etc The diagram above shows how easy it is to implement such a device using the 5V reference output and an analog input Very accurate parameters can be set if the LCD display is used as visual feedback of
272. rt number 9080 However the Modbus TCP port is not accessible from the Internet since this port number is not opened and not mapped by the router You should read your router s User s Manual to find out how to configure the router to perform the port forwarding described above since each router model has a different user interface For example on the D Link DI 624 router you configure the router by clicking on the Advanced tab and selecting Virtual Server from the router configuration page as shown below D Link Building Networks for People High Speed 2 4GHz Wireless Ro DI 624 Home A Tools Status Virtual Server is used to allow Internet users access to LAN services Enabled Disabled Name Clear Applications Private IP Protocol Type TCP e Filters Private Port WI TR RESEARCH 2 31 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port On the Linksys WRT54G router you would configure it from the Applications amp Gaming menu under the Port Range Forward tab as shown below LiNnKSYS A Division of Cisco Systems Inc Wireless G Broad Applications H F Access Applications amp Gaming Setup Wireless Security iat ese a Camini Port Range Forward Port Triggering DMZ Port Range Forward Port Range 2 8 2 Large Corporate Local Area Network In the case of a medium to large corporate LAN whether incoming and outgoing TCP IP packets are allowed to go throug
273. ruct the Fx2424 s operating system to perform a number of network related functions client connection via the Ethernet port These commands allow the PLC to connect remotely to another PLC in another building or another part of the world via the Internet This allows peer to peer networking or so called M2M machine to machine communication to take place between the PLCs Notes 1 In the case of the TLServer the PLC typically communicates with these external hardware or software servers via its COMM1 serial port and thus TBASIC statements and functions such as PRINT 1 INPUT 1 and NETCMD 1 are used since the NS commands are sent through the serial port 1 2 Since the Ethernet is already built in on the Fx2424 you do not need to send NS commands via any of its serial ports this also means that no serial port is sacrificed in order to have access to Ethernet communication However to help users of the XServer and TLServer migrate easily to the Fx2424 Ethernet port we implement the NS commands using similar command format as that on the XServer and TLServer But instead of sending the commands through COMM1 you will interact with the O S through COMM port 4 Of course since the Fx2424 doesn t have 4 serial ports COMM port 4 is therefore only a virtual comm port and its creation is merely to simplify implementation of the NS commands 3 The TestEthernet pc6 download from http www tri plc com tri
274. s each COMM port could be configured to re attempt to send the command from 0 to 3 times if it does not get a response from a Modbus RTU slave The default settings for n amp HAA or 10101010 binary which means each COMM port as well as the Ethernet port will retry twice making a total of 3 attempts E g If you run SETSYSTEM 2 0 the gateway will not resend the RTU command on any of its COMM port if does not receive a response on the first attempt This can help to reduce the CPU scan time if a Modbus RTC slave does not respond 4 We strongly recommend that the serial port n that is to be used as a gateway serial port be configured to be No protocol by running the SETPROTOCOL n 10 statement once This is to ensure that the serial data returned from the RTU slaves will never be interpreted wrongly by the master PLC as incoming commands which could lead to errors The same advise applies to PLC programs that use the serial port to run READMODBUS WRITEMODBUS READMB2 and WRITEMB2 commands 21 5 Modbus TCP Gateway Sample Program Please download the following self explanatory TRiLOGI sample program that demonstrates the new Modbus TCP Gateway capability via any of the selected COMM port http Awww tri plc com trilogi modbusgateway zip TR RESEARCH 21 3 INTERNATIONAL
275. s in the following chapters rn a 2 TRIANGLE S URA RESEARCH o INTERNATIONAL eege Da TRIANGLE RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 7 High Speed Counters Chapter 7 High Speed Counters Chapter 7 High Speed Counters 7 HIGH SPEED COUNTERS Technical Specifications No of Channels Maximum acceptable pulse rate 10KHz per channel Quadrature signal decoding Relevant TBASIC Commands HSCDEF HSCOFF HSCPVI 7 1 Introduction Digital inputs 1 2 3 4 and 5 6 form three channels of high speed counter inputs which can interfaced directly to a rotary encoder that produces quadrature outputs A quadrature encoder produces two pulse trains at a 90 phase shift from each other as follows Direction of Rotation 90 i gt Phase A Phase B 90 Direction of Rotation Figure 7 1 When the encoder shaft rotates in one direction phase A leads phase B by 90 degrees When the shaft rotates in the opposite direction phase B will lead phase A by 90 degrees The quadrature signals therefore provide an indication of the direction of rotation The Fx2424 handles the quadrature signals as follows if the pulse train arriving at input 1 leads the pulse train at input 2 the High Speed Counter HSC 1 increments on every pulse If the pulse train arriving at input 1 lags the pulse trains at input 2 then the HSC 1 decrements Note that if input 2 is OFF then pulse trains arriving at input 1 are co
276. s off This is because the PLC s output LED is tied to the PLC s power supply and a lower voltage at the load s power supply would cause current to flow out of the PLC s output terminal into the load s power supply and therefore turning on the output LEDs Although this should not affect the driver s function it can be misleading to the user as to the PLC s output state Hence we recommend connecting a diode in series with each of the PLC s outputs to block such reverse current flow F2424 PLC Figure 10 3 If V is lower voltage than PLC s power supply voltage 10 3 Stepper Motor Controller If the built in stepper driver is not suitable for your application e g if you need micro stepping or you need to drive a very high power stepper motor then you can use an external stepper motor driver and use the PLC to send direction and output pulses to the stepper motor driver When configured as a Stepper Motor Controller the PLC would generate the required number of pulses and sets the direction signal according to the defined acceleration and maximum pulsing rate specified by STEPSPEED and STEPMOVE commands The pulse and direction outputs are not meant to be connected directly to the stepper motor Instead you will need a stepper motor driver which you can buy from the motor vendor Depending on the power output the number of phases of the stepper motor and whether you need micro stepping the driv
277. s unable to send any data or list the directory because there is no data channel connection for it to do so However sometimes the problem could persist after disabling all firewalls and in that case the only option is to revert to an older version of FileZilla and then transfer the files by doing a right click download or right click upload if drag and drop doesn t work You can do this as follows a Download the FileZilla client version 3 1 5 1 from http Awww oldapps com filezilla php b Remove the current version and then install version 3 1 5 1 c Connect to the PLC d There should be two directories same as always local site your PC and remote site the PLC You should see your files in the PLC directory e Open the folder in the local site that you would like to save the files to f Right click on a file in the PLC directory such as 0 HTM and select download You should see the file in the folder on your local site g To move files from the PC to the PLC open the folder in the local site where the file is located and right click it to select upload You should see it in the PLC or you will be asked to overwrite it if the same file name is there already O D TRIANGLE 2 37 URA RESEARCH LIJ Ki INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 FileZilla Can Connect The First Time But Could Not Re connect After Time Out 3 FileZilla is normally setup to time out after 1 minutes of no activity Howe
278. se you can replace the duty cycle with a value e g DM 1 and run statement such as SETPWM 2 DM 1 50 Set PWM 2 output to DM 1 100 duty cycle at 50 Hz 11 4 3 RC Servo Positioning Resolution Since the resolution on the Fx2424 PLC s PWM output is precise to 0 01 at 50Hz this means that you can get a maximum of 500 discrete positions within the travel range of the RC Servo This should be sufficiently accurate for many applications such as HVAC damper control or control of proportional valves The actual positioning accuracy and precision however will depend on the quality of the RC Servo Ti aes 11 5 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 12 Real Time Clock Chapter 12 Real Time Clock Ca TRIANGLE Lied RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 12 Real Time Clock 12 REAL TIME CLOCK 12 1 Introduction A Real Time Clock RTC is a device that keeps accurate date and time information down to the second The RTC in the Fx2424 is battery backed so that time will continue to run if PLC power is lost with or without warning Previously on the M Series PLCs it was not possible to keep the RTC running after power loss unless the MX RTC IC was installed However the MX RTC is not compatible and is no longer required with the Fx2424 because a battery is used to power the on board RTC Due to safety restrictions by air transportation the battery may or may not be included with your Fx2424 If included it may not be installed on the PLC
279. sensenennuennnnnnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn unnn nn nnana na 1 3 131 Anal g W O Porte 1 3 122 Digitali O PONSE cenene a aa e e E a e aE 1 4 1 2 3 Output Ground Terminal 1 4 1 3 POWER SUP DIY eE E A E 1 4 1 4 Digital INp t Cir Quits vrsna anaana aaa n aaea aa anaa eee eee ees 1 5 1 5 Digital Output ei lte TEE 1 6 UG erte e 1 6 1 5 2 Digital Qutput Wiring DiaQraim secczscctccccevssccceseatecetevesndeeeataveceeensbecestuareteeenedee edb ianeeyeseneacteeelnats 1 6 ToS Inductive LEET 1 7 1 6 Bei EVT Tu EE 1 7 1 6 1 Wiring Instruction of LCD216 and LCD420 Backlight 0 c cceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeeee 1 8 1 6 2 Programming The LCD Display ccccceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeceaeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeesaaeeeeaaeeenees 1 9 1 7 Program and Data MCMoOry sccccccceecceceseeeceeeseeeseensneeeeeenneaeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeeaseeeeensneeeeeenseeeeeenees 1 10 LGT Program Memo ace iieiea a er E aaah individ eats 1 10 1 7 2 Non Volatile FRAM Memonm 1 10 LC Nolatile Data Mem sessen eine etn adenine ieee eee 1 10 1 7 4 Extended Data File Storage 0 0 2 cecccceescceceneeeeeaeeeeneeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeaeessaaesseaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeessaes 1 11 1 8 DIP SWITCHES oenar raaa aaea aaa r aa aaa aaa a aa Saa a aa ae ED aS aa Aaa ea a aED aaa 1 12 1 8 1 Usefulness Of SWIA anan asiaa aae aia apaa aaa a AAKA 1 12 1 9 Real Time Clock Battery nnsunnsunnnunnnunnnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn unnn nnnn nnne nnnn n
280. slave PLCs 21 3 Configuring The PLC As Modbus TCP Gateway The command used to define a serial port to become Modbus TCP Gateway serial port is as follow SETSYSTEM 12 n Where n 1 2 or 3 for COMM1 COMM2 and COMM port This statement must be run once could be during start up via 1st Scan pulse to configure the serial port n to be used to send out RTU commands and received RTU responses If SETSYSTEM 12 n is not run then the Modbus gateway function will be disabled Here is how it works A Modbus TCP client such as a SCADA HMI etc would send a Modbus TCP request with a specific 8 bit Modbus slave ID to the gateway PLC If the ID matches the native ID that is assigned to the gateway PLC then the PLC will react normally by sending its own Modbus TCP response packet back to the client The PLC will not send any RTU command out of the gateway serial port This means that the client can access the master PLC s own register as per normal Ti aes 21 1 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 21 Using PLC As A Modbus TCP Gateway However if the client send a Modbus TCP packet with a different ID from that of the gateway PLC s ID then the gateway PLC will translate the command into a Modbus RTU command and send it out of the gateway serial port n defined by the SETSYSTEM 12 n statement The PLC will also wait for a response from the RTU slave via the gateway serial port and if it does receive a response it will translate it
281. splay Programming Chapter 13 LCD Display Programming E Sch TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 13 LCD Display Programming 13 LCD DISPLAY PROGRAMMING 13 1 SETLCD Command The SETLCD y x string TBASIC command allows you to easily display any string of up to 20 characters on the y line starting from the x column E g to display the message T100MD 888 on the 3 line starting from the 5th character position from the left end of the screen you use the command SETLCD 3 5 T1OOMD 888 Normally y 1 2 3 4 x 1 2 20 Integers must be converted to strings using the STR or HEX function before they can be displayed using SETLCD You can use the concatenation operator to combine a few components together in the command E g SETLCD 1 1 Rm Temp STR ADC 1 100 3 CHRS 223 C The function STR ADC 1 100 3 reads the content of ADC channel 1 divides it by 100 and converts the result into a 3 digit string The CHR 223 appends a special character which corresponds to the symbol E g if ADC 1 returns the value 1234 the final string being displayed will be Rm Temp 012 C 13 2 Special Commands For LCD Display If you use the SETLCD command with line 0 then the strings will be treated as special instructions to be sent to the LCD module to program it for various modes of operation This includes blinking cursor underline
282. ted and Directory Status Connected A P meee rw Grectory listing listing successful Response SE Command TYPE I Command PORT 192 168 1 160 227 126 Also you should be able to Response 200 OK D Command D see the preloaded files in the Responso 2250K remote site directory which is US irectory listing successful lt a 3 ma aaee the bottom right window Computer p bs m C 09 m Hm F RECOVERY H Gi Filename Filesize Filetype Last modified Filename Filesize Filetype Last modified Permissiot amp c Local Disk SIb ab RECOVERY Local Disk ei 0 HTM 3 228 Firefox Doc 1 1 2007 TWX aac CD Drive B nus 10 783 JScript Scri 1 1 2007 pstaa lt m D w D 5 directories 2 files Total size 14 011 bytes Server Local file Direction Remote file Size Priority Status Queued files _ Failed transfers Successful transfers D Queue empty ee Figure 2 10 3 If you are not able to connect to the PLC s web server or if you can t get a successful directory listing then you should first double check the settings you have configured for FileZilla compared to the settings configured in the F Server The next thing to check is your Windows firewall which must allow the PLC to make a connection back to the PC due to the use of active transfer settings You can disable the firewall temporarily to check if it is affecting your FileZilla connection If you have confirmed t
283. the TRIAC after the last zero crossing the minimum value cannot equal 0 Also please be reminded again that the voltage applied to the load is non linear with respect to the firing angle controlled by the value parameter 18 4 3 Programming Example Please find the demo program SetDimmer PC6 in the zip file that you can download from http www tri plc com trilogi FPLCsamples zip The demo program lets you experiment with turning a lamp slowly ON Fade ON effect and slowly OFF Fade OFF effect as well as letting you experiment with manual control of the lamp s brightness using two push buttons F RE 18 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 19 ZigBee Networking Chapter 19 ZigBee Networking Ti aes 18 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication 19 ZIGBEE NETWORKING 19 1 Introduction ZigBee trademark of ZigBee Alliance is the commercial name of a specification for a suite of high level communication protocols using small low power digital radios based on the IEEE 802 15 4 standard Please refer to Wikipedia for a good fundamental description of the ZigBee networking protocols ZigBee is gaining popularity with building automation and HVAC equipment suppliers as a low cost secure and open standard intercommunication medium among devices used for the building industry More equipment will soon appear with built in support for communication using the ZigBee protocol 19 2 Installation of the XBEE Mod
284. ther than continue from the last aborted timing operation 4 1 2 Counter Coils A counter is also a special kind of relay that has a programmable Set Value SV When a counter coil is energized for the first time after a reset it will load the value of SV 1 into its count register From there on every time the counter coil is energized from OFF to ON the counter decrements its count register value by 1 Note that the coil must go through an OFF to ON cycle in order to decrement the counter If the coil remains energized all the time the counter will not decrement Hence a counter is suitable for counting the number of cycles an operation has gone through When the count register hits zero all of the counter s N O contacts will be turned ON These counter contacts will remain ON regardless of whether the counter s coil is energized or not To turn OFF these contacts you have to reset the counter using a special counter reset function RSctr 4 1 3 Sequencers A sequencer is a highly convenient feature for programming machines or processes that operate in fixed sequences These machines operate in a fixed clearly distinguishable step by step order starting from an initial step progressing to the final step and then restarting from the initial step again At any moment there must be a step counter to keep track of the current step number Every step of the sequence must be accessible and can be used to trigger some action such as turning o
285. through the Internet or network Firewall Windows Firewall is currently using settings For the public network location What are the risks of unblocking a program gi Windows Firewall is helping to protect your computer To enable an exception select its check box Program or port OBITS Peercaching Inbound connections that do not have an exception are blocked M Bonjour Clou Network Access Core Networking O Distributed Transaction Coordinator What are network locations File and Printer Sharing Filezilla FTP Server Diiscsi Service iTunes Okey Management Service ONetlogon Service ist D eee en D Windows Firewall is on Change settings m Display a notification when a program is blocked No Network location Public network Add program Add port Properties Delete E Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program See also Figure 2 10 4 2 9 3 Transferring and Retrieving Files from the PLC Web Server Now that you have a connection to the PLC s web server and can view the directory listing you should be able to see any files that have been preloaded into the PLC Downloading Files The first thing to do is to download the preloaded files from the web server and store them somewhere on your computer To do this you will need to open up the folder on your computer that you want to store the files in Then you can drag the files from the web server via F
286. tion r The ch parameter is the channel This is how the PLC knows which stepper motor channel to turn on Now this parameter is also used to set the stepper motor channel to controller mode full step driver mode or half step driver mode To set the stepper motor channel to controller mode the ch parameter should be a 1 2 or 3 This is the same as for the M Series PLCs except that channel 3 is now available To set the stepper motor channel to driver mode the ch parameter needs to have a 1 prefixed to it for full step mode and a 2 prefixed for half step mode 10 4 2 Full Step Driver Mode STEPMOVE 11 100 1 Stepper channel 1 will be driven 100 full steps STEPMOVE 12 100 1 Stepper channel 2 will be driven 100 full steps STEPMOVE 13 100 1 Stepper channel 3 will be driven 100 full steps 10 4 3 Half Step Driver Mode STEPMOVE 21 100 1 Stepper channel 1 will be driven 100 half steps STEPMOVE 22 100 1 Stepper channel 2 will be driven 100 half steps STEPMOVE 23 100 1 Stepper channel 3 will be driven 100 half steps The same format should be used for STEPMOVEABS except that the count parameter is changed to the position parameter more details provided in the Programmers Reference manual and also in the program examples section of this chapter 10 4 4 Setting the Accele
287. tion selected the TRILOGI client can log in to the FServer using whatever username and password since FServer will bypass the username and password authentication and allow the client to log in 2 1 12 Access Level You can define the access level that the TRILOGI client is permitted to operate under on the PLC Three access levels are currently defined 1 for Programmer 2 for User and 3 for Guest Please see the i TRiLOGI Programmer s Reference manual for the definition of the access levels 2 1 13 Advanced Configuration The Advanced Configuration button lets you configure other more advanced beyond the basic Ethernet configuration but less often used features of the PLC This includes definition of the Trusted IP addresses see Section 2 4 2 as well as calibrations of the PLCs Analog I Os see Section 5 5 r V TRIANGLE 9 5 LRR RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 1 14 Standalone Version of Ethernet Configuration Software The standalone version of the Ethernet Configuration software that was previously the only option for configuring the Ethernet port and advanced settings on the F series can still be downloaded from our website at the following URL http www tri plc com download FserverConfig index htm Please download and run the SetupFPLCConfig exe file from the above URL to install the F series Ethernet Configuration Utility program After you have installed the confi
288. to boost the current switching capability If the load is of a different voltage and the load current is high you should use an opto isolator to isolate the PLC from the load as in Figure 11 2 Flyback Diode Bridge Rectifier 4N35 Optoisolator 12 24V DC V Power For PLC ea OUTPUTS EE N channel Power MOSFET Voltage divider to obtain approx e g IRF530 can sink 12A DC 10V DC at gate G For DC48V at up to DC100V max load choose R1 3 9K R2 1K Figure 11 2 PWM Speed Control of a large DC Motor Ti aes 11 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 11 Pulse Width Modulated Outputs Note 1 The opto isolator must be able to operate at a frequency matching that of the PWM frequency otherwise the resulting output waveform will be distorted and effective speed control cannot be attained 2 The simple PWM speed control scheme described above is the open loop type and does not regulate the speed with respect to changing load torque Closed loop speed control is attainable if a tachometer either digital or analog is used which feeds back to the CPU the actual speed Based on the error between the set point speed and the actual speed the software can then adjust the PWM duty cycle accordingly to offset speed variation caused by the varying load torque A PID function may also be invoked to provide sophisticated PID type of speed control 3 The Fx2424 s PWM can be used to control the speed of small motors on
289. to have a Set Value of 1000 4 3 4 Controlling a Timer or Counter in a Custom Function You can activate a timer or a counter directly from within a custom function simply by assigning their present value counter to a desired value E g To start a 50 seconds timer TIMERPV 2 500 Timer 2 will time out 50 0 seconds later E g To decrement a counter or a Sequencer CTRPV 10 CTRPV 10 1 Counter 10 is decremented by 1 CO TRIANGLE _ URA RESEARCH 4 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers 4 4 Programming Sequencers on Ladder Logic 4 4 1 Introduction TRILOGI Version 6 supports eight sequencers of 32 steps each Each sequencer uses one of the first eight counters Counter 1 to Counter 8 as its step counter Any one or all of the first eight counters can be used as sequencers Seq1 to Seq8 To use a sequencer first define the sequencer name in the Counter table by pressing the lt F2 gt key and scroll to the Counter Table Any counter to be used as sequencer can only assume label names Seq to Seq8 corresponding to the counter numbers For e g if Sequencer 5 is to be used Counter 5 must be defined as Seq5 Next enter the last step number for the program sequence in the Value column of the table A circuit that uses the special function Advance Sequencer AVSeq will need to be constructed The first time the execution condition for the AVseq function goes from OFF to
290. to on or on to off The output light would need to be entered into the I O Table as an output as well and could represent any desired output 3 3 5 Example 3 Test the Status of an Output This can be done using both the TESTBIT v n and TESTIO labeiname command Using TESTBIT v n X TESTBIT INPUT 2 1 status of input 10 on 1 off 0 is stored in variable X Using TESTIO labelname X TESIO button status of input button defined in the I O table is stored in variable X E RE 3 4 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers Chapter A Timers Counters amp Sequencers H CA v TRIANGLE URA RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 4 Timers Counters amp Sequencers 4 TIMERS COUNTERS AND SEQUENCERS 4 1 Introduction 4 1 1 Timer Coils A timer is a special kind of relay that when its coil is energized must wait for a fixed length of time before closing its contact The waiting time is dependent on the Set Value SV of the timer Once the delay time is up the timer s N O contacts will be closed for as long as its coil remains energized When the coil is de energized i e turned OFF all the timer s N O contacts will be opened immediately However if the coil is de energized before the delay time is up the timer will be reset and its contact will never be closed When the last aborted timer is re energized the delay timing will restart and use the SV of the timer ra
291. to other PLCs However if more than one PLC simultaneously enables their transmitters and send out host link commands then the signals will conflict and the messages will be garbled up If the network traffic is low then the solution may be a matter of having the master check for the correct response after sending out a command string If there is error in the response string the master should back off the network for a short while use different timing for different PLCs and then re send the command until a correct response string is obtained Fortunately the NETCMD function of Fx series PLC automatically senses the RS485 lines until they are free before sending out the command string to reduce the chance of a collision It also checks the integrity of the response string for correct FCS Frame Check Sequence characters before returning the string Please refer to the Programmer s Reference for detail description of the NETCMD function However the program must still check the following items in the response string to verify that the string returned from NETCMD function indeed comes from the PLC that it had talked to and not from another PLC which tries to send a command to someone else i The ID is correct ii The header is identical to the command string iii The length of response string is correct Pros and Cons This method does not incur any hardware cost but it requires careful programming and strict checking
292. to use the PWM output to generate the 38KHz carrier wave pulses for sending encoded IR remote commands This enables the PLC to control your home TV DVD player and air conditioner Usually it is better to select as high a frequency as possible because the resulting effect is smoother for higher frequencies However some systems may not respond properly if the PWM frequency is too high in such cases a lower frequency should be selected The TBASIC SETPWM statement controls the frequency and duty cycle settings of the PWM channel The Fx2424 PLC features four channels of PWM on its digital outputs 5 PWM channel 1 to output 8 PWM channel 4 please see Chapter 6 for the pin assignment Since all four PWM outputs are high voltage high current outputs 24V 8A peak 4A continuous they can be used to directly control the speed of a small DC motor They can also directly drive proportional variable position valves whose opening is dependent on the applied voltage Note When using the PWM output to drive a motor or solenoid valve please take note of the need to add a bypass diode to absorb the inductive kick that will occur when the output current to the load is turned OFF as mentioned in Chapter 1 5 3 11 3 Increasing Output Drive Current Opto lsolated The advantage of using the PWM is that you can easily amplify the drive current to a larger load such as a larger permanent magnet DC motor by using a power transistor or power MOSFET
293. tor driver STEPMOVEABS ch position r The ch parameter would specify which stepper motor channel is being used and whether it is being used as a controller a full step driver or a half step driver The position parameter specifies how many pulses the motor will move relative to its home position If the motor were in half step driver mode then position would be in half steps r O D TRIANGLE 0 7 IRR RESEARCH Chapter 10 Stepper Motor Control The r parameter specifies which internal relay will be activated once the motor has moved to its new position This relay would be cleared when the STEPMOVEABS command is executed in case it was already activated 10 4 6 1 Example PLC as a Motor Controller In this example the PLC would be a controller and would send the control pulse and direction pulse to a driver board STEPMOVEABS 1 500 101 Stepper 1 to move fwd 500 steps from home and turn on relay 101 STEPMOVEABS 2 75 102 Stepper 2 to move back 75 steps from home and turn on relay 102 STEPMOVEABS 3 200 103 Stepper 3 to move fwd 200 steps from home and turn on relay 103 10 4 6 2 Example PLC as a Full Step Motor Driver STEPMOVEABS 11 300 101 Stepper 1 to move fwd 300 pulses from home and turn on relay 101 STEPMOVEABS 12 100 102 Stepper 2 to move fwd 100 pulses from home and turn on relay 102 STEPMOVEABS 13 90 103 Stepper 3 to move back 90
294. ts on the same terminal block This terminal should be connected to the OV of the PLC s power supply to provide a ground return path for the 8 outputs on the same terminal block 1 3 Power Supply The Fx2424 PLC requires a single regulated 12 to 24V 5 ripple DC power supply for the CPU The PLC typically consumes less than 100mA and thus you may also use the same power supply to power the CPU and a small output load as long as the total load current is within the power supply maximum limit It is recommended that whenever possible use a higher voltage power supply since the voltage difference between ON and OFF state is wider for operation at higher voltage If the loads require higher current Such as driving stepper motors then it is recommended that a separate power supply be used for the output load Note that if you choose to use two separate power supplies their OV terminals should be tied together to provide a common ground reference for the two power supplies The two power supplies are also recommended to be of the same output voltage Otherwise if the voltage of the load power is lower than the voltage of the CPU power the output LED will light up even when the output driver is not energized This is because the current could flow out of the PLC s output into the lower voltage load power supply and therefore light up the LED This can be very confusing to users even though it should not damage the LED Should this happen
295. turn on relay 103 Moving Backwards STEPMOVE 21 300 101 channel 1 to send 300 backward pulses to motor and turn on relay 101 STEPMOVE 22 1000 102 channel 2 to send 1000 backward pulses to motor and turn on relay 102 STEPMOVE 23 7500 103 channel 3 to send 7500 backward pulses to motor and turn on relay 103 10 4 6 Using the STEPMOVEABS Command This command allows you to move the stepper motor ch to an absolute position indicated by the position parameter At the end of the move the relay r will be turned ON Position can be between 27 to 2 i e about 2 x 10 The absolute position is calculated with respect to the last move from the HOME position The HOME position is set when the STEPHOME command is executed The speed and acceleration profile are determined by the STEPSPEED command as in the original command set This command automatically computes the number of pulses and the direction required to move the stepper motor to the new position with respect to the current location The current location can be determined at any time by the STEPCOUNTABS function Once the STEPMOVEABS command is executed re execution of this command or the STEPMOVE command will have no effect until the entire motion is completed or aborted by the STEPSTOP command The STEPMOVEABS command is also used to specify whether the PLC is a motor controller a full step motor driver or a half step mo
296. ugh MODBUS names the Ox address space as Coil which means output bits and the 1x address space as Input Status which means input bits only the Fx2424 treat both spaces the same Some MODBUS drivers only allow you to read from Ox space and write to 1x space but you still use the same offset shown on Table 14 1 Example To map a lamp symbol to PLC Input 5 you select the MODBUS register address 0 0005 You can also map a lamp symbol to the PLC s output 2 In that case you should map it to MODBUS register address 0 0258 To map a toggle switch symbol to the PLC input 5 if you are restricted to select only MODBUS 1x address space then you will have to map the switch to 1 0005 and likewise you can map the switch to output 2 using MOBDUS address 1 0258 But if the driver allows the switch to be mapped to 0x space then you can use MODBUS register space 0 0005 and 0 0258 for the mapping with identical results r TR RESEARCH 14 10 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications 14 7 1 2 WORD ADDRESS MAPPING As shown in Table 14 1 to access DM 1 from the PLC you use MODBUS address space 4 1001 Modicon convention 1000 in binary address and so on To access the Real Time Clock Hour data TIME 1 use 4 0513 The I O channels can also be read or written as 16 bit words by using the addresses from 4 0001 to 4 0320 Some MODBUS drivers such as National Instruments Lookout software eve
297. uld purchase a USB to RS232 converter see http www tri plc com USB RS232 htm in AccessLevel 1 Proarammer w Retrieve Parameters from PLC V Reboot PLC after Save Advanced Config Close Figure 2 1 2 order to run this program Before you make any changes to the PLC s Ethernet configuration parameters it is a good idea to retrieve the current settings You can do this by clicking on the Retrieve Parameters from PLC button and answer Yes when prompted If your i TRiLOGI is not yet connected to a TLServer software or directly to the PLC s F Server then you will see the standard login popup window 2 Tr TRIANGLE T RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port After you have retrieved the existing parameters from the PLC you will see that various fields in the configuration software screen are filled up Note that the Fx PLC has two built in Server programs that listen on a few different ports on the PLC for incoming TCP IP request packets 1 The FServer supports the TRi proprietary programs such as the i TRiLOGI software and TRi ExcelLink program The FServer listens on the default port 9080 which is also the default port that i TRILOGI uses to connect to TLServer a PC based server program that is needed for programming the PLCs via RS232 or RS485 serial ports 2 A MODBUS TCP server that listens on port 502 and supports the industry standard MODBUS TCP protocols
298. ule The Fx2424 is designed to easily interface to the XBEE family of ZigBee modules produced by Digi International Inc There are two rows of 10 pin solder pads on the Fx2424 s PCB and to each you can solder a 2mm pitch single in line socket that you can purchase from http www digikey com Part number S5751 10 ND as shown in the following diagrams i l E 5751 10 ND Remove U3 RS485 Driver for COMM2 Figure 19 1 Once you have soldered the two rows of sockets you can purchase the XBEE module directly from Digi International http www digi com and plug the XBEE module into these two sockets Through these connector pins the F2424 PLC provides the 3 3V power to the XBEE module as well as connects its COMM2 Receive and Transmit data lines to the XBEE module However the PLC does not support the XBEE serial port hardware handshaking The Fx2424 PLC uses only its COMM serial port to communicate with the XBEE module It can use the PRINT 2 OUTCOMM 2 INCOMM 2 and INPUT 2 commands to configure the XBEE module for Transparent mode or API mode to integrate it with a ZigBee network However since the Fx2424 s COMM2 port is already pre installed with an RS485 driver IC at the U3 socket IC part number is 75HVD3082 or equivalent you MUST REMOVE the COMM2 RS485 driver IC if you wish to install the XBEE module to prevent signal conflicts You can easily remove the 8 pin RS485 driver IC from its DIP socket and store it in
299. urn the IP address as a string such as 130 94 216 144 You can then use this IP address string in all the other NS commands to be described in the following sub sections The DNS server may take some time to resolve the domain name If it is unable to resolve the domain name then it will return an error string so your program should test to see if it receives the ERRO7 error message to determine whether the returned string is useable Although it is possible to embed the domain name directly in the NS command in place of IP address it is usually much more efficient to use the IP address directly if it is known in advance This is because the DNS server may take some time to resolve the domain name into IP address each time it is called and there is a possibility that the domain name server may be overloaded or down momentarily when it is needed and hence complicating the attempt for the PLC to connect to a remote server Therefore we recommend that you use the lt DNS domain gt tag to resolve the domain name into IP address first and then use the resulting IP address for all Network Services commands via the Internet Send Email Format lt EMAIL recipient email address gt SENDER sender email address SUBJECT whatever text string body of the email line 1 body of the email line 2 Response lt OK gt Email successfully sent ERR 04 Not Connected Failed to connect to SMTP server Section 2 1 3 ERR 06 Email
300. urpose TR RESEARCH 18 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 18 Light Dimmer Control 18 3 Zero crossing Detection As explained in 18 2 the Fx2424 CPU must know the precise moment the zero crossing occurs so that it can schedule the time interval when it needs to send out the firing pulse to turn on the SSR This can be accomplished by feeding the AC power through a bi directional opto isolator and the output would drive input 6 of the Fx2424 PLC The falling edge of the signal detected at input 6 would send an interrupt to the CPU to start the scheduling of the various time slots that each light dimmer output is to fire a triggering pulse This means that if you want to use the light dimmer control you must configure input 6 as an interrupt input for capturing the zero crossing signal and therefore input 6 will no longer be available for other functions such as for HSC or Pulse Measurement Note that since all Fx2424 inputs are 24V NPN only you will need to construct the following interface circuits to feed the AC signal into the PLC s input 6 F2424 PLC Figure 18 4 The above shows the wiring diagram of using an external opto isolator to provide the zero crossing signal to the PLC s NPN input 6 18 4 Programming Light Dimmer Control 18 4 1 Enable Zero Crossing Interrupt Before programming any of the light dimmer channels you first need to enable the zero crossing interrupts for the zero crossing signal fed into input
301. ust to make life a little easier for you as shown in Figure 17 1 17 4 Learning and Playing back IR Remote Control Signals Unfortunately there isn t any international standard for the IR remote control protocol and each brand of TV VCR amplifier and air conditioning etc manufacturer actually implements their own proprietary protocols as they wish Fortunately most of the IR remote controls encode the digital 1 and 0 using pulses of IR beams modulated at a frequency between 36 to 42 KHz with a 38KHz carrier frequency being the most common The main difference among most manufacturers implementation is the duration of the ON and OFF time of these modulated IR beams that are used to represent logic 0 and logic 1 The IR remote control sensor used on the Fx2424 is optimized for a 38KHz carrier frequency but it is also able to receive signals encoded by a wide range of carrier frequencies between 36KHz and 42 KHz Although the PLC firmware is designed to only decode IR signal based on Sony SIRC protocol the IR remote sensor has another important use which is to learn record IR remote control signals sent by most other brands of IR remote control The PLC does not attempt to decode these signals Instead it simply measures the pulse width of the ON and OFF times of the carrier pulses and store this timing information into the PLC s internal flash memory This pre recorded IR signal data can then be called up unde
302. ut with different port numbers 2 1 8 LAN Speed You can set the LAN speed of the Fx2424 to be either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps default per second using this menu option Most modern Ethernet switch or router will automatically connect to the PLC using its default LAN speed and there is usually no need for user to configure this option except in very special application where the devices are connected via a 10Mbps Ethernet hub which demands all connected device to be set to the same 10Mbps LAN speed 2 1 9 Node Name You can assign up to 16 ASCII characters any character in naming a PLC The node name is currently not used by the network router so it is merely a convenient name for user to identify a PLC 2 1 10 Username and Password FServer only You can use the username and password feature to prevent unauthorized access to the FServer It adopts the same proprietary encryption scheme used in the TLServer and TRILOGI software to encrypt the password transmission However unlike the TLServer that allows you to define unlimited number of usernames and passwords the FServer only permits a single set of username password and this is limited to a length of 16 characters Although you may define the passwords for a USER and a VISITOR privilege 2 1 11 Use Username Password Yes No In applications where there is no danger of unauthorized access to the PLC via FServer you can elect not to use the username password With the No op
303. uter with standard Ethernet cable The final network configuration will likely resemble the below simple network diagram r m V TRIANGLE 2 7 URR RESEARCH L INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port If you are on a corporate network then you will need to consult the IT administrator to get the PLC connected to the network Modem Router IP 192 168 1 1 RJ45 terminated straight through CAT5 Ethernet Cable a Super PLC IP 192 168 1 5 IP 192 168 1 100 fe TRIANGLE E TRY RESEARCH 2 8 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port 2 2 2 Setting up Ethernet Communication Directly Between a PC and a F series PLC It is possible for your PC to communicate directly with a F series PLC through the Ethernet port This means that you can have a peer to peer connection between the F series PLC and your PC without an Internet connection or any additional network equipment The PC being used would need a spare Ethernet port in order to do this What You Will Need 1 A PC with a spare Ethernet port RJ45 connection 2 An Ethernet cable 3 A F series PLC There are two types of Ethernet cables A standard straight through cable which is used in most situations and a crossover cable which is required when there is no auto switching hardware in either of the two Ethernet ports PC and PLC The F series PLC does NOT have auto switching capabilities so it will depend on the PCs Ethernet port whether or not a
304. ver Since the PLC s FTP server can only handle a single FTP connection at a time it is good to avoid letting FileZilla time out due to no activity This is because when FileZilla times out it cutoff the connection to the PLC But if for whatever reason the PLC were to miss the disconnection information it will be left in a half open state and will not be able to accept a new connection When this happens and if you try to reconnect to the PLC again after the connection has been dropped by FileZilla you will most likely be unable to connect to the PLC again until after the PLC time out its FTP connection due to no activity The only quick fix is to power on reset the PLC so that it starts up fresh and can accept new connection again You can set the FileZilla timeout settings to a larger number e g 300 seconds using the FileZilla s Edit gt Settings menu item so that it will not time out automatically too quickly You should always select disconnect after a file transfer to properly close the connection and then the PLC will be properly disconnected and is ready to accept new connection Problem Using FileZilla To Transfer Files to Multiple PLCs Configured To The Same Default IP Address Even Though Only One PLC Is Connected To The Router At A Time When you connect FileZilla to a PLC with a particular IP address e g 192 168 1 5 for the first time Windows will memorize the MAC ID address of that PLC and associate it with this IP addr
305. very simple to implement and can be used for non time critical applications You only need to execute SETSYSTEM 19 t once and INPUT n will block for the same t x 10 millisecond every time it is executed until SETSYSTEM 19 t is run again To return the INPUT n to non blocking mode run SETSYSTEM 19 0 PRINT n The PRINT statement transfers its entire argument to a 256 byte serial out buffer which is separate from the serial in buffer The PRINT statement therefore does not affect the content of the serial buffer for incoming characters The operating system handles the actual transfer of each byte of data out of the serial out buffer in a timely manner Again each COMM port has its own independent 256 byte serial out buffer and hence the two serial ports can operate totally independently of each other Note that the PLC automatically enables the RS485 transmit driver when it sends serial characters out of its COMM 2 and 3 ports When the stop bit of the last character in the serial out buffer has been sent out the operating system immediately disables the RS485 driver and enables the receiver This greatly eases the use of the RS485 port since there is no need for a user to bother with the often critical timing of controlling the RS485 driver receiver direction OQUTCOMM This command sends only a single byte out of the serial COMM port without going through the serial out buffer For RS485 port it enables the RS485 transmitter before
306. when the firing angle is near 0 degree and will be dimmest when the firing angle is near 180 degree Controlling lamp brightness this way is highly efficient Unfortunately the transfer function is non linear i e the brightness is neither proportional non inversely proportional to the firing angle and therefore it has limited applications in precision digital control system But it can provide low cost control for devices such as lamps since the operator who receives instant visual feedback can vary the firing angle manually until a satisfactory brightness is obtained Ti aes 18 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 18 Light Dimmer Control In a commercial light dimmer a potentiometer is typically used with a capacitor to vary the timing O where the TRIAC is allowed to start conducting as shown in the example circuit in Figure 18 2 120VAC Figure 18 2 Commercial Light Dimmer Circuit On the Fx2424 we will make use of the computational power of the CPU to control the firing angle and therefore achieving the same effect as light dimmer control 18 2 Control of 120V 240V AC TRIAC Since 120V 240V AC voltages power most incandescent light bulbs it is essential to provide galvanic isolation between the AC lamp power and the PLC s low voltage electronics What you should use is an opto isolated TRIAC that can be controlled by a low DC voltage between 3 and 30V These kinds of TRIACs are commonly known as Solid State Relay SSR
307. will need to edit its connection and at this point you will be presented with a selection table that corresponds to the memory map of that PLC type Example 1 To connect an indicator lamp to Input 9 of the PLC You will need to program the switch to connect to IR00 8 for the OMRON protocol However If you have defined the PLC as MODBUS type then this indicator lamp should be connected to bit address 1 0265 In either case there is no need to learn about the actual command format of the protocol itself as the SCADA software will automatically generate the required commands to access the input address that has been chosen for the object Example 2 To display readings from ADC 3 as a bar graph on SCADA Since the data from ADC 8 is not directly mapped to MODBUS or OMRON in Table 14 1 you need to add a statement in the custom function that reads ADC 3 and copies it into a data memory e g DM 100 ADC 3 Now you can program the bar graph on the SCADA screen to be connected to DM 100 if you use the OMRON protocol For the MODBUS protocol the object should be connected to the address 4 1100 r TR RESEARCH 14 12 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 14 Serial Communications 14 8Using The PLC As a Modbus Master Getting Data From Power or Flow Meters The Fx2424 support for the MODBUS protocol goes beyond being a MODBUS slave only You can use the TBASIC READMOBUS and WRITEMODBUS commands as well as READMB2 and WRITEMB2 to sen
308. word Cancel OK Figure 2 2 1 When the Login To TLServer screen pops up enter the IP address port the username and the password that you have defined for the FServer earlier using the configuration software and click on the Detect ID button to detect the PLC s ID If TRILOGI is able to connect to the Fx2424 via the Ethernet network then the PLC s ID will appear in the ID box When you click the OK button the on line monitoring screen should appear and you should see the Activities LED on the RJ45 connector blinking away You have now successfully connected to the FServer and you can run all the commands under the Controller menu including transferring your new program to the PLC or setting the PLC s Real Time Clock etc For more details on using these commands please refer to i TRILOGI Programmer s Reference TR RESEARCH 2 15 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 2 Ethernet Port Likewise to transfer your new program to the PLC you can click on the Controller menu and select Program Transfer to PLC or press the lt Ctrl T gt keys If TRILOGI is already connected to the FServer the program transfer will begin immediately after you ve confirmed your action Otherwise the same Login to TLServer screen as shown on Figure 2 2 1 will appear for you to complete the login sequence Note 1 Unlike the TLServer which allows unlimited connection time the FServer on the PLC wil
309. ws STEPSPEED 3 100 50 This would be equivalent to an acceleration of 100 pulses s2 which can be calculated using the following expression A V 2S 1007 2 50 100pps 10 4 5 Using the STEPMOVE Command Once the STEPSPEED command is executed the STEPMOVE command can be used to move the stepper motor forwards or backwards The STEPMOVE command is also used to specify whether the PLC is a motor controller a full step motor driver or a half step motor driver STEPMOVE ch count r The ch parameter specifies which stepper motor channel is being used and whether it is being used as a controller full step driver or half step driver The count parameter specifies how many pulses the motor will move If the motor were in half step driver mode then count would be in half steps The r parameter specifies which internal relay will be activated once the motor has moved count number of steps This relay would be cleared when the STEPMOVE command is executed in case it was already activated 10 4 5 1 Example PLC as a Motor Controller In this example the PLC would be a controller and would send the control pulse and direction pulse to a driver board Moving Forwards STEPMOVE 1 500 101 channel 1 would send 500 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 101 STEPMOVE 2 750 102 channel 2 would send 750 pulses to a driver and then turn on relay 102 STEPMOVE 3 200 103 channel 3 would sen
310. you will need to add a series diode to the output terminal to block the output LED currents from flowing through the load and back to the load power o_O TRIANGLE 1 4 Lied RESEARCH INTERNATIONAL Chapter 1 Installation Guide Please use only an industrial grade linear or switching regulated power supply from established manufacturers Using a poorly made switching power supply can give rise to a lot of problems if the noisy high frequency switching signals are not filtered properly Note If your application demands very stable analog I Os you should choose a linear power supply instead of a switching power source for the CPU Always place the power supply as close to the PLC as possible and use a separate pair of wires to connect the power to the PLC Keep the power supply wires as short as possible and avoid running them along side high current cables in the same cable conduit The Fx2424 PLC will be reset when the power supply voltage dips below 9V Itis a good idea to connect a 470uF to 1000uF 50V electrolytic capacitor near the power supply connector to suppress any undesirable voltage glitches from conducting into the PLC If other high current devices such as a frequency inverter were to affect the operation of the PLC you should then also connect a diode before the capacitor to prevent reverse current which might flow back to the power supply as shown in the following diagram Surge suppressor Recommended 470u
311. your parts bin as spare parts Since the Fx2424 s COMM3 port also uses the same RS485 driver chip the RS485 driver you just removed from COMM2 port would come in handy if the COMM driver happen to be damaged due to bad wiring Note 1 DO NOT be tempted to solder the XBEE board directly to the F2424 s PCB solder pad You will need to be able to remove the XBEE from F2424 and put into the Digi interface board whenever Ti Bees 19 2 INTERNATIONAL Chapter 19 Zigbee Communication you need to upgrade the firmware or change the role of the XBEE module e g configure it to be a coordinator a router or an end device to operate in AT mode or API mode etc 2 Although the XBEE socket can also accept the XBEE PRO module the current requirement for the XBEE PRO module at maximum transmission power exceeds the peak current capability of the PLC s voltage regulator and therefore we do not recommend installing the XBEE PRO OEM module into the F2424 PLC s XBEE socket If you must use an XBEE PRO you can install the XBEE PRO module onto the RS232 carrier board provided by Digi and interface to the PLC via the PLC s RS232 or RS485 port use Auto485 to convert the signal 19 3 Using The XBEE s Transparent Mode The simplest way that the Fx2424 can use the XBEE modules is to put the XBEE into Transparent Mode The Fx2424 can configure the XBEE module to make a transparent connection to any other XBEE module on the same ZigBe

F2424 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents